Home

METRONAMICA

1. graph window opens where is the name of the suitability base map and is the selected land use Set the suitability weight in the graph window Press the OK button in the Transformation graph window to apply the changes you made You can drag one of the bubbles to change its value You can right click on a bubble to edit the value precisely You can double click on a bubble to remove it from the graph You can double click outside any bubbles to add a new bubble to the graph You can click the Options button to change how the graph is displayed 4 Transformation Slope_degree for Industrial ae oar JB Sereda Conceptually the transformation function rules are applied to each cell in a base map This mapping produces a suitability factor map where all cells that are located inside modelling area and have a valid value in the base map have a value in the interval 0 1 and all other cells have the value NODATA You can view the suitability factor map by clicking on the Show button in the row of the sutiability base map factor With the suitability tool combining method After interpreting all the suitability factors for the selected land use you can select the method from the Combination method list to combine the different intermediate result maps suitability factor maps into a single suitability map for the selected land use The f
2. 19 New Metronamica project wizard Enter the basic project parameters aniston tt Simulation end year 2030 Region boundaries map E RIKS Netherlands_ML Regions_Maps regions rst 4 Noord Friesland 5 Zuidwest Friesland 6 Zuidoost Friesland 7 Noord Drenthe 8 Zuidoost Drenthe gg ET You can edit the region name by clicking on the cell of interesting and entering a new name Press the Next button A new wizard dialog window opens to ask you entering the basic land use model parameters Entering the basic land use model parameter The map size and cell size are displayed on the top of this window for your information which are generated from the region map that you imported in the previous step Note that in Metronamica all raster maps such as land use maps region maps suitability maps zoning maps should be strictly comparable they must be of identical map size i e cover the same area resolution cell size and origin the lower left x coordinate and the lower left y coordinate New Metronamica project wizard Enter the basic land use model parameters 650 x 540 rows x columns Colour Type Environmental group Socio economic group gt Click on the browse button next to Initial land use map The Open dialog window opens gt Navigate the initial land use map that you want to import and double click on it You have been imported the initial land use map to the new project 20
3. METRONAMICA DOCUMENTATION Content RIKS BV Layout RIKS BV Illustrations RIKS BV Published by RIKS BV RIKS BV This is a publication of the Research Institute for Knowledge Systems RIKS BV Maastrichter Pastoorstraat 14 P O Box 463 6200 AL Maastricht The Netherlands http www riks nl e mail info riks nl Tel 31 0 433501750 Fax 31 0 433501751 Product information METRONAMICA is a Spatial decision support system for urban and regional planning applications METRONAMICA is developed in the GEONAMICA software environment It comes as a stand alone software application with a user friendly interface METRONAMICA and GEONAMICA are developed by the Research Institute for Knowledge Systems Maastricht The Netherlands For more information you are kindly requested to contact RIKS BV or visit www metronamica nl Metronamica documentation RIKS BV Research Institute for Knowledge Systems BV So 4 4 P O Box 463 Be 6200 AL Maastricht oe The Netherlands a RIKS research institute for knowledge systems Contents MOEN PRODUC TION rnnt N a 1 Ze USER IVEAING Al xicestcesvestceadesustustossdeeudesuntussuesdeesdustale guns a Aa Eaa 3 2A GENE StA 6 eee een eee ee ieee eee aCe Rent ane etre conn anne ere e ei neee eee ey 3 ZI lt COMMULET FEQUARCIIEIIS scesexccsvccoevuctae puccteenica ns auch onecsnsadabiatae wecsauneetsanch 3 2 1 2 Installing METRONAMICA and accompanying tools cccccccccceee
4. gt sf c lu c M i Weighted arithmetic mean m t i gt S e W lu c i i S K i luc T lu c i Weighted geometric mean ole Sa ACES Z With the suitability tool Parameters input and output Table 3 13 Suitability parameters t sf Factor map Suitability factor value for factor i for land use u and at cell c at lu c i time ils m Ct Fal actor Table 3 14 Suitability wu Suitability A value for vacant or function land use u Transition potential map containing the suitability of cell c at time t Metronamica ML and LUT MBB Regional interaction 181 Without the suitability tool Algorithm t Opa t S lu c max lue Without the suitability tool Parameters input and output Table 3 15 Suitability ee g Suitability map The suitability map at time for each land use function or Imported via lu c land use vacant lu prepared in ArcGIS or OVERLAY GUI TOOL which have integer values from 0 to 10 or higher KY Maximum The maximum value of the suitability maps for all land GUI ve suitability for use vacants and functions all land uses Table 3 16 Suitability a Suitability A rescaled value in the range of 0 1 at time Transition potential t for vacant or function land use lu Metronamica ML and LUT containing the suitability of cell c at time MBB Regional interaction 3 1 6 Zoning Zoning without the zoning tool Purpose and use Zoning quant
5. 0 20 2 10000000000000C 1500 4 0 102973674476125 0 102973674476125 0 04803229607455 0 154 4605117141941 154 4605117141941 n name een amm Network tools Select edit All spatial indicators can be stored in log maps and as animations All other indicator results can be written to Excel Please refer to the section Saving results to for more information about how to writing information to Excel and how to create log maps and animations How to compare indicators over time and between scenarios is described in the section Analysing results For the algorithms of spatial indicators see the section 3 2 MBB Spatial indicators 93 2 3 4 Analysing results The final step of the impact assessment study is to analyse results within an integrated scenario e g the temporal evolution of an integrated scenario or to compare a set of integrated scenarios In order to analyse spatial results maps more carefully it 1s often helpful to analyse them pixel by pixel or to compare only the land use type you are interested in You have run the simulation with different integrated scenarios and saved result maps using Log maps command on the Options menu To investigate these maps you will use the MAP COMPARISON KIT MCK This is a tool that contains a multitude of algorithms to compare maps on a pixel by pixel basis For more information we refer to the user manual that comes with the MCK S
6. Deforested land map by clicking the Show map button If this indicator has not been calculated the map will be blank in the Deforested land map window Abandoned land The indicator is a predefined land use change indicator The abandoned land indicator shows where land use functions have changed into a vacant land use It shows a change over time The Abandoned land tab is structured by the Parameters and Output parts 133 Spatial indicators 50il sealing Urban expansion Forested areas Deforested land Abandoned land Habitat fragmentation Indicator type Land use change indicator V Calculate Parameters When you created the project with the wizard you had defined which land uses were land use function and which were land use vacant For more information see the section Entering the basic land use model parameter In the Parameters part you can still set whether a land use contributes to the abandoned or not and set the weight of each land use e The value 0 represents the case neither the occupied land nor the abandoned land e The value 1 represents occupied land from land use vacant to land use function e The value 2 represents abandoned land from land use function to land use vacant In the Output part you can observe the cell counts of occupied land and abandoned land per region in the table You can also open the Abandoned land map by clicking the Show map button
7. Over the past years we have developed a generic constrained cellular automata model and applied it to urban White and Engelen 1993 1994 1997 White et al 1997 and regional Engelen et al 1993 1995 1996 1997 2000 2002a cases This model is build up as follows Notation In this chapter we will consistently use the following notation LU The set of all land uses An element of this set a land use will be referred to by the letter f t Time index of a variable All dynamic variables have a time index that is written in superscript to the left of the variable for example Z A cell on the grid map Sets or variables that are defined for each cell on the map are preceded by a set of brackets within which the specific cell is indicated for example f c is the land use function occupying cell c Other notations will be introduced when appropriate The cell space The cell space consists of a 2 dimensional rectangular grid of square cells each representing an area ranging from 50 m x 50 m to 1000 m x 1000 m The grid size and shape varies according to the requirements of the application but is typically less than 1000 by 1000 cells The grid may be larger but at the cost of longer run times The same applies to the resolution of the model it is technically possible to increase the resolution of the CA model but this requires working on larger neighbourhoods in terms of cellular units as well which incr
8. gt Click on the cell for the zone of interest and in the column Cost gt Enter a new value the fixed car cost for the selected zone You have now adapted the scenario for the Infrustructure driver in the Policy measures page The active sub scenario at the top of the driver reflects this by showing the name modified You can create a new sub scenario with the values you just entered by clicking the Save sub scenario button gt Click the Save sub scenario button The Save infrastructure sub scenario window will pop up gt Enter the name Test cost per hour without quotes after the Save in new sub scenario option gt Enter a description and click the OK button You have now created a new sub scenario Test cost per hour for the infrustructure sub scenario Editing values of variables for the public transport for Metronamica LUT You are going to adapt the extra cost of the public transport for certain time period gt Go to Main window Drivers Policy measures gt Select Infrustrucutre driver from the list gt Click the Show Edit exogenous mode data button The Exogenous mode data dialog window opens gt Select the Extra costs from the dropdown list next to Variable 83 gt r J Drivers 7 Main window Driver Infrastructure v inact sub scenario Baseine dae sarare Sve nbc Extemal fact CRS Show Edit exogenous mode
9. gt Click the Next button on the button The Configure accessibility settings dialog window opens where the values of Acctype in all the networks that you imported are listed in the table New Metronamica project wizard Configure accessibility settings Se Please enter names for the accessibility values that were found in the networks you entered 0 Intercity stations i Stations 2 Ordinary roads 3 Ramps gt You need to enter the accessibility type name for each value in the text boxes of Accessibility tyoe name column gt Click the Next button at the bottom A new dialog window opens to you continuing the configuration of the regional model Specifying the sectors of the regional model The first step in setting up the regional interaction model is to list the sectors that will be modelled There are three types of sectors population sectors model the number of people in each region economic sectors model the number of jobs in each region and area sectors simply specify a land use demand for each region When you enter the 25 name of a sector in the first column of the table a list will be shown in the second column in which you can select the sector type A new row will be inserted at the bottom of the table where you can enter the next sector The setup of the regional model starts from this step New Metronamica project wizard Specify the sectors of the regional model _ lt te
10. menu or click the Step button on the toolbar to advance the simulation clock by one time step mostly one year This option is useful to view the effect of the changes you have made on time dependent variables calculated by the model While the model is calculating a progress bar will be displayed in the status bar The progress bar will disappear when the calculations are finished Run Click Run on the Simulation menu or click the Run button on the toolbar to progressively advance the simulation clock till the end of the simulation period or the next simulation pause The simulation clock and the displayed results will be updated after each time step of the model While the model is calculating a progress bar will be displayed in the status bar The progress bar will disappear when the calculations are finished Stop Click Stop on the Simulation menu or click the Stop button on the toolbar while running a simulation to stop the simulation The simulation may not stop immediately because the calculations for the current simulation step are completed first in order to avoid corrupting the system Some functions in the user interface require you to stop the simulation first In this case click the Stop button on the toolbar and wait till the calculations are completed the progress bar in the status bar will disappear Pauses To set the pauses in the simulation you can use the Pauses comman
11. WN isand nna Aann 19 llaeamnt W Mtn Ww Nihar gt You need to edit names for each land use class by clicking on the text box of interesting in the Class name column and entering a new name See ee eee amp amp amp gt You can edit the legend for each land use class by clicking on the cell of interest in the Legend colour column The Colors dialog window opens Select the colour of interest and press the OK button in the Colors dialog window The new selected colour is displayed for the land use of interest You can also edit the legends for the land use map via the user interface after setting up the METRONAMICA project For more information see the section Legend editor In Metronamica the land use is classified in types or categories some of which are modelled dynamically while others remain static 21 e Vacant states are classes that are only changing as a result of other land use dynamics e Functions are land use classes that are actively modelled e Features are land use classes that are not supposed to change in the simulation For more information about the land use states see the section Land use classes gt You need to determine the land use type for each land use in this step Click on the dropdown list in the Type column for the land use of interest Select one of the types from the list gt You need to determine the land use group for each land use for creating the environmental in
12. v v v v y v v n v v i4 C MGa You can load an existing sub scenario by clicking the Load sub scenario button A dialog will pop up listing the available sub scenarios When you select one and click the OK button the values for the driver will be updated You can save the changes you have made to a driver in a new sub scenario by clicking the Save sub scenario button Provide a name and description in the dialog that will pop up and click the OK button You will see that the name of the active sub scenario will change to the name you just entered Integrated scenarios Sub scenarios can be defined for each driver in the Main window The combination of one sub scenario for each driver is called an integrated scenario The active integrated scenario is always displayed in the toolbar Here you can also load a different integrated scenario by selecting it from the dropdown list When you do this the according sub scenarios will be loaded for each driver As is explained in the previous section you can change the active sub scenario for a driver in the Main window by clicking the Load sub scenario or Save sub scenario button When you do this the active integrated scenario displayed in the toolbar will be updated automatically If an integrated scenario already exists for the set of active sub scenarios it will be selected Otherwise the active integrated scenario will be displayed as modified
13. 0 0 0 0 e Second you can open the Regional migration output dialog window by pressing the Migration button at the bottom of the Regional interaction model dialog window In this window you can select a population sector or an economic sector from the dropdown list next to Sector The table depicted above displays the migration from one region to another for the selected sector in terms of jobs or people for the current simulation year 145 Regional cell demands output Cell demands cells 1 0 4 3 0 0 0 8 0 2 0 1 e You can open the Regional cell demands output window by pressing the Cell demands per land use function button at the bottom of the Regional interaction model dialog window In this window the cell demands for all land use functions per region are shown for the current simulation year 146 Transport model The transport model in METRONAMICA models the transport system at a regional level and thus provides important feedback to other model components in the system in particular accessibility information and relative travel distances are provided for the regional interaction model and land use model In parallel the transport model receives input from the other model components in particular the detailed distribution of inhabitants and jobs over the study area The reciprocal relation between the different models makes the METRONAMICA system a high reso
14. Accessibility Go to infrastructure layers button Infrastructure layers window for more information see the section Accessibility Editing values of costs for the private transport for Metronamica LUT In Metronamica LUT you can adapt the car cost per hour at a specific time gt Go to Main window Drivers Policy measures gt Select Infrustrucutre driver from the list Main window Driver infakkar scenario Extemal factors A Car transport costs Variable car costs Policy measures Per hour a Euro Per kilometer a Euro Transport network changes ae Network Import network change Remove selected changes Scenarios Show Edit network at time gt Go to the Car transport costs part on the top left part of the content pane gt Click the graph icon next to Per hour The Car costs per hour window opens 82 Double click on the graph A new point is added on the graph Right click on the newly added point The Edit point dialog window opens Add the car cost for the year of interest Click the OK button in the Edit point dialog window Click the OK button in the Car costs per hour window to save changes that you made VV VV WV You have adapted the value of car costs per hour Next you are going to adapt the fixed car cost for a specific transport zone gt Go to the Fixed car costs per zone on the top right part of the content pane
15. Exponent suitability Influence of suitability on o the attractivity of a region for activity k Exponent zoning Influence of zoning on the Calibration attractivity of a region for activity k Exponent immigration Influence of the Calibration emigration ratio immigration emigration ratio on the fraction of national growth for sector k Exponent accessibility Influence of accessibility Calibration on the attractivity of a region for activity k Distance decay for The distance decay for Calibration activity migration job sector k potential population potential or activity potential User selection Function sector The fraction of land use correspondence function f that contributes to sector k Minimum productivity Minimum guaranteed level of cell productivity of people in each region for sector or jobs k cell Constant growth of Coefficient that Calibration productivity determines the growth of the average cell productivity in a region for sector k Exponent activity growth Coefficient for the growth Calibration in activity the ratio of current activity and lagged activity ina region i for sector k Exponent crowding Coefficient of the Calibration crowding effect in a region for sector k Table 3 45 Input used in the Regional interaction model Description Source LO a lege tn economic sectors per region of jobs Population Demand for population per region Number User defined trends
16. From 1 To Bare Surfaces Indigenous Other Exotic Wetland Q Bare Surfaces Indigenous Other Exotic Wetland Residential e e e e e e e e e e e e a e e e e Residential Neighbourhood effect For Function land uses From To Residential Residential Influence of Residential Low Density on Residential Low Density Residential Commercial Distance Influence Community 0 820 mE Ep 200 60 37 63 400 6 4 725 1 526 0 6 0 5124 0 273 0 06 0 05335 Maximum distance in neighbourhood cells Output Influence Show neighbourhood poten Distance m 0 0469 Display options ox Cancel The Neighbourhood effect for function land uses table displays the neighbourhood rules Click on a cell in this table to open a window in which you can change the influence rule You can drag one of the bubbles to change its value You can double click on a bubble to edit the value precisely You can right click on a bubble to remove it from the graph You can right click outside any bubbles to add a new bubble to the graph VV VV WV You can click the Display options button to change how the graph is displayed Here you can also switch the distance unit between meters and cells The system provides a table with the coordinate pairs for all discrete cell distances on the ri
17. Generate command The Generate pauses dialog window opens when you press the Generate button of the Pause settings window You can enter the interval start time the interval end time and the interval step length in the Generate pauses dialog window and press OK button The pauses are generated and displayed on the pauses list of the Pause Settings dialog window 56 Generate pauses Simulation start time 2000 Jan 01 Simulation end time 2050 Jan 01 Current simulation time 2001 Jan 01 Interval start time 2000 Jan 01 Interval end time 2050 Jan 01 Interval step length 10 years Pauses 2000 Jan 01 2005 Jan 01 2010 Jan 01 2020 Jan 01 2030 Jan 01 2040 Jan 01 2050 Jan 01 Remove You can remove a pause by selecting the one that you want to remove and clicking the Remove button on the right hand side of the Pause settings window End year To set the duration of the simulation in years use the End year command to set the duration of the simulation in years 2 2 6 Saving results While you run a simulation you can store the calculated results in order to display or analyse them later Tabular data can be written to Excel and maps can be logged or animated Write to Excel Click Write to Excel on the Options menu to open or close a link between METRONAMICA and a Microsoft Excel workbook The window that will appear will disp
18. Intermediate result of the operating speed of link of the road network ne during time period fp at time f after iteration it Intermediate result of the intensity of link of the road network during cag time period p at time f after adding drainage intensities in iteration it CG Intermediate result of the congestion of link of the road network p l during time period tp at time after iteration it t Intrazonal distance of zone z at time t RL The total road length inside zone z Z p Intermediate result of the slow down factor of link of the road ip network during time period tp at time t after iteration it 241 Description V7 Average intrazonal speed of zone z during time period tp at time t km hour E calculated from results of the endogenous mode The drainage intensity of zone z during time period tp in time t a On The cost to travel across link during time period tp at time t during Simple p iteration it These cost include const for distance time and extra cost t C time t t p Set of links on the shortest path from zone z to zone Zz at time t after saraa iteration it 3 4 8 Transport indicators Intermediate result of the generalised cost per trip to go from the origin Zo gt 24 P zone z to the destination zone zz by mode m during time period tp at Purpose and use The parameters and variables that are discussed in the previous sections are sufficient t
19. New Metronamica project wizard Enter the basic land use model parameters Map size 650 x 540 rows x columns Cell size 500 meters Initial land use map Land use dasses Open initial land use map Landuse_Maps Ba 1989 rst ELU_1993 rst SLU_1996 rst SLU_2000 rst My Documents My Computer File name Lut 989 rst x Files of type Supported raster map files asc img rst v C Open as read only Once the initial land use map is imported the path of the map is displayed in the text box next to Initial land use map At the same time the information on the initial land use map appears in the table under Land use classes in a default way New Metronamica project wizard Enter the basic land use model parameters Map size 650 x 540 rows x columns Cell size 500 meters Initial land use map RIKS Netherlands_ML Landuse_Maps LU_1989 rst Land use dasses Value Class name Colour Type Environmental group Socio economic group 0 Land use dass 0 B i Other Other 1 Land use dass 1 Vacant Other Other 2 Land use dass 2 Vacant Y Other Y Other 3 Land use dass 3 Vacant Other V Other 4 Land use dass 4 Vacant Other Y Other 5 Land use dass 5 Vacant Other Y Other 6 Land use dass 6 Vacant Other M Other 7 Land use dass 7 Vacant Y Other M Other 8 Land use dass 8 Other Y Other 9 Land use dass 9 Vacant Other Other
20. Regional interaction model Sector Industry Sector type Economic sector Ce stow pte tes Restricted 1989 Jan 01 1993 Jan 01 1996 Jan 01 2000 Jar 13400 12800 kE 5400 5400 30300 28800 41N rann 3t 7 gt Parameters Persa nreocing facbvty 038 Distance decay for activity migration 1 67 Distance decay for job potential 0 13 Distance decay for population potential 2 Distance decay for activity potential 0 13 Exponent activity 1 3747 Exponent immigration emigration ratio 0 Exponent population potential 0 1848 Cell demand Density job Crowding Available sp 67 187 104 1 3326 30 181 1 1 1065 417 378 1 4902 1 1 426 934 6541 444 706 2418 gt Cell demands per land use function Select the Lower bound from the dropdown list under Input You can determine if the level of activity is restricted for each region Select the check box next to the region of interest to make it restricted The system enables you to edit the time for which that you want to specify the lower bound and upper bound by using the Edit time button The Edit time button works in a similar way as the Writing moments under Write to Excel function The specified time series via the Edit time button are displayed in the lower bound upper bound table The columns for the newly added years are empty By default the system takes the interpolated values from the two closest years for the newly added year
21. You can view the interpolated values by selecting the check box in front of Show interpolated values All the interpolated data will be highlighted with the yellow background while the given values will be displayed normally without the yellow background Input ower toma el stow interpolated ates Region Time Restricted 2000 Jan 01 2005 Jan 01 2025 Jan 01 4 TEID 2357 510106 Longford i Westmeath I 5860 203492 Louth E 11091 60472 Meath E 11319 51615 EEA Mi You can specify values by clicking the cell of interest and entering a new value Once you specify a value for one region for a newly added year the system considered all the values for all sectors for this year and for all regions are specified values instead of interpolated values The highlight background disappears You can only delete the specified value by selecting it and press the Delete keyboard Then the interpolated value will be displayed on that cell You can remove a specific year from the table by using the Delete function via the Edit time button 141 The specified time set is related to all the sectors For instance if you add one year for Industry sector this year will be displayed for all the sectors in the regional model On the contrary if you delete one specified time this year will be removed from all the sectors Area demands for area sectors When an area sector is selected you can only view and edit the area demand in terms
22. e Atleast 512 MB of RAM e A hard disk with at least 1GB free space To use METRONAMICA you should have the following software packages installed on your computer e Microsoft Excel version 2003 or later required e Microsoft Picture and fax viewer or Internet explorer optional METRONAMICA is developed for Windows XP If you experience problems when installing the METRONAMICA on Windows Vista and Windows 7 please contact us see the section If you experience problems 2 1 2 Installing METRONAMICA and accompanying tools The following is a step by step description of the installation of METRONAMICA The installation uninstallation of METRONAMICA follows standard Windows procedures If you have a previous version of the METRONAMICA software installed on your machine you will be asked whether you want to uninstall it first We recommend uninstalling it If you want to keep it make sure to put the latest version of METRONAMICA in a separate folder During the installation you may encounter a message asking whether you want to keep or replace certain files We recommend replacing those files for use with METRONAMICA Keeping the old files may cause the software to malfunction To install Metronamica gt Step 1 Start Microsoft Windows XP gt Step 2 Download or copy the Metronamica setup gt Step 3 Double click on the Metronamica_ _ setup exe The refers to the version number of the software installation gt S
23. either by the project team or by the users themselves Before we will start to use the zoning tool let s go over the most important terminology that will be used in the explanation Plan A plan is a map that represents any spatial zoning plan It contains source data which is not interpreted in terms of its effect on land use yet A plan can contain one or more categories such as protected forests flood prone areas or residential Any number of plans can be entered in the zoning tool for example the spatial plans of each district as well as regional plans can all be incorporated as separate zoning plans Category A plan can have one or more categories each of which is represented by a category in the map For example a plan that outlines the protected areas can have the categories protected forests protected natural area and non protected nature No data values in the map will not be interpreted in the zoning tool that is they cannot be assigned a zoning status Zoning status Each category in a plan needs to be interpreted in terms of their zoning status for each land use function separately In METRONAMICA the default zoning statuses are Actively stimulated Allowed Weakly restricted and Strictly restricted Moreover a category can be interpreted as Unspecified meaning that the specific category does not influence a specific land use function or that no information for that category is av
24. for neighbourhood indicator The radius in cells within which the algorithm looks for a land use User defined that will be added to the numerator denominator or both By default the minimum value for this parameter is 1 and the maximum is 25 A value of 1 will only count the current cell The default value for this parameter is 10 Numerator The weight with which the corresponding land use will be added User defined to the numerator These values can range from 0 to 1000 and are set to 0 by default Denominator The weight with which the corresponding land use will be added User defined to the denominator These values can range from 0 to 1000 and are set to 0 by default Target cluster This is the minimum size that a cluster of target cells should have User defined radius for to be considered a target This value can range from 1 to 25 and is distance set to 10 by default indicator Role of land use Per land use you can specify whether it is a source a target or User defined neither n a Range for Only count cells with the specific value for distance to map User defined counting cells indicator for distance to map indicator Source for Sets for each land use whether the distance to the target areas User defined distance to map should be shown or not By default all sources are unchecked indicator Area file for Specifies the path and filename of a binary map file specifying the User defined di
25. for population sector and for economic sector per region that you can access via Drivers External factors Trend Population in or Jobs in where is the name of population sector and is the name of economic sector Infrastructure scenario related input data files for infrastructure networks that you can access via Drivers Policy measures Driver Infrastructure Zoning scenario related input data files and parameters for zoning regulation that you can access via Drivers Policy measures Driver Zoning For Metronamica LUT a sub scenario is known as AE An Area demand scenario related to the demand for each area sector per region that you can access via Drivers External factors Trend Area of where is the name of area sector Socio economic trend scenario related to the trend of number of people and jobs for population sector and for economic sector per region that you can access via Drivers External factors Trend Population in or Jobs in where 1s the name of population sector and is the name of economic sector Zoning scenario related input data files and parameters for zoning regulation that you can access via Drivers Policy measures Driver Zoning Mobility growth scenario related parameters for the mobility growth that you can access via Drivers External factors Trend Transport Private transport scenario related input
26. of cells in the Input table The function of the Edit time button and the interpolated values work in the same way as for economic sector or population sector Regional interaction model Sector Greenhouses v Sector type Area sector Input Show interpolated values Region Time 1989 Jan 01 1990 Jan O01 1993 Jan 01 1996 Jan 01 2000 Oost Groningen 1 1 J Delfzijl e o 0 0 Overig Groningen 2 2 Naard Friecand 2 2 lt gt Regional distances You can access the interregional distance by clicking the Go to regional distances button in the Input part For Metronamica ML this action opens the Interregional distance dialog window where you can view and edit the distance from region to region The default value of interregional distance from region A to region B is the Euclidean distance between the central nodes of region A and region B Interregional distances 99 3790719 67 0308420 28 4024377 37 2296882 53 2668154 76 8542925 Oost Gronin 16 4003613 29 5565596 39 7236618 83 3179500 Delfzijl e o 29 5565596 9 30057587 21 3368983 68 7408868 94 1239134 65 3633676 36 8066253 62 0615513 66 3063318 91 1855634 Overig Groni 39 7236618 21 3368983 20 0406461 47 6973041 73 1979977 46 1049716 29 1045543 60 8907136 54 9891000 78 8157334 Noord Fr
27. size importance and name In the simplest version the current road network map will suffice to run the model 4 3 7 D7 Borders of regions The region boundaries map should be provided as a raster map e For an application with a single region a map that outlines the area of interest is needed Preferably they are indicated as a raster with values 1 area of interest and 0 not of interest e If the area is subdivided into regions municipalities a raster indicating these municipalities as different integer values is needed Just as in the land use map these need to range from 0 to the number of regions out of modelling area being the first 0 class 4 4 Census and other statistical data for the regional model These data are required for the regional model at the regional level All data required for the regional model should be available at the least for 2 dates Base year and Base year2 For the intermediate years additional data are very much appreciated for the calibration of the model and extrapolation of some trends The availability of the latter data will greatly improve the predictive power of the model 258 If not available assumptions will need to be made on values for the intermediate years For the period beyond the Base year2 data expressing a prognosis of the activity in each economic sector as well as the growth of the population are required These data can be entered into the model on a per year basis
28. 2011 Add scenario support to log maps functionality Various small bug fixes and performance improvements Update training material with Zoning Tool exercises Version 4 2 1 January 17th 2011 Add functions to add remove infrastructure layers Critical bug fix that manifested in some environments A 4 266 Updated sample data and integrated help functionality Version 4 2 0 December 29th 2010 New Zoning Tool for easier and more flexible interpretation of zoning plans eliminates the need to pre process zoning maps with the Overlay Tool and allows for more subtle representation of zoning regulations and practices Animate networks and more control over animation settings Add ancillary maps and overview of maps in menu New easier to use legend editor Full compatibility with Windows Vista and Windows 7 Many performance improvements and functionality tweaks Version 4 1 3 May 15th 2010 Support for point shape files Various bug fixes Version 4 1 2 February Ist 2010 New RankSize Tool UI tweaks for better feedback on parameter values and limits Version 4 1 1 December 15th 2009 Better integration with Overlay Tool Improved new project wizard Updated sample data Version 4 1 0 November 17th 2009 Support for regional interaction model Metronamica ML Improved scenario management P O Box 463 6200 AL Maastricht The Netherlands Tel 31 43 3501750 Fax 31 43 3501751 www ri
29. 5 7 D14 Other data for public transport Trips with exogenous modes are considered as an alternative but not computed explicitly Instead they are computed with generalized data For this we use information on the initial origin destination trip distribution see section D13 initial trip distribution for car transport and for public transport interzonal travel time trip duration interzonal distance trip distance and interzonal travel costs extra costs This information is required from each zone to each other zone as represented in a matrix Trip duration The trip duration for exogenous mode should be represented in hours The matrix for the origin destination trip duration for public transport per time period is saved in a h5 file e g ExDuration h5 The orders of dimensions in this matrix are time period 263 transportation mode zone origin and zone destination For endogenous modes the matrix 1s empty Trip distance The trip distance for exogenous mode should be represented in km If this information is available there are several options to estimate the public transport trip distance run the transport model and use the very first result of car trip distance calculate the linear distance of the special nodes in two zones The first option has a lot of uncertainty because the model is not calibrated yet and the data is not complete yet The trip distance should be greater than 0 If the second option is used the
30. Afterwards the selected integrated scenario will be loaded Note that loading an integrated scenario means loading the associated input data and parameter values to the user interface The results that are calculated by the model are not updated for the newly loaded scenario immediately You can use the Update Step Run and Reset commands to calculate the models 54 Reset You can reset the simulation clock to the start year of the simulation by clicking the Reset button on the toolbar or by clicking Reset on the Simulation menu While the model is calculating a progress bar will be displayed in the status bar The progress bar will disappear when the calculations are finished Whenever you change the initial values or initial maps for the start year in Metronamica you need to reset to complete the changes Update Click Update on the Simulation menu to recompute the model without changing the current simulation time Changes to initial values parameters that do not affect the current simulation time or time dependent variables in the model such as the land use map will not be recalculated when you update the simulation For this reason updating a simulation is mostly much quicker that resetting or running the simulation While the model is calculating a progress bar will be displayed in the status bar The progress bar will disappear when the calculations are finished Step Click Step on the Simulation
31. Also when you change the value of a driver the active integrated scenario will change to modified just like the active sub scenario for the driver you have changed You can create new integrated scenarios by going to the Scenario manager page in the Main window under the Scenario tab Click the New button and enter the requested information in the dialog that will pop up Note that the new integrated scenario will not 50 be activated automatically To do so select it from the Integrated scenario list You can also load sub scenarios on this page the effect will be the same as loading them on the page for the respective driver You can delete the active integrated scenario by clicking the Delete button on the Scenario manager page in the Main window This will not affect which sub scenarios are loaded for each driver Hence the active integrated scenario will change to modified as no integrated scenario exists anymore for the current set of active sub scenarios Managing sub scenarios You can get an overview of all the available sub scenarios and which integrated scenarios they are used in by clicking the Manage sub scenarios button on the Scenario manager page in the Main window under the Scenario tab This will open a dialog similar to the one depicted below Manage sub scenarios Driver Land use demand vi Sub scenario Baseline active v Description Initial
32. For more information about how to work with ancillary maps see the section Managing ancillary maps m Main window Regions Regions map Land use model H Zoning H Accessibility H Total potential Land use Initial land use map Land use map Indicators Ancillary maps Land use map 1989 Land use map 1989 Land use map 1989 map Land use map 1989 map Data Land use 2006 Data Land use 2006 Data Land use 2006 map Data Land use 2006 map Map Comparison For the project file created with an older version of METRONAMICA versions before 4 2 when you open it with the latest version of METRONAMICA the system will ask you whether to upgrade this project file see the section Opening the project file for more information The target file you imported in the older version METRONAMICA will be converted automatically as an ancillary map after upgrading For the calibration purpose you can fill in the land use demand under External factors by using total number of land use demand for each land use function in this contingency table For more information about working with the land use demand see the section External factors Monte Carlo tool The way to analyse a series of possible analysis is a Monte Carlo analysis This analysis involves the generation of a multitude of outcomes with small differences that are eventually aggregated In METRONAMICA terms this means that you will generate a
33. Parameters input and output Table 3 23 Transition potentials input potential maps use and each cell block The suitability for each land use and y model block each cell maps cell Accessibility maps The accessibility for each land use and Accessibility model block each cell The land use that occupies each cell cat Land use model block time t Te Inertia conversion The inertia and conversion effect for Neighbourhood model effect for vacant land use vacant v at cell c block land uses Table 3 24 Transition potentials parameters Random coefficient Parameter controlling the extend of the stochastic perturbation performed on the neighbourhood effect A value of 0 means no perturbation Table 3 25 Transition potentials output Pre Transition potential The transition potential for each land use Land use model block maps and each cell 3 1 8 Land use Purpose and use The land use model block holds the land use map which it updates every time step by means of the allocation algorithm of the CA model Clicking the land use block in the system diagram will open a dialog window from which the land use map can be opened Process description The land use map 1s updated with the aid of the transition potential maps for each vacant and function land use land use features are not modelled but taken as static entities in accordance with the number of cells that has to be allocated to each land use functio
34. Steps to take in visualising indicators are described in the section Visualising indicators Step 5 Analysing results The final step of an impact assessment study is to analyse results within an integrated scenario e g the temporal evolution of an indicator or to compare a set of integrated scenarios In step 3 of the assessment you have selected which information you want to save for analysis In this step you carry out the analysis thereof Excel files that have been created can be analysed with Excel animations can be shown in a viewer and logged maps that have been saved in log files that can be compared in the MAP COMPARISON KIT which is accessible from the Analysis tab in the Main Window 2 3 2 Setting up the drivers In this section you will become familiar with the different drivers in the system and learn how to enter and change information related to these drivers There are 3 the sections under the Drivers tab External factors Policy measures and Parameters Among them the Parameters the section is relevant only to a modeller The detailed description about the Parameters the section will be found in the section 2 4 Modeller interface We use the project file Randstad geoproj as example and select the Baseline integrated scenario as the active integrated scenario All values in the Baseline integrated scenario are loaded into the system In the following the sections you will learn how to view and change values in this integra
35. _ region i at time potential model block VJ Job potential in sector k and region i The job potential G a at time t model block Activity Activity potential in sector k and The activity potential potential region at time model block The productivity of sector kin region Number Productivity model i at time t 1 previous time step of people block unit people or jobs cell or jobs The average neighbourhood effect of The neighbourhood sector k in region at time t conversion model block The average suitability of sector k in The suitability region at time conversion model block The average zoning of sector k in The zoning region 7 at time conversion model block The average accessibility of sector k The accessibility in region 7 at time t conversion model block Table 3 58 Output variables given by the attractivity model block Attractivity The attractivity of region i on sector k at om Migration model block time t The population potential model block Purpose and use This model block determines the population potential per region per sector Process description The population potential per region and sector is a function of the sums of population activities 1 e the number of people in all regions and the distances between the regions Algorithm The function which determines the value of the output variable looks as follows 210 VP gt 5 d d XP J
36. able to find an alternative cheaper route In other words people choose the shortest path contingent to the choices of the other people Costs are an aggregate measure for distance travel time and other costs to move from one region to another These costs are incorporated into the regional model as interregional distances and influence the distribution of activities over these regions On the local level the potential for certain land uses is among others determined by their local accessibility 1 e their distance to the transport network and the influence of this This influence in the local accessibility is depending on the amount of traffic on that part of the network In the following the sections distribution and modal split are addressed in a joined the section Indicators are discussed in a separate the section The derivation of activities and urbanization classes from regions to transport zones which can be considered the pre processing steps to the input are discussed in 2 separate the sections as well Thus this section will proceed with the following sub sections e Regional activities to zonal activities e Urbanization level e Production attraction e Distribution amp Modal split e Assignment e Indicators Assumptions e tis assumed that different activities cause a number of trips e Within a region land use densities are considered uniform in space The activity in a transport zone follows from integration o
37. adapting drivers and entering new data The result of this step 1s a set of sub scenarios for each of the drivers When developing a sub scenario you can build on existing sub scenarios For example you can load the baseline sub scenario change it and then save the changes as a new sub scenario Then you can load the baseline scenario again and made different changes Drivers for policy user that are included in METRONAMICA are the following e External factors e Policy measures The steps required to view or to change driver settings are described in the section 2 3 2 Setting up the drivers Step 2 Creating integrated scenarios In the second step integrated scenarios can be assembled from a selection of existing sub scenarios For each of the drivers or drivers you need to select one sub scenario When clicking on the Scenario manager icon in the navigation pane of the main window you gain access to that part of the interface where you can construct your integrated scenarios or upload an existing integrated scenario The steps required to create integrated scenarios are described in the section Integrated scenarios Step 3 Running the simulation In order to investigate the impact of certain scenarios you need to run the simulation for each integrated scenario of interest While you run simulations there are several ways to export intermediate and final results of the model for later use in step 5 e You can log maps which can be an
38. add it to list M increment size with area of cell d for each cell e that is horizontally or vertically adjacent to cell d if cell e has mark I or mark IT remove all marks from cell e add cell e to the end of list L end if end for end while assign the value size to each cell in the list M end for Parameters input and output Table 3 34 Cluster indicator parameters Search radius cells The minimum size of a cluster This can range from 0 to 25 The default value is O Determines whether a road can intersect a cluster checked or not unchecked By default this is unchecked Specifies whether a land use contributes to the cluster size checked or not unchecked By default this is unchecked 3 2 3 Neighbourhood indicator Purpose and use This type of indicator can be used to calculate figures consisting of the ratio of sums of weights associated with land uses in the vicinity of each cell This type of indicator can present an image of the supply of or demand for certain land uses by other land uses within a specified radius Process description Each land use is assigned two weights one for the numerator and one for the denominator of the values that will be calculated For each cell we then accumulate 195 the weight of the occurring land use in each cell within the neighbourhood of the current cell the size of which is defined by the search radius parameter for both numerator and denominator The numera
39. all sectors Parameters input and output Table 3 85 Parameters used in the Sector to Land use conversion model block F Function sector The fraction of land use function f User selection fk correspondence that contributes to sector k Table 3 86 Input variables used in the Sector to Land use conversion model block The cell demand of sector k in Number of Cell demands per region at time previous time cells model block step N Cell The cell demand of sector k in Number of Cell demands per i demands region i at time t cells model block Table 3 87 Output variables given by the Sector to Land use conversion model block The cell demand of Number MBB Land Use land use function fin of cells The neighbourhood conversion model region 7 at time t block The suitability conversion model block The zoning conversion model block The accessibility conversion model block 220 3 4 MBB Transport 3 4 1 Description MBB Transport Objective The transport model in METRONAMICA is a tool to simulate transport flows and intensities on the transport network It is used to simulate the mutual interaction between the transportation system and the land use system The relationship between land use and transport systems is generally recognized by planning professionals as well as scientists Also and importantly it is recognized that the relationship is reciprocal which means that developments in land use are in p
40. allows a user to enter spatial plans directly via the graphical user interface GUI to make their own zoning maps within the system Zoning quantifies the effect that planning and legislation has on the possible future occurrence of each land use function on a certain location Process description The spatial plans can be entered directly via the graphical user interface The characteristics of each plan parameters can be set and new plans can be added in the GUI as well in a comprehensible way Plans can be ordered hierarchically such that one overrules the other First of all based on the imported maps spatial plans zoning maps can be computed for each land use function and for each time period The zoning map 1s the result of the interpretation and combination of all categories in all spatial plans It indicates the zoning status in each cell for a particular time span This zoning map is a categorical map with the values actively stimulated allowed weakly restricted and strictly restricted No data values are depicted on the map as white A new period starts whenever a category in a plan becomes active or an active category becomes inactive in between the zoning maps do not change These plans are computed with the algorithm presented below which basically iterates through the hierarchy of categories to distil the zoning status in each cell for each land use function The set of zoning maps is recomputed when the simulatio
41. and activity The idea is that the more potential a region has the more attractive it is In addition the productivity plays a role Lastly the local characteristics namely neighbourhood effect suitability zoning and accessibility influence the attractivity of a region Algorithm The function which determines the value of the output variable looks as follows t _ t Bix t Pak t Bk t l Pak t l Pek t l Pik t l Psk t l Piok Iyi VP Vd es a oe Wie Ry Deg Le j A Parameters input and output Table 3 56 Parameters used in the attractivity model block Exponent population Influence of the population potential Calibration potential on the attractivity of a region for activity k potential attractivity of a region for activity k Exponent activity Influence of activity in economic inane potential sector k on the attractivity of a region for activity k 209 Exponent density Influence of the land productivity on Calibration the attractivity of a region for activity k Exponent Influence of neighbourhood effect on Calibration neighbourhood a P of a region for activity effect attractivity of a region for activity k as o oe ae attractivity of a region for activity k Pon seSecintiy __Lametviyofaregin frsciviy On mer accessibility attractivity of a region for activity k Table 3 57 Input variables used in the attractivity model block yp Population Population potential in sector k and The population
42. and distinguishes land use types that are easy neutral or difficult to traverse Easy traversable are all natural areas neutral are extensive agricultural areas and difficult are sparsely build areas and areas of intensive agriculture very difficult to traverse are industrial and dense urban areas We refer to Klepper 1997 for a description of the method 199 Algorithm The computation is based around a grid cell with a certain land use type say nature The algorithm will consider the neighbourhood of this grid cell and look for locations with the same land use type and account for the equivalent surface The equivalent surface is the sum of cell surfaces but measured using weights 1 for class 1 10 for class 2 and 1000 for class 3 A gt W dy where w denotes the weights and a the cell surface The equivalent radius r is calculated by PSA The cells with nature are weighted according to their distance to the central cell with weight v exp r r where is the search radius The equivalent radius is now the integral sum s vfdr 0 where f denotes the fraction of nature in each cell The effect of the exponential weight is that the radius does not indicate a crisp boundary but a gradual decay where nature cells further away is accounted for increasingly less When the fraction of nature on the total area is equal to f 1 the integral yields a value for y for all other values it yields a fra
43. approximates the straight line distance from a cell with residential land use to the nearest target cell specified with land uses related to work The Distance from residential to work tab is structured by the Parameters and Output parts 128 Spatial indicators Add new indicator Remove selected indicator Rename selected indicator Urban clusters Distance from residential to work Distance from residential to recreation Sc 4 gt Indicator type Distance indicator Calculate Parameters Minimum target duster radius Infrastructure type Is obstacle Motorways Other roads E Average distance km 6 64396 6 64396 In the Parameters part you can set the minimum size of a work cluster in the text box next to Minimum target cluster radius in terms of number of cells You can determine whether an infrastructure type is obstacle to the distance from residential to work or not by selecting or unselecting the check box next to that type in the table on the left top part of the dialog window When you created the project with the wizard you had defined which land uses were residential group and work group for the socio economic indicator For more information see the section Entering the basic land use model parameter In the table on the right top part of the dialog window you can still set a land use as a residential land use by selecting Source on the dropdown list next to that land use You can
44. areas are coinciding with are disturbed by certain land uses and display in a particular area Process description For each cell that has a positive value in the ancillary map the value in that cell is set to the weight of the land use that currently occupies the cell Algorithm let A denote the value of cell c in the ancillary map for each cell c if A gt 0 set the value of cell c to the weight of the land use that occupies cell c else set the value of cell c to no data end if end for Parameters input and output Table 3 38 Mask mapping indicator parameters The value of the disturbance can range from 0 to 25 and is set to 0 by default Range for counting Only count cells with the specific value for mask mapping indicator cells 3 2 7 Habitat fragmentation KOV indicator Purpose and use This type of indicator can be used to analyse the fragmentation or contiguity of combinations of land uses This indicator gives an indication of biodiversity according to the Probability of Occurrence and is based on the degree of fragmentation A high probability corresponds to high potential biodiversity Process description This indicator is calculated in accordance with the publication Stapeling van milieuthema s in kansen van voorkomen Klepper 1997 The indicator calculates the degree to which a location in a natural area is connected to other natural areas It takes the perspective of an organism
45. centred around the average value in the map Fifth order polynomial A fifth order polynomial is fitted through the sorted values of the map using a least squares regression Class bounds are then set to the value of the polynomial at equally sized intervals Generate labels gt Click on the Generate labels button in the legend editor to open the Generate labels window see the image below gt Select the desired format from the Format list 45 Enter the number of decimals with which values should be displayed in the labels If you want to display a unit in the label select Add unit to labels and enter the unit in the text box Press the OK button to update the labels in the legend editor Generate labels lt lower bound gt lt upper bound gt v V Add unit to labels ha Generate colours gt Click on the Generate colours button in the legend editor to open the Generate colours dialog window see the image below Select an option from the dropdown list just below the Predefined option The Top and Bottom labels indicate how the colours will be arranged in the table Press the OK button to update the colours in the legend editor You can also set the colours in the legend according to a custom gradient The Custom part of the Generate colours window allows you to easily make a smooth palette that blends from one colour to the next gt
46. congestion and traffic pressure on the transport network The availability of the versions depends on the licence file that you are using e Metronamica SL containing the land use model as a single layer e Metronamica ML containing the land use model and the regional model as multiple layers e Metronamica LUT containing the land use model the regional model and the transport model After you click the OK button on the About window the Open project file dialog window opens You are going to create a new project file 16 Metronamica m Simulation Maps Options Window Help New project Open project 1E RIKS Randstad geoproj Exit gt Click the Cancel button on the Open project file dialog window gt Click the New project command on the File menu The New Metronamica project wizard window opens gt Click the Next button The Project configuration dialog window opens to ask you for which type of Metronamica you want to create a new project file gt Click the radio button next to Metronamica ML gt Determine if you want to include the zoning tool in the new project file For more information about the zoning tool see the section Policy measures zoning e The zoning tool will be included in the new project file if you select the check box in front of Use zoning tool In two steps of this step a new dialog window named Enter the zoning tool parameters
47. daily congestion per congestion category in terms of km for the current simulation year In the table at the bottom you can view the aggregated transport indicators such as total trips average trip distance and average trip duration You can also view the network congestion map for the current simulation year via the Indicators tab in the Main window For more information see the section Visualising indicators 158 2 5 The Metronamica menu system This section explains the different functions that are available from the METRONAMICA menu system Some GEONAMICA functions are not available in METRONAMICA These are greyed out they are visible in the menu in a light grey colour but they do not result in further actions when invoked Consequently these functions are not described in detail in this section Other functions are only accessible when they are relevant For instance the Stop command in the Simulation menu is only accessible when the simulation is running The menus are treated as they appear in the Menu bar from left to right and per menu from the top to the bottom Most commands in this section have already been described in other sections You can find more detailed information for these commands through the links in the table 2 5 1 File menu You can use the File menu to open and save project files and to exit METRONAMICA The METRONAMICA system saves project files with a geoproj extension attached to the file name N
48. data files and parameters for the private transport that you can access via Drivers Policy measures Driver Transport Car transport costs and Transport network changes Public transport scenario related input data and parameters for the public transport that you can access via Drivers Policy measures Driver Transport Show Edit public transport data button Opening a project file In the section Getting started we explained how to install and start METRONAMICA We assume from now on that you have read this information that you have successfully installed METRONAMICA on your computer and you have knowledge of the different terms introduced 36 Opening an existing project file gt Open Metronamica if it is not already open see the section Starting Metronamica gt Click the Open button on the toolbar if the Open project file window is not already open gt Navigate to the folder where you installed the Metronamica data and project files By default this is the folder Geonamica Metronamica inside My Documents gt Select the geo project file and click the Open button Once all files have been loaded two windows appear in the application window the Main window and the Land use map As you will need to use these windows most of the time you cannot close these windows to prevent doing so accidentally If they are in your way click the Minimize button on the window and it will move to
49. effect can occur in a region if the cell demand of all land use functions i e economic and population is larger then the number of cells in a region that are not features 1 e cells that can be occupied by a land use function The cell demand is approximated by the ratio of the current activity over the lagged productivity as the current productivity is not available In fact its computation is using the crowding effect Algorithm The function which determines the value of the output variable looks as follows X k i ee kek k 0 max 1 Z i Here K 1s the set of all sectors and LU is the set of all vacant and function land USCS 217 Parameters input and output Table 3 79 Input variables used in the crowding effect model block ae time t people or jobs block at time t 1 previous time step people or jobs model block The available space in region 7 at time Number of The available t 1 previous time step cells space model block Table 3 80 Output variables given by the crowding effect model block t Q The crowding effect in region i at time aa Productivity model block t The available space model block Purpose and use This model block determines the available space 1 e the number of cells that is not classified as a feature in a region Process description It is a matter of counting the cells in a region that are either occupied by a land use function or vacant Algorithm
50. factor SD includes the congestion on the link as well as the sensitivity towards this congestion SC to slow down on this link type R a 4 SD min 1 SC CG SSD ox The velocity on the link V is defined as the inverse of the slow down factor multiplied with the freeflow velocity VL speed limit of link J t tprit __ VL tpl j e BD The iterative process is meant to lead to a Nash equilibrium when enough iterations are processed The attributes of each link are updated by the end of the interation i l t _ tylit laj T lpi t ae litl t _ tyylit tpl Ves The maximum intensity Z and maximum congestion CG minmum speed max i Vin over time periods are calcualted IT max max i tp l CG max max CG t s t ET a min Vn 237 Link intensity and accessibility subtype Both the transport model and the land use model make use of the transport network The transport model creates additional information on the use of the network road intensities This information can be used by the local accessibility assessment of the land use model The weight of roads in the network is made dependent on the intensity For this purpose road intensities are classified in three classes Acc subtype 1 low density Acc subtype 2 medium density and Acc subtype 3 high density on the basis of threshold values The accessibility subtype is calculated 0 if A
51. for the regional model Entering initial jobs or population per sector The third and last step in setting up the regional interaction model is to specify the number of people or jobs in the simulation start year for each population and economic sector respectively The values you enter can be decimal numbers that is they do not need be integral However you cannot enter negative numbers All the regions available are listed in this dialog window which were determined in step Entering the basic project parameters The default values for initial jobs or population per sector per region are set to zero gt Give the initial jobs and population per sector per region by double clicking the cell of interest and entering a new value You can copy and past these data from Excel sheet that you prepared It is easier to enter the initial from the wizard However if your data is not ready you can skip this step by pressing the Next button Then you can still specify the initial data for the regional model via the user interface gt Click the Next button The last new wizard dialog window opens 28 New Metronamica project wizard Enter initial jobs or people per sector Region sector Housing low Housing high Industry jobs Services jobs Social cultur Oost Gronin 151864 1 12536 11686 11500 Delfzijl e o 50161 2 5660 3 5433 5567 5140 Overig Groni 224552 122961 30886 46107 Noord Friesl 268500 456657 2 26043 34
52. for the time horizon set by the user of the model All the data for the regional model should be made available in an Excel spreadsheet or compatible format for easy manipulation 4 4 D8 Population data The regional model distributes the total population of the entire study area over the regions It knows only a single population class neither cohorts nor socio economic groups For each Region the number of inhabitants for both base years Base Year and Base Year2 is essential Intermediate data between Base yearl and Base year2 will help the calibration Beyond Base year2 estimates of the total population are required till Horizon year If the latter figures are not available they can be entered into the model as scenarios 4 4 2 D9 Employment For each Region the employment figures number of jobs in each economic sector for both base years Base Yearl and Base Year 2 is essential For the calibration of the regional model the employment figures for the intermediate years would be valuable As for the total employment in each economic sector for the entire study area estimates beyond Base Year 2 in each economic sector are required till Horizon Year If the latter figures are not available they can be entered into the model as a scenario Note that these sectors are coupled to the land use classes in the model However a sector can be aligned to more than one class For instance population can be divided over dense residential a
53. function which determines the value of the output variable looks as follows gt L gt Z pe feLUp Fler Ki t gt Fry Ny feLUp Z 214 Here LU is the set of all function land uses C 1s the set of all cells c in region 1 Parameters input and output Table 3 72 Input variables used in the zoning conversion model block Function The fraction of land use function The sector to land use sector f that contributes to sector k conversion model correspondence block Cell demands The cell demand of land use Number The sector to land use function fin region 7 at time t of cells conversion model block Zire The zoning effect of land use a Zoning model block function fin cell c The current land use map the a MBB Land Use land use that occupies cell c at time t Table 3 73 Output variables given by the zoning conversion model block 7 Average The average zoning effect of sector k Attractivity for activity in ki zoning in region at time t all sectors model block The accessibility conversion model block Purpose and use This model block determines the accessibility of a region for a sector As input the accessibility of a cell for a land use function is given Process description The accessibility given per cell is aggregated summed up for a region and then transformed from land use function to sector by means of the function sector correspondence In order to rescale the accessib
54. greater distances The attractiveness for the socio economic sectors population jobs in main economic sectors is based on the existing socio economic activity in the study area as well as regional and local characteristics Local characteristics that can be taken into account are the suitability for different land use functions the available space and the local accessibility Assumptions e Distance is expressed in generalised costs for Metronamica LUT since a real transport model is integrated in the system Constraints e The spatial interaction component of the model is based on the underlying assumption that the different regions have centres of gravity cities that are in competition with one another Since the data is organised by administrative regions rather than by centres of gravity unexpected problems can occur that have an impact on the results Equation rules or algorithm Figure 3 7 explains the relations between the different components of the regional interaction model and its relation to the other models incorporated in METRONAMICA Elements in black are included in the regional interaction model elements in grey represent components of the METRONAMICA system that provide input to the regional interaction model The arrows show the flows of information black arrows represent current values and dashed arrows lagged values values from the previous time step 203 Regional attrac tivity for activity in all secto
55. in the section Network map window opened via the modeller user interface e You can view the high level overview of network layer for the selected network and for the specific year in the section Creating network changes For instance the figure below shows the network map window opened via the policy user interface All the roads on the Roads network layer for 2010 are displayed 113 7 Main window Divers Extemal factors Driver Infrastructure v Network Roads network Close the network window to enable these controls i Network layer Roads_network 2010 Jan 01 Node width Link width E intercity stations C E Stations C J Ordinary roads C W rams C E waterways C E Airport Link color Ai m 7 Mi yy fa DAS Se aa A JAN E SS A AREA Import network change Remove selected changes LayerM anager Zoom tools DAR Named viewports Grid tools Network tools Add tink Add node The figure below shows the network change map window opened via the modeller user interface Only the expansion roads added for 2010 are displayed 114 Infrastructure layers Input Network layer Initial network map Ramps E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data Ramps_lines shp Roads_network E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data Roads_network shp E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data Stations_lines shp uima MUNTII o ile mlao sat S n lata Parameters Network layer Roads _network N
56. indicator is a predefined land use change indicator The urban expansion indicator shows where urban areas have appeared and disappeared since the start of the simulation It shows a change over time The Urban expansion tab is structured by the Parameters and Output parts 131 Spatial indicators Add new indicator ance from residential to recreation Soil sealing Urban expansion Forested areas Deforestedland Abando 4 gt Indicator type Land use change indicator Calculate Parameters From land us Other agricu Pastures Cropland Greenhouses Housing low Housing high Ind Other agricu Urban disappeared Urban appeared When you created the project with the wizard you had defined which land uses were urban group for the environmental indicator For more information see the section Entering the basic land use model parameter In the Parameters part you can still set whether a land use contributes to the urban area or not and set the weight of each land use e The value 0 represents from non urban change to non urban e The value represents urban disappeared from urban change to non urban e The value 2 represents urban appeared from non urban change to urban In the Output part you can observe the cell counts of urban disappeared and appeared per region in the table You can also open the Urban expansion map by clicking the Show map button If this indicator has not been calculated the map will be bla
57. is a variable or parameter value that is exchanged a connection is displayed in the diagram 98 Ea pee 2 4 4 Dialog windows Each MBB has a dialog window associated with it It is the vehicle that permits the interactive exchange of information between the user and the Model Building Block the MBB communicates the results output of its numerical operations to the user and it takes in the data entered input and parameter by the user that are required for the execution of the MBB It concerns data that are internal to the MBB which it does not get from other MBBs via its In Connectors Clicking on one of the model names gives you access to the underlying model In general the dialog window that pops up is organised in such a way that the external input parameters and output part are displayed from top to bottom For some MBBs the structure of the dialog window might be different according to the features of the MBBs such as the Transport model In METRONAMICA system the input and output are organised by map map file graph single value and table The user can find the detailed description about how to edit input and display output by the categories of map map file graph single value and table in the section 2 2 3 Editing input and displaying output Information on all of the underlying models and their data and parameters can be found in Chapter 3 Model description the section 2 4 5 Individual model components describes t
58. is the combination of the trip distribution for the previous time step and people s reaction to the new situation which is happened at the current time step The Distribution inertia specifies the extent to which the newly calculated trip distribution matrix depends on the previous trip distribution matrix a high inertia is represented by a heavy dependence on the previous trip distribution matrix a low inertia gives more weight to people s reaction to the new situation e g the generalised costs when determining the new trip distribution matrix 152 Sensitivity to cost 1s one of the parameters which cause the new situation on the transport distribution and which means how sensitive people react to the cost for trips The Cost sensitivity specifies the sensitivity to cost for trips per trip purpose per dollar On the lower Output part of the dialog window you can select your time period and transportation mode of interest The number of trips per hour between origin zone and destination zone is displayed in the table for the selected time period and the selected transportation mode The output values will be changed over time during the simulation Costs People will considerate the factors of travel time distance cost parking cost and aversion cost to make their decision to select the transportation mode and the trip link All of these factors will be calculated as cost in the transport model Transport model a Bk Param
59. is the minimum zonal accessibility The accessibility is rescaled such that the lowest accessibility value on the map has a fixed value ZA between 0 and 1 and the zone that is most accessible has accessibility 1 This shows that how import the zonal accessibility for transport activity effects the zonal accessibility for land use function Parameters input and output Table 3 115 Parameters used ies to cost a a TT to cost for transport activity a Minimum faai daan Minimum zonal e a must be between 0 and e accessibility Table 3 116 Input variables Source Level of transport activity a in zone z at activity Regional activities to transport time t zonal activities with regional model Local activities to transport zonal activities without regional model topzone Generalised cost per trip to generally Generalized cost od go from the origin zone z to the destination zone z at time t 244 The proportion of a cell with land use Regional activities to transport function f that is considered in activity zonal activities with regional n model Local activities to transport zonal activities without regional model Table 3 117 Output variables t g Artivity Zonal Zonal accessibility for transport Output to Excel iii accessibility activity a in zone z at time t tg Afunction Zonal Zonal accessibility for land use Zonal accessibility accessibility function fin zone z at time t the land use
60. model Application Regions inside of the modelling area Spatial resolution Depending on the application case Temporal resolution Year Process description The regional model applied here models the levels of activity in different socio economic sectors that in turn form a restriction on the cell allocation algorithm of the 202 CA model Specifically the levels of activity are converted to a number of cells that needs to be allocated to each land use function by the CA model The level of activity in a sector and region can be expressed in terms of the number of jobs if we are dealing with an economic sector or in terms of the number of people if we are dealing with a population sector The approach builds on an existing spatial interaction model White that has been used in previous projects and products ENVIRONMENT EXPLORER XPLORAH MOLAND In METRONAMICA it is used to allocate the total population and jobs in main economic sectors at the national level over the regions and to simulate the migration between regions The allocation of the growth amongst the regions depends to a large extent on the relative attractiveness of each of the region In modelling the national socio economic growth and migration distance also plays a crucial role The underlying assumption for this 1s that regions can benefit from other attractive regions as long as the distance is not too far Furthermore people and jobs are reluctant to migrate over
61. models at the most abstract level and enables access to the details of the model at this level but also at lower levels You should learn to use it as a graphical explorer of the model You can change neither the model structure nor its graphical representation The METRONAMICA system has been implemented by means of the software framework GEONAMICA GEONAMICA models consist of Model Building Blocks MBBs that contain the code and or data required to calculate and execute mathematical operations varying from a single operation such as the sum of two numbers to a complex set of interlinked operations set of mathematical equations Model building blocks are graphically represented in the user interface by means of a 97 rectangle with the name of the MBB in it They are connected to one another by means of MBB connectors The representation of the system diagram in the Main window has been created with the help of the following basic elements MBBs MBB connectors connections and MBB dialog windows The Metronamica SL MBBs is structured by one spatial level Local level The MBBs incorporated in METRONAMICA are For Metronamica SL MBBs 1s structured by one spatial level local level The MBBs incorporated are e Local level Land use land use model e Local level Spatial indicators spatial indicator models For Metronamica ML MBBs is structured by two spatial levels local level and regional level The MBBs incorporated a
62. nega ibis se unequal to 0 this is 1 Else this is 0 Table 2 2 Allowed expressions in the user defined formula ordered from high to low precedence Output maps There are two kinds of output maps on the Land use tab the total potential map and the current land use map You can view the total potential map of the current simulation year for the selected vacant or function land use by pressing the Show total potential map button in the Output part A potential map displays the transition potential of a cell to allocate to the land use specified On the basis of the transition potentials the model decides which land use will be allocated to each cell in the next simulation step Colours in the total potential map range from red to green Cells in red are not attractive for the indicated land use In contrast the green cells are In the legend of the potential map you find next to the colour symbol two numbers The figure to the right 1s the upper limit of the category The figure to the left is the lower limit Since the total potential map 1s only calculated for each vacant and function land use the Show total potential map button in the Output part is not available for feature land uses 105 Total potential map Industry TER E 100 1000 lo Region boundaries i 10 100 Oo 1 10 je Total potential map Industry Ho E o o E 10 0 E 000 10 IANCU YIGYpUINRS Inspect You can view the lan
63. newly added time In order to measure the travel distance and travel time in terms of currency the costs per km and the costs per hour parameters are used You can view or edit the Additional fixed costs in the Additional fixed costs table which displays the additional fixed costs to a destination zone for the selected transportation mode and for the specific time Assignment Transport network becomes more interesting in the Assignment step The assignment of transport to the road network takes place in a number of iterations according to the cost and congestion In each of the iterations a fraction of the total number of trips is assigned amp Transport model DER Parameters Networks Production attraction Distribution modal split Costs Assignment Zonal accessibility Indicators Input Show Edit exogenous mode data Parameters Maximum slow down factor Fraction of trips to assign Sensitivity to congestion Accessibility sub type lower bound cars hour RoadtypeO 0 00 Acc subtype 1 Acc subtype 2 Ac 0 5 Road type 1 3 00 0 00 1 00 0 3 Road type 2 3 00 0 00 1 00 0 1 Road type 3 4 50 0 00 190000 00 0 05 Road type 4 9 00 0 00 1 00 Road type 5 9 00 0 00 1 00 Road type 6 12 00 Road type 7 0 00 Stadskanaal Veendam Beerta Appingedam Hefshuizen Bedum Hoogezand Sappemeer Haren Groningen Groote 5 57 9 60 11 75 16 71 20 82 16 51 12 81 14 77 16 40 if 9 57 4 82 9 13 11 65 16 15 12 21 7 75 10 78 12 10 11 74
64. o a oe B oi Legend O Frotected forest inundation risk Source Xplorah 4 2 2 Training Xplorah 4 2 2 Board of Planning 1 1 00 000 2 4 B Kilometers 65 Roads residential with a land use plan from 2003 to 2030 highways N primary roads Legend Probability for development of high density highways PR 66 Urbanization cluster 2003 al Probability of urbanization 2003 2030 _ o 02 E o2 0a D o a oe Legend O Frotected forest inundation risk Source Xplorah 4 2 2 Training Xplorah 4 2 2 Board of Planning 1 100 000 2 4 6 Kilometers Figure 2 1 Example source Xplorah Map comparison tool The MAP COMPARISON KIT MCK is a stand alone software tool that includes a number of algorithms that you can use to analyse your results METRONAMICA can open the MCK to analyse results as follows Main window Indicators Analysis Dont have the Map Comparison Kit installed Download it for free here Contingency table gt Go to Main window Analysis gt Map Comparison gt Click the Start MCK button in the content pane of the Main window The Open dialog window opens in the MAP COMPARISON KIT If you do not have the MCK installed on you computer You can click on the links to download it for free In the Open dialog window the log file generated in METRONAMICA is the default log file For more information see the section Log map
65. of land uses Process description All cells that are occupied by a land use that has target value 0 will be ignored in the algorithm as will all cells outside the modelling area In the remaining cells we then identify clusters of cells and calculate their size To identify all clusters we mark all centre cells that is cells that are not ignored and for which all cells within the search radius are also not ignored and all cells that are within the search radius of a centre cell We then define a cluster to be a group of horizontally or vertically adjacent cells that are not ignored where each cluster must contain at least one marked cell The value of each cell in a cluster is equal to the size of the cluster which is defined as the sum of the target value of the current land use of each cell in the cluster The value of all other cells is set to no data 194 Algorithm clear all marks from all cells for each cell c in the model area if the current land use in cell c is checked and cell c does not contain a link type that is an obstacle assign mark I to cell c end if end for for each cell c that has mark I or mark IT if all cells in the neighbourhood of cell c have mark I or mark II assign mark IT to cell c and all cells in the neighbourhood of cell c end if end for for each cell c that has mark IT remove all marks from cell c L c M size Q while L remove the cell d that is first in the list L from L and
66. on the Simulation menu Update Step Run Reset Pauses End year Active integrated scenario Simulation clock On the toolbar as depicted in the figure above the left most box displays the active integrated scenario The right most box displays the Simulation clock which indicates the current simulation time The initial year is defined when you create the project file in METRONAMICA Integrated scenario ESANG Active integrated scenario Before you start running the simulation check which integrated scenario is active This determines which scenario will be calculated gt Expand the Integrated scenario dropdown list on the toolbar by clicking on the downward arrow The available integrated scenarios will be displayed on the list gt Select an integrated scenario from the list for example the Baseline integrated scenario When collapsed the list box shows the name of the active integrated scenario When you select a different integrated scenario it will be loaded and become the active integrated scenario However if the previously active integrated scenario was modified a message box will pop asking if you want to save your changes If you click the No button your changes will be discarded and the selected integrated scenario will be loaded If you click the Yes button the project will be saved as if you pressed the Save button on the toolbar see the section Saving a project
67. on the different activities in a region TA_ and the number of trip origins N that each of these O a uc activities generate 072 TA z tp O a uc Multi a The first assessment of trip destinations CDP is calculated based on the different activities in a region TA and the number of trip destinations N2 that each of D a uc these activities generate Multi De 2 TA ONG oe The activities that generate trips are population and jobs The amount of trip origins and destinations they generate depends on the type of activity and the urbanization level degree of the transport zone To take into account that 1 the production of trips per purpose might change over time and 2 trucks and cars have a different impact on the production of trips 3 people might share cars when travelling and on the transport system in general the following correction factor is included in both equations pP 1 EP Multi G Efir E aad truck truck i oP In this correction factor the fraction of trucks per purpose F is multiplied by the is divided by the degree of car sharing S To change in mobility over time is reflected by the mobility growth factor Epe car equivalents of a truck E and the fraction of cars 1 F truck To ensure that the total number of origins and destinations are equal the following equation is used to calculate the total number of
68. one region Every region and every zone must be represented on the map The list of activities in the transport model consists of all activities of the regional model supplemented by those land use types that are not associated with an activity in the regional model these are the vacant and feature land use types Algorithm The transport activities in the transport model include the sector activities in the regional model and also activities associated to the land use vacants and features TAct ScUV L Ff A cross table for the density of transport activity a in region r for each land use type lu DL the function sector correspondence F is calculated as follows for the sector activitie a the density 1s weighted by r a lu as there is no sector activity available for vacant states and features for the transport activity vacant states and features are treated as area sectors representing the number of cells of that land use on the land use map 1n the specified region l ifa lualue V OFf DL W F ra lu r a lu a ifa e Sc lu e Fe 0 otherwise The density of transport activity a in transport zone z DA is calculated based on the ageregated activities in this zone and the total area of this zone TA gt DL Ra LU c Taz 7 224 t TA a DA m c Taz z The land use function transport activity correspondence FA 1s calculated ifa esc me 0 otherwise Parameters inp
69. output variable looks as follows Dyg 2 Sire feLUp f e f F N t Shi feLlU Here LU is the set of all function land uses C 1s the set of all cells c in region 1 Parameters input and output Table 3 70 Input variables used in the suitability conversion model block i Function The fraction of land use The sector to land use i sector function f that contributes to conversion model block correspondence sector k Ny Cel demands The cell demand of land use Number The sector to land use function nz in een i at time t of cells conversion model block 2 sp ees EEE function f in cell c land use that occupies cell c at time t Table 3 71 Output variables given by the suitability conversion model block Z Average The average suitability effect of Attractivity for activity in a suitability sector k in region i at time t all sectors model block The zoning conversion model block Purpose and use This model block determines the zoning of a region for a sector As input the zoning of a cell for a land use function is given Process description The zoning given per cell is aggregated summed up for a region and then transformed from land use function to sector by means of the function sector correspondence In order to rescale the zoning appropriately the aggregated zoning 1s divided by the number of cells that belongs to the corresponding sector in a particular region Algorithm The
70. per urbanisation class e Initial trip origin destination distribution per time period per trip purpose and per transportation mode e Trip origin destination distribution per time period per trip purpose and per transportation mode for the end year of calibration for calibration 4 5 3 D10 Transport zone map A raster map is required that indicates the boundaries of the transport zones These zones could be smaller than the regions from the regional model this is recommended All cells within one zone need to have a land use as the trip generation is computed based on the land use in the transport zones themselves It is important however that the outer boundary of the zones exactly coincides with the outer boundary of the regions map in other words a transport zone must be fully contained in a region and every cell of each region should be covered by exactly one transport zone The transport zones map should cover the exact same area as the region map and both maps should have the same resolution The transport zones are represented with integers on the transport zone map The first transport zone is numbered 1 the other transport zones are numbered consecutively The value 0 is reserved for the space outside the modelling area and should cover the same cells as value 0 in the region map The map should be provided in Idrisi format 1mg or rst or in ArcAscii format asc Moreover it is important that this map has exactly the
71. project file dialog window gt Click the New project command on the File menu The New Metronamica project wizard window opens New Metronamica project wizard Welcome to the New Metronamica project wizard gt Click the Next button The Project configuration dialog window opens to ask you for which type of Metronamica you want to create a new project file New Metronamica project wizard Which project configuration do you want to use Project configuration Metronamica SL Metronamica ML Use zoning tool Use suitability tool gt Click the radio button next to Metronamica SL gt Determine if you want to include the zoning tool in the new project file For more information about the zoning tool see the section Policy measures zoning e The zoning tool will be included in the new project file if you select the check box in front of Use zoning tool In two steps of this step a new dialog window named Enter the zoning tool parameters will appear to ask you to set the zoning tool parameters For more information see the section Entering the zoning tool parameters e The zoning tool will be excluded in the new project file if you unselect the check box in front of Use zoning tool The Enter the zoning tool parameters dialog window mentioned above will not appear and the step of setting the zoning tool parameters will be skipped gt Determine if you want to include
72. road segments each of which has a number of attributes The input network properties should always obey the following for every link 234 RT gt 1 L gt 0 VL gt 0 IP 0 CP gt 0 omnes AT 2 1 The central node of a zone When the shortest path operator finds the shortest path between two zones it in fact finds the shortest path between the nodes in the network that are designated as the central nodes which is also called special nodes The use of central nodes implies that all transport towards that zone will arrive at these nodes and likewise all transport outwards from a zone will depart from these nodes This may have the unwanted effect that the road segments links surrounding the central node will receive disproportional intensities The model offers a solution for this problem by making use of central nodes that are not part of the real physical transport network These central nodes or pseudo nodes are connected to the real network by connectors Connectors are links with two special characteristics e Connectors can only be traversed as the first or final link in a route shortest path e Connectors do not contribute to the generalized cost of a route The effect of using central nodes and connectors is that the incoming and departing traffic from a zone is distributed over the normal nodes that at the ends of the connectors This behaviour is embedded in the model as a set of rules Therefore
73. set that a land use is related to work by selecting Target on the dropdown list next to that land use A land use is neither a residential land use nor a land use related to work should be marked with on the dropdown list next to that land use In the Output part the average distances from residential to work per region are displayed in the table which are calculated on the basis of the land use map for the current simulation year You can open the Distance from residential to work map by clicking the Show maps button Distance from residential to recreation The indicator is a predefined distance indicator The distance from residential to recreation indicator approximates the straight line distance from a cell with residential land use to the nearest target cell specified with land uses related to recreation The Distance from residential to recreation tab is structured by the Parameters and Output parts 129 Spatial indicators Add new indicator Remove selected indicator Rename selected indicator Urban clusters Distance from residential to work Distance from residential to recreation Sc 4 gt Indicator type Distance indicator Calculate Parameters Minimum target duster radius Infrastructure type Is obstacle Motorways Other roads E Average distance km 1 16767 1 16767 In the Parameters part you can set the minimum size of a recreation cluster in the text box next to Minim
74. setup Integrated scenarios that use this sub scenario Name Description Baseline Initial setup No zoning Removed all zoning plans gt Select one of the drivers from the list The Sub scenario list will be updated with the sub scenarios that are available for the selected driver gt Select a sub scenario from the list to view its description The Description and the list of Integrated scenarios that use this sub scenario will be updated gt Click the Rename button to rename a sub scenario Your change will not be committed until you click the OK button gt Click the Delete button to delete a sub scenario You cannot delete a sub scenario that is used in one or more integrated scenarios You will first have to remove these integrated scenarios The sub scenario will not be deleted until you click the OK button Saving a project When you open a project file all the drivers scenarios and model parameters will be loaded as they were last saved This means that it 1s important to save your project before you close it if you want to retain the changes you have made METRONAMICA will help to remind you if you try to close a project that was modified but not saved gt Click the Save button on the toolbar or select Save project from the File menu in order to save all the changes you have made thus far in the opened project When you save a project you have to save any changes you made to a dri
75. study METRONAMICA allows you to add additional land use classes as land use feature To do so gt Go to the last empty line of the Land use classes table gt Click the cell in the Class name column and a name for the land use feature that you want to add gt Press the Enter key on your key board The Type of the newly added land use will be set automatically as Feature You could not add additional land use classes for vacant or function A new empty line appears at the bottom of the Land use classes table You could add another new land use feature by repeating the steps described above gt Click on the Next button on the Enter the basic land use model parameters dialog window 22 Entering the zoning tool parameters If you have not selected the check box in front of Use zoning tool this step will be skipped and a new dialog window opens to ask you entering the infrastructure networks For more information see the section Entering the infrastructure networks If you have selected the check box in front of Use zoning tool the dialog window Enter the zoning tool parameters depicted as below appears Four default zoning states are listed in the table with their default numerical value In this wizard step it is very important to define the number of zoning states and their names You could not change these via the user interface after setting up the application Once the number of zonin
76. that has a positive value in the ancillary map A cell is a source cell if it 1s occupied by a land use marked as source Algorithm let v c denote the value of cell c let A denote the value of cell c in the ancillary map for each cell c vic no data otherwise end for put all cells with value 0 in list L while L remove the first cell c from list L for each cell d that is horizontally or vertically adjacent to cell c if v c cellsize lt v d v d v c cellsize add d to the end of list L end if end for for each cell d that is diagonally adjacent to cell c if v c Jo cellsize lt v d v d v c J cellsize add d to the end of list L end if end for end while for each cell c that is occupied by a land use that is not indicated as source set the value of cell c to no data end for Parameters input and output Table 3 37 Distance to map indicator parameters Range for counting Only count cells with the specific value cells Source Sets for each land use whether the distance to the target areas should be shown or not By default all sources are unchecked Area file Specifies the path and filename of a binary map file specifying the areas to which the distance should be calculated Unless a proper file is specified the indicator cannot be calculated 198 3 2 6 Mask mapping indicator Purpose and use This type of indicator can be used to analyse whether special
77. the bottom of the application window Main window The Main window is organised in tabs and pages which are displayed on the left side of the window The Main window has 4 tabs Drivers Scenarios Indicators and Analysis Each tab has one ore more pages which are displayed as icons when you click on a tab Click on an icon to display a page in the right side of the window called the content pane Content pane Land use Greenhouses Housing low density Housing high density Industry Services Socio cultural uses Forest DI 55 55 35 5 55 55 HH Recreabon areas Lf Scenarios P PN indicators J f The Main window provides access to the policy user interface and the modeller interface The section 2 3 Policy interface and the section 2 4 Modeller interface provide detailed descriptions of interface for these two types of users 37 2 2 3 Editing input and displaying output The models incorporated in METRONAMICA use and compute various forms of input and output data spatial temporal and tabular These are represented in the graphical user interface in different ways to best fit the nature of the data You will be able to find the following elements in the user interface maps graphs time series single values and tables The following sub sections describe how to edit input and display output for each of these elements Map window Since all map windows in METRONAMICA work the same way we will use the La
78. the distribution of activities over space there would not even be a need for transport It is evident that transport 1s caused by the spatial discrepancies between origins and destinations The reciprocal nature of the relationship between land use and transport has important consequences for spatial planners It is well known that many policy interventions in the transport system are through feedback processes rendered unsuccessful or even counter productive One such paradox is that raising the capacity of a road e g by adding an extra lane may initially lead to a reduction in traffic jams but in the longer run through the land use that it stimulates as well as the collective response in transport behaviour give rise to even worse traffic jams than before User information Table 3 88 User information in the Transport model Drivers and Links to from other MBB Impacts External influences Growth in mobility 221 Drivers and Links to from other MBB Impacts Policy options Car transport costs cost per hour cost per km fixed car costs per zone Public transport data extra cost trip distance trip duration Initial road network and road network change parameters used in the transport model Policy indicators Transport indicators congestion accessibility per land use trips trip distance and trip duration Impacts MBB Land Use local accessibility MBB Regional interaction interregional distances General information
79. the initial network layers are listed in the table by Network layer name You can adapt an initial network layer for the specific layer by clicking on the browse button next of the specific layer and selecting the file that you want to upload You can also view and edit the selected initial network map by clicking the Show Edit selected button Adding or removing infrastructure layers Clicking the Add remove infrastructure layers button to open the Add remove infrastructure layers window You can change the name of the network layers by entering a new name in the text box in the Network layer column You can adapt the initial network layer by clicking on the browse button and uploading a new file Add remove infrastructure layers Infrastructure layers Network layer Initial network map E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data Ramps_lines shp 2 Ordinary roads 3 Ramns You can add a new network layer by clicking the Add button on the upper right side of the Add remove infrastructure layers window After entering a name and loading the map for the new network layer press the OK button The newly added network layer e g airport will be displayed on the list of the Infrastructure layers You can remove one existing network layer by selecting it and press the Remove button on the upper right side of the window 109 Add remove infrastructure layers Infrastructure layers E RIKS Regional Futures
80. the newly imported zoning map for the selected land use Without the zoning tool importing a new zoning map generated by ArcGIS package gt gt Go to the Drivers tab in the Main window and click the Policy measures icon in the navigation pane Select Zoning from the dropdown list next to Driver Select the land use of interest from the dropdown list next to Land use Click the browse button next to Zoning map The Import zoning map dialog window opens Navigate the zoning map that you want to import for the selected land use and double click on it Note Make sure the map you import from here has the same size resolution projection lower left x coordinate and y coordinates and categories as the land use maps and that it has file extension rst 1mg or asc Now you have imported the zoning map for the selected land Its path and file name are displayed in the text box next to Zoning map gt gt gt gt Now press the Show Edit button to verify that you have uploaded a new zoning map Close the Zoning Map window Adapt the first start date of zoning by selecting the date on the dropdown lists next to Enactment date phase 1 Adapt the second start date of zoning by selecting the date on the dropdown lists next to Enactment date phase 2 The enactment date phase 1 at here is corresponding to the Allowed from tl on the zoning map The e
81. the suitability tool in the new project file For more information about the suitability tool see the section Suitability gt Click the Next button Another dialog window opens to ask you enter the basic project parameters Entering the basic project parameters New Metronamica project wizard Enter the basic project parameters gt In the text boxes next to Simulation start year fill in the start year of the simulation in the project file that you want to create You can not change the start year of simulation via the user interface after you create the project file gt In the text boxes next to Simulation end year fill in the end year of the simulation in the project file that you want to create Note that the end year of simulation should be after the start year of the simulation Otherwise an error message as depicted below will appear when you click the Next button GEONAMICA A Please enter an end year thatis after the start year Lax You can change the end year of the simulation via the user interface after the project is created For more information see the section Simulation menu gt Click the browse button next to Region boundaries map The Open dialog window opens gt Navigate the region map that you want to import and double click on it Note that the region map that you import from here should be a raster map The outside of modelling area should have value 0 New M
82. the top of dialog window of each indicator tab All indicators that are switched on are updated after every time step They are presented in dynamic maps that you can open and close during the simulation and numerical values that are calculated over all cells of the map a sum weighted sum or average of all cells depending on the algorithm of each indicator All the numeric and map output will be updated over time during the simulation Be aware that it will take longer computation time if more spatial indicators are calculated If you are only interested in an indicator for a specific year you can stop the simulation to that specific year without calculating this indicator Then you can check the Calculate box and update the indicator results maps values by going to Simulation menu Update Each indicator has its own dedicated dialogue window allowing you to set the parameter values and view the results The content of these dialog windows differs per type of indicator The indicator type is displayed on the top of each tab Urban clusters This indicator is a predefined cluster indicator The urban clusters indicator can be used to pinpoint clusters consisting of a group of urban land uses The Urban clusters tab is structured by the Parameters part and the Output part 127 Spatial indicators Add new indicator Remove selected indicator Rename selected indicator Urban clusters Distance from residential to
83. this by showing the name modified You can create a new sub scenario with the values you just entered by clicking the Save sub scenario button gt Click the Save sub scenario button The Save land use demand sub scenario window will pop up gt Enter the name Test demand without quotes after the Save in new sub scenario option gt Enter a description and click the OK button You have now created a new sub scenario Test demand for the land use demand sub scenario How to load an existing sub scenario for external factors gt Goto the Drivers tab of the Main window gt Click the External factors icon 73 For Metronamica ML or Metronamica LUT gt Select the Driver of interest from the list e g Economic trend gt Click the Load sub scenario button A dialog will pop up listing the available sub scenarios gt Select one and click the OK button the values for the driver will be updated Policy measures zoning When you click the Policy measures icon in the navigation pane on the left hand side of the Main window you will see that the content pane on the right hand side of this window The Policy measures included in the system depends on the configuration of Metronamica For Metronamica SL and Metronamica ML e Driver Zoning e Driver Infrastructure For Metronamica LUT e Driver Zoning e Driver Transport Main window Etemal factors y Remove sel
84. time For assessment purposes as well as model integration additional variables are derived These variables we call indicators The indicators summarize the transport system at various spatial levels The Indicators tab is on the most right side of the Transport model dialog window 157 Transport model orks Production attraction Distribution modal split Costs Assignment Zonal accessibility Indicators 4b Parameters Congestion category dass lower bound fraction of road capacity Category 1 Category 2 Category 3 Category 4 Category 5 0 00000 0 20000 0 40000 0 60000 0 80000 Output Daily congestion km Category 1 Category 2 Category 3 Category 4 Category 5 5205 31 3061 47 1795 09 1343 46 3567 45 Transport indicators aggregated Indicator Mode Private transport Public transport Total trips trips 7508767 21 Average trip distance km 23 05 Average trip duration hours On the top Parameters part you can view and edit the lower bound of congestion for the congestion category in the Congestion category class low bound table The number of congestion categories are defined when you set up the new application The lower bound of congestion expresses the fraction of road capacity The higher value represents the road is much busier The output of the transport indicators includes the daily congestion and the aggregated transport indicators In the Daily congestion table you can view the
85. time will thus change its attractiveness for activities already present and others searching for space This process constitutes the highly non linear character of this model On the basis of these four elements the model calculates for every simulation step the transition potential for each cell and function In the course of time and until regional demands provided by the user or calculated in the regional model are satisfied cells will change to the land use function for which they have the highest transition potential Consequently the transition potentials reflect the pressures exerted on the land and thus constitute important information for those responsible for the design of sound spatial planning policies 3 Accessibility 4 Land use amp CA rules 2 Zoning 1 Suitability Time Loop Transition potential P For land use function transitions take place based on a changing spatial demand from the different functions as well as internal dynamics in the region The vacant land uses have a simplified dynamic calculation For this function there is no neighbourhood potential calculated nor is zoning or accessibility taken into account This causes that its dynamic is only based on the physical characteristics of the cell the suitability As stated above features do not have their own dynamics However features do influence the allocation of land use functions
86. to save the legend by clicking the OK button Click the Generate class bounds button to set the lower and upper bounds of each class according to some scale see the section Generate class bounds Double click on a label to change it You can also copy paste the labels from a text editor or Excel Click the Generate labels button to set the labels according to the values in the lower and upper bound columns see the section Generate labels Click on an entry in the Colour column to change the colour of a category A dialog will pop up where you can select the desired colour You can also set the colour of all the categories by clicking the Generate colours button see the section Generate colours 44 Generate class bounds Generate class bounds Order Ascending Display interval C Choose automatically Minimum value Maximum value Scale Linear v Find best scale Estimated effectiveness 100 Click the Generate class bounds button in the legend editor to open the Generate class bounds window see the image above Click on the Order list to choose the order of legend entries Enter a Minimum value and a Maximum value or select Choose automatically to set these values to the minimum and maximum value in the map The lower bound of the lowest class will be set to the Minimum value The upper bound of the highest class will be set to the Maximum value Select a sc
87. to the left side of the slash with the expression to the right side Division by 0 will cause an error that will stop the model from calculating Addition P FLEN TS Adds the expressions on the left and right of the plus sign Subtraction Subtracts the expression on the right anise of the minus sign from the Z expression on the left of the minus sign If the value of the expression to the left of the sign is strictly less than that of the expression to the right this is 1 Else this is 0 Less than Negation Logical not 104 dence Greater than 22 3 If the value of the expression to the left of the sign is strictly greater than that of the expression to the right this is 1 Else this is 0 Less than or S5 S lt If the value of the expression to the equal left of the sign is less than or equal to that of the expression to the right this is 1 Else this is 0 Z Greater than ees S gt Z If the value of the expression to the or equal left of the sign is greater than or equal to that of the expression to the right this is 1 Else this is 0 Equal If the value of the expression to the left of the sign is equal to that of the expression to the right this is 1 Else this is 0 Unequal If the value of the expression to the left of the sign is unequal to that of the expression to the right this is 1 Else this is 0 unequal to 0 this is 1 Else this is 0 tenet fete SSOIBSTI
88. tools Use the Zoom tools when you would like to see a location in more detail e Zoom outers eiremap ne window Grid tools Use Grid tools to edit and view the information of the editable raster or grid maps that you have selected Pen Click in the map pane to change the value of a cell to the item selected in the legend pane This button will be disabled for non editable maps Flood Click in the map pane to change the value of a patch to the item selected in the legend pane This button will be disabled for non editable maps pect Click in the map pane to list the information in a cell value Copy the colour information on the selected area from another grid layer to the current grid layer This option is not available in Metronamica SaveGrid ooo j Save the map to a file on disk _ Copy region Copy the shape and colour information in the selected area from another grid layer to the current grid layer This option is not available in Metronamica i Copy If you have changed an editable map using the pen or flood tool you will be asked if you want to save or discard your changes when you close the map window Your changes will not be processed in the model until you close the map window and choose to save your change If you choose to save your changes make sure you save them in a 40 new file and do not overwrite an existing file or otherwise the system may not process your change
89. trip distance within a zone should be specified as non zero value The matrix for the origin destination trip distance for public transport per time period is saved in a h5 file e g ExTripDistance h5 The orders of dimensions in this matrix are time period transportation mode zone origin and zone destination Extra cost Extra cost could be caused for example by tax and service fee etc This is one option to calculate the generalised cost If there was no information on the extra cost for the public transport available the value could be set to 0 The matrix for the origin destination extra cost for public transport per time period is saved in a h5 file e g ExExtraCost h5 The orders of dimensions in this matrix are time period transportation mode zone origin and zone destination For endogenous modes the matrix is empty 4 5 8 D15 Data for calibrating the transport model The transport model computes various types of results and data availability for each of these results is different from one region to another Therefore the data requirements for the calibration of the transport model are not very strict but generally more is better The following datasets would be of great benefit for the calibration Origin Destination OD matrices for the time periods and modes that are use in the application as the most helpful datasets for calibration When the OD matrices use different transport analysis zones or other sub
90. waterways AL K D A INS C E Airport i i 7 P a aes i i LayerM anager Grid tools a 5 i ae SA RA Wh OS Ae Vg Ren i Color master field tit 7 Aay ACCTYPE v lt a eae Line width master field A a ACCTYPE v C Show nodes Show links The ratio buttons in the legend pane indicate that this network map is editable You can view and edit the link properties or add new links on the network map For the road network layer in Metronamica LUT the features in the network map window as follow gt Double click on the link of interest on the roads network map The Edit link properties dialog window opens All the link properties used in the transport model are displayed in the Edit link properties dialog window You can edit the link properties for the selected link from here gt Click Cancel to close the Edit link properties dialog window Network layer Roads_network 2010 Jan 01 Nodes Node width Link color Link width lo Region boundaries io Roads _ network 2010 Jan 01 O Roads outside modellin C E Special links C E Road type 1 B E Road type 2 C By Road type 3 C J Road type 4 fe im Road type 5 CE Road type 6 psrery pea Named viewports ed tr e Jng 10015 Network tools Add link l Add node For all the Infrastructure network layers in
91. will appear to ask you to set the zoning tool parameters For more information see the section Entering the zoning tool parameters e The zoning tool will be excluded in the new project file if you do not select the check box in front of Use zoning tool The Enter the zoning tool parameters dialog window mentioned above will not appear and the step of setting the zoning tool parameters will be skipped New Metronamica project wizard Which project configuration do you want to use Project configuration Metronamica SL Metronamica ML Metronamica LUT V Use zoning tool Use suitability tool gt Determine if you want to include the suitability tool in the new project file For more information about the suitability tool see the section Suitability gt Click the Next button Another dialog window opens to ask you enter the basic project parameters Entering the basic project parameters New Metronamica project wizard Enter the basic project parameters gt In the text boxes next to Simulation start year fill in the start year of the simulation in the project file that you want to create You can not change the start year of simulation via the user interface after you create the project file gt In the text boxes next to Simulation end year fill in the end year of the simulation in the project file that you want to create Note that the end year of simulation should
92. you have made by clicking the Apply button One system message window appears to remind you to reset the coefficients if the values for each function don t sum to 1 143 GEONAMICA The system enables you to undo changes of coefficients you have made to its last state by clicking the Reset button on the right hand side of the Apply button Output Inverse correspondence Region Oost Groningen kei On the lower part of the Function sector correspondence dialog window it features the output table You can select your region of interest by selecting from the dropdown list next to Region The nverse correspondence table for the selected region represents the land use functions of the land use model in the rows and the sectors in the columns in which the outputs of the extent to which each sector contributes to each land use function 1s shown The ratio coefficients in the Inverse correspondence table per region will be used to distribute the cell counts for each sector at the regional level to the cell counts for each land use function at the local level in this region by dividing the cell counts of sector over the cell counts of land use function Each sector totals should add up to exactly 1 The values of the Inverse correspondence table are updated over time If you made changes in the ratio coefficients you can observe the change of the J nverse correspondence table after advancing one step in t
93. zone will arrive at these nodes and likewise all transport outwards from a zone will depart from these nodes In the model the distance from the special node to the real node and the distance from the real node to the special node are zero In principle you can give any unique coordinate as the coordinate of the special node for each zone At here the unique coordinate differs from the coordinates for other special nodes and for all the real nodes However the coordinates of special nodes in the Zone data table are directly related to the road network shape files where the links linked to the special nodes have AccType 1 and Road type 0 The coordinates of special nodes in the Zone data table should be consistent with the information of special nodes on the network shape files Otherwise after you press the Reset button on the tool bar you get an error message from the system 148 1 error Error while computing transitory variables in model block Assignment transitory Transport Assignment The transport network has invalid data in the following data fields of links connected to special nodes Some special nodes are not found On the lower left part you can view or edit the weight per activity in the Activity weight part which will be used to calculate the number of activities for each transport zone On the lower right part of the Parameters tab you can view or edit the name and lower bound for each urbanizati
94. 1 2 224 283 3 316 361 4 171 Concentric circle Concentric circle Concentric circle Distance in cells ic ci 3 3 T 2c 27 25 24 25 27 A 6 a9 26 23 21 20 19 20 2 23 26 ao 5 a 5 22 18 b D 14 15 16 16 wa a 2g 4 22217 14 B 11 10 11 1a 14 F a 26 3 wo 18 14139 8 Fo 8 8 Di le 23 26 a aw 211613 9 6 5 4 45 6 9 Gl 2127 l 4 0 15113 5 3 2 3 5 8 M Gaas r U4 YW 1410 7 4 3 1 3 4 7 10419 24 40 l 4 a0 1511 3 5 3 2 3 5 8 M Ga a wodl lo l3 9 6 5 4 45 6 9 Gl 2127 3 wo 18 14139 8 7 8 8 i le 2s 26 4 22217 14 B 11 10 11 14 14 F a 26 5 ag 25 92 18 b BD 144 15 16 16 wa ah 29 6 2926 23 21 20 19 20 21 26 26 ao T ao a D y n A 2 ET 5 7 6 5 442 1012 3 45 6 TS od Figure 3 1 All cells in the neighbourhood are in exactly one concentric circle The index of the circle depends on the distance of the circle s cells to the centre of the neighbourhood circle 1 Depending on the resolution of the grid the neighbourhood radius represents distances ranging from 0 4 km to 8 km for grid resolutions ranging from 50 m to 1000 m respectively This distance delimits an area that is similar to what residents and entrepreneurs commonly perceive to be their neighbourhood It should thus be sufficient to allow local scale spatial processes to be captured by the CA transition rules The cell states The cell states represent typically the dominant land use in each cell A distinction 1s made between dynamic elements called a
95. 324 Zuidwest Fri 89402 6 6991 39 7560 9376 7820 Zuidoost Fri 177529 10109 5 14352 17886 17070 Noord Drenthe 152950 2793 25 11271 14559 21080 Zuidoost Dr 145684 2767 37 18948 13787 10520 Zuidwest Dr 123011 11861 4 12092 15337 12010 Noord Overi 236945 80245 30690 38436 34940 Zuidwest Ov 87646 38856 14101 17112 14400 Twente 437421 133836 66193 57862 54440 Veluwe 449012 142139 51646 75054 70090 Achterhoek 318871 41561 9 40004 38908 30800 Sere ae _ x Finalizing the setup of project This is the last step of the new project wizard gt Specify the name of your project in the Project name box gt Specify the location where it should be stored Metronamica will automatically create a new sub folder with your project name in the folder selected by you All the data you have imported in the new project wizard will be copied there You can select any location on a hard dist USB stick or network drive gt You can selecte the Support large maps check box if you want to create a project that contains large maps For projects where the option Support large maps is enabled METRONAMICA will cache map data on the hard disk causing it to run slower Therefore the option is not advised unless you experience problems without it The new project wizard will automatically select the check box if the expected memory usage based on the information you have entered exceeds a certain threshold If the check box is aut
96. 51 4 Metronamica data requirement This chapter describes the collection of data material required for the model and with the transformation of this data into a usable format Only elementary data is mentioned For detailed calibration of a model additional information may be required As mentioned early the configuration of METRONAMICA includes 3 possibilities e Metronamica SL containing the land use model as a single layer e Metronamica ML containing the land use model and the regional model as multiple layers e Metronamica LUT containing the land use model the regional model and the transport model The data required by METRONAMICA is different depending on the configuration of METRONAMICA that you want to work on Basically the least data is required for Metronamica SL and the most data is required for Metronamica LUT 4 1 Model specification Before the actual data processing some fundamental decisions need to be made 4 1 1 Definition of the region modelled The definition of the study area is required for any version of METRONAMICA SL ML or LUT Define the regions at the regional level for Metronamica ML and Metronamica LUT Since the regional interactions are based on gravity based model this type of model works best if regions are more or less coherent areas with one centre 4 1 2 Base years for which data can be collected Two base years are needed for a proper calibration This could be any two year as lo
97. 61 series of land use maps that are a little different since they are computed using a stochastic random term From these maps the chance 1s computed that a cell will take a specific land use Hence if a cell will become residential in 23 out of 50 runs it will get a value for residential of 0 46 23 50 You can use the Monte Carlo tool to carry out the Monte Carlo analysis You can access the Monte Carlo tool from the METRONAMICA as follows gt Go to Main window Analysis Monte Carlo The content of Monte Carlo tool displays on the left side of the Main window as depicted in figure below Main window Settings C Calculate Number of simulation runs to perform Results Number of simulation runs performed 0 r gt Select the checkbox next to Calculate in the Setting part of the content pane The Start button becomes active immediately gt Set the number of simulation runs that you want in the text box next to Number of simulation runs to perform for instance 5 gt Press the Start button The system starts running the simulation from 2000 to 2050 for 5 times 62 Main window Settings Calculate Number of simulation runs to perform g Results Number of simulation runs performed S gt Map Comparison After the Start button is pressed the button becomes Stop button It should be noted that for the Monte Carlo analysis you just started METRONAMICA needs to
98. 73 5 1 1 1 1 1 Network tools The Network tools become enabled only when a network layer is selected in the layer manager pane In METRONAMICA there are several ways to open a network map window through the Maps menu through the policy user interface or through the modeller user interface For more details we refer to the section Creating network changes and the section Network map window opened via the modeller user interface respectively You can use the Network tools to view or edit the infrastructure network Left click on a node or link in the map pane to select it Double click on a node or link to edit the properties Change the location of a node by dragging it to a new location Drag in the map pane to draw a new link the link will be drawn as a straight line from the start point to the end point This button will be disabled for the non editable maps Left click in the map pane to add a new node This button will be disabled for the non editable maps Show nodes Select this check box to display nodes of a network in the map pane Clear this check box to not show nodes on the network map Show links Select this check box to display links of a network in the map pane Clear this check box to not show links on the network map 4 If you have changed an editable map you will be asked if you want to save or discard your changes when you close the map window Your changes will not be processed in the mo
99. 9 16 5 65 11 81 15 21 12 58 8 12 11 15 12 47 16 76 11 73 11 81 5 63 10 13 9 72 10 05 13 11 12 70 20 98 16 42 15 33 10 31 4 87 8 90 14 48 13 55 12 11 16 57 12 28 12 66 9 66 8 90 5 04 9 39 8 46 7 02 Hoogezand Sappemeer 12 70 7 68 8 06 10 23 14 29 9 18 5 49 9 07 ama In emn di me In an 27 ar na me lt a an lt The external input for the assignment step is the public transport data Click on the Show Edit exogenous mode data in the Input part on the top of the dialog window Once you press the button the Exogenous mode data dialog window opens You can view and edit the input for the public transport from here 154 Exogenous mode data Variable Trip distance km v Mode Public transport v Time period Rush hour period Trip distance fk oran fre draton Fos Veendam Beerta Appingedam Hefshuizen Bedum Hoogezand Sappem adska ao 1 16 57 21 23 41 85 54 22 48 03 yi a 1 11 36 25 86 37 66 31 97 11 36 1 23 13 37 83 35 77 25 86 23 13 1 15 58 19 15 37 66 37 83 15 58 1 12 24 31 97 35 77 19 13 12 24 1 11 68 17 85 18 15 26 91 20 29 21 03 29 17 24 63 26 7 15 87 26 71 33 26 23 21 21 35 9 53 40 3 48 97 40 31 34 59 22 9 39 74 46 37 33 1 24 71 14 17 46 11 50 57 32 55 19 63 14 81 68 69 75 19 59 04 45 91 40 46 c27 6160 40 71 an ida ANAA Lox J ce On the top of the Exogenous mode data dialog window you can select your variable and time period of interest by clicking on the drop
100. 9 60 6 08 10 45 291 89 17 47 141 72 13 27 Beerta 102 64 346 34 3289 32 115 21 8 68 13 98 248 40 24 47 240 55 18 62 Appingedam 18 28 50 08 115 15 3747 48 117 32 118 40 145 58 16 32 303 86 19 15 Hefshuizen 2 70 6 56 9 24 123 64 1450 76 61 62 14 20 4 70 103 45 6 34 Bedum 4 82 10 71 14 10 117 76 58 14 1432 52 46 22 23 56 730 88 25 78 Hoogezand Sappemeer 65 33 298 79 248 16 146 50 13 40 45 54 3588 60 123 46 703 80 48 97 Haren 7 51 17 13 23 89 15 76 4 344 22 52 119 98 799 32 548 72 29 10 lt The most important input on the Distribution modal split tab is the Initial trip distribution which specifies the initial number of trips per hour between two transport zones per mode per time period per trip purpose for the start year of the simulation In the top Input part of the dialog window you can select your time period trip purpose and transportation mode of interest In the table below you can view or edit the initial trip distribution per hour for the selected time period trip purpose and transportation mode by clicking on your cell of interest and entering a new value You can edit your initial distribution from here All the data of the initial distribution are saved in an A5 matrix e g TripDistribution hsS In the middle Parameters part of the dialog window you can view or edit the Cost sensitivity parameter and Distribution inertia parameter per trip purpose by clicking on your cell of interest and entering a new value The trip distribution
101. Browse button next to Folder gt Select the folder where you stored all the zoning maps generated by OVERLAY TOOL and click OK gt Check the check box next to Vacant land uses are included in Overlay Tool project if you have included the vacant land uses and function land uses in the zoning overlay project unselect the check box for the contrary case You need to verify if the zoning maps in the File column are corresponding to the land uses in the Land use column by switching on or off the check box mentioned above All the zoning maps for all land use functions should be displayed in the table gt Select the zoning maps that you want to import by selecting the check box next to the land use By default all the zoning maps are selected gt Click OK 78 Import Overlay Tool maps Folder za Exercises Exercises with answers Overlay projects Portugal Zoning Exercise J Vacant land uses are induded in Overlay Tool project Select the maps you would like to import Import File Iv zsOfip0_Forest asc Iv zsOf2p0_Wetlands asc Iv zs0f3p0_Pastures and Natural grasslands asc Iv zsOf4p0_Arable land asc Heterogeneous Agricultural Area M zsOf5p0_Hetrogeneous agricultural areas asc Permanent Crops Iv zsOf6p0_Permanent crops asc la ee n Y T a S ppe npon a E i Ca J Cone gt Select the land use of interest from the dropdown list next to Land use gt Click the Show Edit button to verify
102. Cargo mode equivalent Timeline parameters Origin destination weight daily distribution of trips Parameter Mobility growth factor Home work Work home Work work Time Purpose Home work Work O D weight 0 50000 0 50000 0 50000 1989 Jan 01 00 00 00 1 00000 1 Rush hour period 0 3 0 3 0 3 Rest of day period 0 7 0 7 0 7 lt Trips trips activity Urbanisation dass High Origins Destinations Activity Purpose Home work Work home Work wo Activity Purpose Home work Work home Work wor Greenhouses 0 00 0 00 0 1 Greenhouses 0 00 0 00 0 Housing low density 0 24 0 00 0 1 Housing low density 0 00 0 24 0 Houisinn hinh density n 24 nnn n a Housinn hinh density n nn n 24 n os lt gt lt gt Output Trips trips hour Time period Rush hour per Destinations Zone origin Purpose Home work Work home Wo Zone destination Purpose Home work Work home Wo 769 06 637 22 Stadskanaal 637 22 769 06 522 38 452 97 Veendam 452 97 522 38 754 55 312 08 Beerta 312 08 754 55 816 06 647 14 Appingedam 647 14 816 06 252 52 133 88 Hefshuizen 133 88 252 52 y lt gt The purposes of trips in the transport model from the origins and destinations could be for example home work work home social and work work ect On the top left of the dialog window you can view or edit the Cargo mode equivalent in the text box which specifies how much hindrance a cargo vehicle produces in comparison to a normal vehicle car I
103. Click the Add button to import a network change at a specific time for the selected network gt Click the Remove button to delete a network change at a specific time for the selected network gt You can view and edit each network change in isolation by selected the change of interest from the table and clicking the Show Edit selected button Infrastructure layers Input hentia oll Ero Airport E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data Airport shp Ramps E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data Ramps_lines shp Roads_network E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data Roads_network shp Statons E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data Stations_lines shp Waterways E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data Waterways shp Show Edit selected Parameters Network layer v Network changes Time Name Incremental File 2010 Jan 01 Expansion _2010 Vv E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data yoad_expansion_2010 shp For more information about the network map window opened by pressing the Show Edit selected button see the section Network map window opened via the modeller user interface You can view the entire network at a specific simulation time via the policy user interface For more information see the section Displaying an infrastructure network The settings for network changes in the Infrastructure layers window links directly to the setting on the Policy measures page in the Main window Accessibility parameters Go to the Accessibility tab of the Land us
104. D2 Base maps required for suitability calculation Hence you either need a suitability map or the base maps top compose a suitability map of 4 3 4 D4 Base maps required for zoning calculation Zoning maps could be generated with the zoning tool inside of METRONAMICA or with external tools outside of Metronamcia The base maps for zoning calculation are land use policy maps The following maps could be useful e Actual master plans and zoning plans showing areas that are designated for the development of specific land use categories e g urban extension industrial development ecological corridors 256 e Maps showing land use restrictions e g protection categories for agricultural land historic sites or natural areas e Maps indicating land use policies e g restrictions on the total amount of activity in an area that are less spatially specific than zoning Among the important map layers that are wanted for this activity we mention in order of priority 13 Master plans 14 Zoning plans 15 Designated areas for agriculture housing industry commerce recreation etc 16 Protected areas 17 Historic sites 18 Natural sites and reserves 19 Land ownership For each zoning base map you need to know the start time and end time of the planning Zoning base maps plans are represented as raster maps with categorical data You can import a new zoning plan in the zoning tool inside of Metronamica if the map that represen
105. Go to Start All programs Geonamica Metronamica gt Click the Metronamica icon Each time you start Metronamica the About window appears see the section About gt Click the OK button on the About window The Open project file dialog window opens gt Navigate to the project file that you want to open and double click on it If the project file you want to open is created with an older version of Metronamica a message window will appear to ask you whether to upgrade the project file to the current version of software gt Click the No button if you still want to be able to open the project with an earlier version of the software gt Click the Yes button to upgrade the project file automatically Then you can open it with the current version of Metronamica You will no longer be able to open the project with an earlier version of the software METRONAMICA will be started and you will see the METRONAMICA application window on your screen where is the project file name that you selected 30 2 1 6 Screen layout When you start METRONAMICA the application window opens immediately This is the window in which you will run your simulations You can arrange windows as you like in the application window Before a project file has been opened the window is empty except for its Status bar Toolbar and Menu bar The different components of this window will be described in the next paragraphs Metro
106. Here LU is the set of all function land uses C is the set of all cells c in region 1 Parameters input and output Table 3 68 Input variables used in the neighbourhood conversion model block i Function The fraction of land use The sector to land use 7 sector function f that contributes to conversion model block correspondence sector k Na demands The cell demand of land use Number The sector to land use function fin regioniattimet of cells conversion model block The neighbourhood effect of The neighbourhood gt ee e land use that occupies cell c at time Table 3 69 Output variables given by the neighbourhood conversion model block R Average The average neighbourhood Attractivity for activity ri neighbourhood effect of sector k in region i at in all sectors model block time The suitability conversion model block Purpose and use This model block determines the suitability of a region for a sector As input the suitability of a cell for a land use function is given Process description The suitability given per cell is aggregated summed up for a region and then transformed from land use function to sector by means of the function sector correspondence In order to rescale the suitability appropriately the aggregated 213 suitability 1s divided by the number of cells that belongs to the corresponding sector in a particular region Algorithm The function which determines the value of the
107. If this indicator has not been calculated the map will be blank in the Abandoned land map window Habitat fragmentation The habitat fragmentation indicator is a predefined biodiversity indicator It gives an indication of biodiversity according to the Probability of Occurrence and is based on the degree of fragmentation and shows the fragmentation or contiguity of combinations of natural area A high probability corresponds to high potential biodiversity The Habitat fragmentation tab is structured by the Parameters and Output parts 134 Spatial indicators Add new indicator Remove selected indicator Rename selected indicator Soil sealing Urban expansion Forested areas Deforested land Abandoned land Habitat fragmentation 4b Indicator type Biodiversity indicator V Calculate Parameters Minimum duster radius 10 cells Power Z 03 1000 Infrastructure type Is obstade Intercity stations Stations Ordinary roads Average value 68 3315 71 0531 In the Parameters part you can set the minimum size of a cluster in the text box next to Minimum cluster radius in terms of number of cells You can also set the Power Z and Road resistance at here For more information see the section 3 2 7 Habitat fragmentation KOV indicator You can determine whether an infrastructure type is obstacle to habitat to traverse by selecting or unselecting the check box nex
108. Ifthe Do nothing option is selected the file association will be left as it is e If the Automatically associate option is selected the file association will be changed to open this application next time you double click on a Geonamica project file e If the Ask me what to do option is selected a message window similar to the one depicted below will be displayed to indicate the possibly erroneous file association In this window you can select what to do by clicking one of the available buttons If you select the Don t ask me again check box before clicking one of the buttons the option in the Preferences window will be updated to reflect your choice 163 Associate project files Geonamica project files geoproj are not associated with this version of Metronamica Would you like to assodate these files such that you can open them by double clicking Flooraskme aoan Raster map cache folder Some projects use maps that are larger than what can be safely stored in working memory This is the case that the projects are setup with the functionality of Support large maps For more information see section Finalizing the setup of project In these cases the system needs to store calculated maps on the hard drive while a project is open You can control where these maps are stored by changing the Raster map cache folder setting on the Preferences window By default this is set to the Windows tem
109. Metronamica SL and Metronamica ML or for the non roads network in Metronamica LUT the features in the network map window as follow 86 gt Double click on the link of interest on other network layers for instance the urban train layer The Edit accessibility type dialog window opens This is the link property used in the land use model You can edit the accessibility type for the selected link from here gt Click Cancel to close the Edit accessibility type dialog window gt Orclick OK to confirm the change that you made A message window appears to ask you whether or not to save the changes you have made Save network change gt Specify the name and path of the file that you want to save changes to gt Press OK Network layer Waterways 2001 Jan 01 Sel Nodes Node width 5 rice OT A e aA a Link color Link width pe ree eS y x Hide outside modelling area 4 ie ag lo Region boundaries E intercity stations er A Pr r 5 Stations y A je Waterways 2001 Jan 01 E Ordinary roads E E Ramps C E waterways e Ei Airport Color master field AccT ype E Line width master field C Show nodes Show links Importing a network When data on infrastructure developments is available or can be prepared in a GIS as an ESRI shape file you can import these directly in Metronamica You can either import a comp
110. Productivity model ka region i at time or jobs per cell block Table 3 84 Output variables given by the cell demand model block tN Cell The cell demand of sector Number Activity model block cs demands kin region i at time t of cells The crowding effect model block The sector to land use conversion model block 3 3 8 The sector to land use conversion model block Purpose and use This model block calculates the cell demand of a land use function in a region given the cell demand of a sector in a region Process description Based on a fixed predetermined function sector correspondence the inverse correspondence from sector to function has to be determined at each time step It 1s not fixed This is due to the constraint that both cell demands have to be integer numbers Thus at each time step little variations occur due to rounding The inverse correspondence indicates the fraction for which a sector accounted in a land use function in the previous time step Then in accordance to this fraction the newly determined cell demand of a sector in a region is translated into the cell demand of a land use function The sum over all sectors that correspond to this land use function then gives the total cell demand of the latter Algorithm The function which determines the value of the output variable looks as follows N Np a ad i fk kek 219 while t l rime _ N Ja d f ok a t 1 Nyi Here K is the set of
111. Save exogenous matrix dialog window Note that the new 5 file only could be saved on your hard disk after you save the project file that you are working on The parameters on the Assignment tab are for the roads network On the top of the dialog window you can view or edit the Maximum slow down factor in the text box which is constant over time and is used to calculate the speed for each link 155 Parameters Maximum slow down factor 10 Fraction of trips to assign Sensitivity to congestion Accessibility sub type lower bound cars hour Iteration Time period Rush hour period Rest of day period Al Road type0 0 00 Acc subtype 1 Acc subtype 2 Acc subtype 3 Iteration 2 0 3 0 3 Roadtypei 3 00 Acc type 0 0 00 1 00 2 00 Iteration 3 0 1 0 1 Roadtype2 3 00 Acc type 1 0 00 1 00 2 00 Iteration 4 0 05 0 05 Road type 3 4 50 Acc type 2 0 00 190000 00 200000 00 Iteration 5 0 05 0 05 Road type 4 9 00 Acc type 3 0 00 1 00 2 00 Iteration 6 0 0 Roadtype5 9 00 Acc type 4 0 00 1 00 2 00 Iteration 7 0 Road type 6 12 00 Iteration 8 0 Road type 7 0 00 Iteration 9 0 Iteration 10 0 1 WwWolololo Sum In the top left table you can view and edit the Fraction of trips to assign per iteration and per time period The fraction of trips to assign for all the iterations should sum to 1 The numbers of iterations are predefined in the project file which effect the running time of the transport model The model with more num
112. Show contingency table button at the bottom of the content pane The Contingency table Regions map and Initial land use map dialog window opens Contingency table Regions map and Initial land use map Indude cells outside modelling area In the contingency table as depicted above the regions map is on the vertical axis and the initial land use map is on the horizontal axis It is applied only to the modelling area If you want to include the cells outside modelling area you need to select the checkbox next to Include cells outside modelling area on the top of the window e You can only use the Contingency table tool to compare the maps which have the same sizes same rows and same columns 60 e Ifthe two selected maps do not have the same size you will get one message on the contingency table dialog window without showing any results Contingency table Municipality Carolina map and Initial lan Sele C Indude cells outside modelling area Mismatch in number of rows and columns of modelling area For the calibration purpose sometimes you need to use the information on the land use map for the end of the calibration period For instance the start year of your project file is 2000 and the end yea of your calibration 1s 2006 Moreover the real land use map for 2006 is available You can add the land use map for 2006 as one ancillary map and produce a contingency table of it with one of other available maps in the system
113. Suitability Suitability is represented in the land use model by a map for each vacant or function land use Values on the suitability map quantify the effect that physical characteristics of the land have on the possible future occurrence of land uses In the version later than 4 3 including of METRONAMICA the Suitability tool is an integrated part of the system It helps to derive suitability layers for each land use function and vacant state from suitability base maps relevant input layers for suitability As described in the sections Creating a new project file for Metronamica SL and Creating a new project file for Metronamica ML you can choose to use the suitability tool or not to use the suitability in your new project file With the Suitbiality tool you can generate directly the suibaiblity maps in METRONAMICA based on the suibability base maps Without the Suitbiality tool you need to prepare the suitability maps outside of METRONAMICA e g with the help of the OVERLAY TOOL or GIS software before you introduce them in the system Depending on the configuration of your project file the modeller s user interface of the Suitability tab 1s different e For more information about how to work on the suitability parameters with the suitability tool see the following sub sections whose title is started with With the suitability tool 116 e For more information about how to work on the suitability parameters without the suitabi
114. T 1 SAT 4 3 ee max E M if AT 20 Aggregation to interzonal transport costs The average intrazonal speed VZ Of zone z during timeperiod fp is calculated as follows RL 2 Z if RL gt 0 5 fF y oh 1000 V 1000 V f Taz z pl Taz z pl VL SN EN pa 2 RL gt 0 soy E if RL 0 Z RL gt 0 The duration per trip between zones T zp 1S obtained tae XZ XZ L ana d _ e a 2 l a 2 l VL st 0 le SP ASN Z N AEN N 1000 l Vai When a Nash equilibrium is reached a driver does not care which of the allocated routes he takes because all allocated routes would generate the same cost This is used to calculate the generalised cost In the same fashion as before calculate the lit 1 Pe and use these as cost along the links C between zones in Zo Zd P simple cost C Diykstra s algorithm tem t jit 1 Zigzystp Simple tp l le spl SN N A EN N Z0 2d Zo Zd The generalised costs C are calculated as the sum of the different costs Ge ai ee ALF AZ ate XZ XZ ZosZastD Zo Zq IP x 2 t oe VZ D oe I2 P EO g i Ce is Cane where intrazonal distance XZ is caculated as follows 238 DLS K f Taz z CA On the basis of the assignment distances the distance per trip between zones X T __ is obtained 0o d P Zo Zd tp XZ XZ o d lt 4 le SPM A SN N A EN N Zo Zd Zo Z
115. Table 3 89 General information in the Transport model Type of information Type of model dynamic transport assignment model Application Transport zones Spatial resolution Depending on the application case Temporal resolution Process description The transport model is based on a classical four step approach The structure is reflected in the figure below The land use model and regional interaction model serve as input to the transportation model whereas the transportation model again influences the land use model by means of a local accessibility term and the regional model by means of interregional distances Hence the transport model is a dynamic model The transport model calculated every time step yearly Input zonal distribution of activities Production Attraction Distribution Output accessibility and mobility indicators Figure 3 8 Graphical representation of the conceptual model of the transport model Pre processing On the regional level the transport model itself uses information from the regional model in the form of travel demands Each activity people job or cell contributes to the transport model for calculating travel demands Besides activities associated with population and jobs other activities are actively being modelled as well Although they are not expressed in terms of people or jobs they still contribute to the transport model as such Recreational areas for example will generat
116. The following equations are used to get the initial values for the start of iteration it 0 ses fo if RT gt 0 P lo if RT 0 CG 0 Ahi VL m Zo 22d tp In each iteration it fraction F of the number of cars O between zone z and Zq of time period tp will be allocated For this the cars are allocated along the cheapest route from zone Zo to zone zg The cost per link during time period tp is calculated as te it _ t m L t mm t Simple tp l x 1000 t T000 y Ciri tp 236 These costs per link are used in Dijkstra s algorithm to generate the shortest path Sy ae from zone Zo to zone Zg In each iteration the fraction F is assigned to the network based on the shortest path smallest generalized cost During Diykstra s algorithm only links with the a road type RT gt 0 are used except for the first and the last links with RT 0 Dijkstra s algorithm is aware that the network might be directed or non directed Dir The intensity on link during time period tp at interation step it I is calculated tp t t e ID ue ID y j t yit E t rit t m lo lo Lpi m lpi Fi gt OL o T 2 Mzozo jle SPE za Using the intensity the congestion on link CG tp can be calculated by dividing the intensity on the link by the capacity as 1f all traffic was allocated t rit t I IP ae P it l r t it it 1 C it Jd tp CP This slow down
117. The function which determines the value of the output variable looks as follows AS 1 cec f c eLUsp y Here LU in region i y 1s the set of all vacant and function land uses C is the set of all cells c Parameters input and output Table 3 81 Input variables used in the available space model block The current land use map the land use that MBB Land Use occupies cell c at time t Table 3 82 Output variables given by the accessibility conversion model block AS The available space in region i at time t Number of The crowding effect i cells model block 3 3 7 Cell demands per sector Purpose and use This model block calculates the cell demand per sector per region This cell demand is important to determine the number of cells which will eventually be allocated in the CA model 218 Process description The cell demand is computed as the ratio of activity over productivity rounded to the nearest integer The intuition is clear If the activity is very high but the productivity is low then a lot of cells are needed in order to accommodate the activity Algorithm looks as follows t Xp Na Ae PO Lay Parameters input and output Table 3 83 Input variables used in the cell demand model block t X Activity The activity in sector k and Number ofpeople Activity model block region 7 at time t or jobs Ww Density The productivity of sector k in Number of people
118. The results can be limited to a specific area with the use of an ancillary map to indicate the area or with the use of the suitability map for a particular land use to indicate suitable areas Algorithm for each cell c mask 0 if suitability is used as mask if the value of cell c in the selected suitability map threshold mask end if else if the value of cell c in the mask map gt 0 mask end if end if if mask 1 the value in cell c is set to the value in the table for the land use in cell c of the base map from and the current land use in cell c to end if end for Parameters input and output Table 3 40 Land use change indicator input Name Description Source Initial land The land use map for the base year MBB Land use map Use Table 3 41 Land use change indicator parameters Description The measure of spatial patterns to use Land use change The value that will be displayed in the result map if the cell has land use from classification in the base map and to in the current land use map A value of 1 will result in a no data value 3 2 9 Spatial metric indicator Purpose and use This indicator can be used to derive a number of measures of spatial patterns from the land use map 201 Process description The indicator uses the algorithms of the Moving Window Based Structure in the MAP COMPARISON KIT The result map is the metric map produced by this method with the land use ma
119. This model block assumes that different activities cause a number of trips either as an origin or a destination Furthermore the model takes into account that trips in an urbanisation impact the transport system differently than others it takes into account car sharing and cargo transport Process description The main input to the production attraction model block is activities that generate trips inhabitant and jobs per zone Every unit of activity e g a job or inhabitant serves as the origin or destination of a number of trips In the production attraction step a number of trips will be assigned to each zone for these trips the transport zone will be the origin production and or the destination attraction Production and attraction will be divided into different transport motives i e trip purposes such as home work work home work work social visit recreation or shopping Production and attraction are implemented as a linear function of activities that serve as trip origins and destinations Different trip motives may be recognized Trip production factors are not constant over time because it is known that in the last few decades the number of trips people make have increased To take this into account mobility growth is modeled by means of an exogenous trend Algorithm The production of trips is calculated for each zone z and each purpose p 228 The first assessment of trip origins O p is calculated based
120. V 113 Simulations InputMa You can also add a new accessibility type by clicking the Add button on the lower right side The Add accessibility type window opens Enter the value and name for the accessibility type in the text boxes AccType value and Accessibility type name respectively The newly added accessibility type will be displayed on the list of Accessibility types Click the OK button at the bottom to confirm the changes and close the Add accessibility type window Add accessibility type Add remove infrastructure layers Infrastructure layers Network layer Initial network map Airport E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data Airport shp Ramps E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data Ramps_lines shp Roads_network E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data Roads_network shp Stations E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data Stations_lines shp Waterways E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data Waterways shp Accessibility types 1 Stations 2 Ordinary roads 3 Ramps 4 Waterways 5 Airport At the same time the newly added accessibility type will be displayed on the parameters list on the Accessibility tab 110 Parameters Land use is built up Network changes Go back to the Parameters part of the Infrastructure layers window You can select your network of interest on the dropdown list next to Network layer The detailed information for all the network changes for the selected layer is displayed in the table gt
121. Zoning maps are used for enforcing spatial restrictions on the allocation of land uses For each land use there is a time series of zoning maps specifying which cells can and cannot be taken in by the particular land use allowing changing zoning regulations over periods of time Zoning maps remain constant during the simulation unless the user changes them Accessibility represented by one map per land use function modelled Accessibility is an expression of the ease with which an activity can fulfil its needs for transportation and other infrastructure in a particular cell based on the infrastructure network The accessibility 1s calculated per land use function and only changes if the user changes the zonal accessibility parameters in the transport model or the infrastructure network or the accessibility coefficients the importance of different land use functions to be close to different elements of the network in the land use model Dynamic interaction of land uses in the area immediately surrounding a location is represented by the Neighbourhood potential For each land use function a set of spatial interaction rules determines the degree to which it is attracted to or repelled by the other functions present in its surroundings a 196 cell neighbourhood If the attractiveness is high enough the function will try to occupy the location 1f not it will look for more attractive places New activities and land uses invading a neighbourhood over
122. a Economic sectors model the activity in terms of jobs Population sectors model the activity in terms of people Area sector model the activity in terms of land surface and which are defined as a cell demand The values in the input table parameters table and output table are for the selected sector If the area sector type is selected values are only displayed in the Input part Initial value for socio economic sector In the Input part of the Regional interaction model dialog window you can view and edit the values for Initial value Lower bound and Upper bound for each region 139 Input Initial value jobs v Derive initial cell counts and densities Region Initial activity jobs S Oost Groningen 12536 J Delfzijl e o 5433 Overig Groningen 30886 Noord Friesland 26043 Click Initial value from the dropdown list under Input The system allows you to edit the Initial activity jobs or people per region for the selected sector in the Input part by clicking on the cell of interest in the initial activity table and entering a new value If you make change on the initial activity or you change the initial land use map in the land use model you should press the Derive initial cell counts and productivity button next to Initial value Once this button is pressed the system derives the initial cell counts from the initial land use map and calculates the productivity for all sectors and for all regions on the basis
123. a LUT There must be a one to one relation between the land use functions at the local level and the economic and population sectors at the regional level The specification described above is mainly for land use model and regional model Particularly for the additional information required by the transport model it is not described at here We refer to the section 4 5 Additional data for the transport model 4 2 Required data and configuration of Metronamica Basically three types of data are required depending on the configuration of Metronamica SL ML or LUT They are described in the following the sections 3 GIS map data are required to feed the land use model at the local level 4 Census and other statistical data for the regional model at the regional level 5 Additional information for the transport model at the regional level Therefore for Metronamica SL data in the section 4 3 are required for Metronamica ML data in the sections 4 3 and 4 4 are required for Metronamica LUT data in the sections 4 3 4 4 and 4 5 are required 4 3 GIS data for the land use model These data are required for the land use model at the local level 254 METRONAMICA supports two GIS compatible raster formats ArcInfo ASCII grid format or Idrisi byte binary image format All maps must be strictly comparable they must be of identical size i e cover the same area resolution and origin i e they must be registered Maps should
124. a new sub scenario Since the steps are very similar for all land use functions we take Industry as an example to explain how you can work with the external factors How to view data and projections for the Baseline sub scenario gt Select the Baseline integrated scenario as the active integrated scenario from the dropdown list on the toolbar gt Go to the Drivers tab in the Main window gt Click the External factors icon For Metronamica SL gt Click the graphic icon next to the land use of interest industry The Demand for Industry graph window opens This graph shows the land use demand for industry on the y axis and the year on the x axis gt You can press Cancel to go back to the Main window For Metronamica ML and LUT gt Select the variable of interest e g an area sector from the dropdown list next to Trend gt Click the graphic icon next to the region of interest The Area demand graph window opens This graph shows the area demand of area sector for region on the y axis and the year on the x axis gt You can press Cancel to go back to the Main window 71 How to define trends for jobs and population in Metronamica ML and Metronamica LUT The Metronamica ML and Metronamica LUT include not only the total trend and regional trend for jobs and population but also allow you to define whether the level of activity is restricted or not The trends of jobs and population work in the same w
125. a o eo o a Forests Legend pane The legend pane is displayed in the upper left portion of the Map window It shows the legend of the map selected in the layer Manager pane explained below For example if you select a land use map the legend pane shows the land use legend Double click in the legend pane to change the legend that is displayed see the section Legend editor Land uses are subdivided into 3 types Vacant Function Feature In the land use legend the Vacant land uses appear at the top of the list the Function land uses appear in the middle of the list and are underlined and the Feature land uses appear at the bottom of the list The 3 different land use types are explained in the section Land use classes 39 Layer manager pane The layer manager pane is displayed in the upper right portion of a map window You can select a layer by clicking on its name This will display the legend for the layer and allow you to edit the layer if possible see the section Grid tools and Network tools You can show or hide a layer by clicking on the layer visibility button in the layer manager pane D Layer is visible AOOO e Tools pane The tools pane is displayed in the lower right portion of the Map window It shows the tools for viewing and editing maps and includes the Zoom tools Grid tools and Network tools Click on the corresponding name to expand or collapse the section for either of these three Zoom
126. able The maps required for the calculation of the zoning maps are mentioned in 251 section D4 Base maps required for zoning calculation Hence you either need a zoning map or the base maps top compose a zoning map 4 3 6 D6 Networks Networks covering the entire study area should be provided Separate network maps must be provided for each year in which the network changes extensions closures during both the calibration and the simulation periods for each of the following e Road network including all major roads and indicating access points to motorways as nodes on the network e Rail network as a network but also showing passenger stations as nodes e Any other transport systems e g metro funicular or navigable waterways e Key points or nodes e g the city centre in the urban area Transportation networks can also be provided as one shape file with different classes Network files should be made available as GIS shape files shp For the network shape file in point format you need to convert it to polyline format before you import it as an infrastructure layer in METRONAMICA e Network files should consist of form nodes and links with the form node specified as the integer grid cell coordinates e Access nodes intersections motorway entry exit points stations etc should be provided in a separate text file specifying the cell coordinates integers of the node location as well as other relevant data e g type
127. accessibility which will be used to normalize the zonal accessibility for each land use function The range of the minimum zonal accessibility is from 0 to 1 For example if the minimum zonal accessibility is 0 75 as depicted in the figure below that means the value between 0 75 1 represents accessible and the value small than 0 75 represents less accessible Transport model etworks Production attraction Distribution modal split Costs Assignment Zonal accessibility Indi 4 gt Parameters Minimum zonal accessibility Sensitivity to costs per activity 0 25000 0 25000 0 25000 0 25000 0 25000 0 25000 0 81115 0 73740 0 67303 0 73914 0 65439 0 95082 0 84064 0 76271 0 83693 0 72286 0 92742 0 83791 0 73907 0 83083 0 71883 0 92558 0 84766 0 74523 0 83755 0 72916 0 98870 0 96155 0 95108 0 96893 0 91377 0 95433 N RRI45 0 83753 O RR77A N 77847 Sensitivity to cost is one of the parameters which cause the new situation on the transport distribution Sensitivity to cost represents how sensitive that people react to the cost for trips You can view and edit the Sensitivity to costs per activity in the Parameters part The lower Output part of the dialog window shows the normalized zonal accessibility in each transport zone and for each land use function for the current simulation year Indicators The parameters and variables on the previous tabs are sufficient to describe transport system and how it evolves through
128. ailable Start time End time A category in a plan can start and stop at any given time in the simulation By default a plan is valid from the start year of the simulation until the end 75 year of the simulation However the start year the end year or both can be set per category This time setting per category is assumed to be equal for all land use functions Zoning map The zoning map 1s the result of the interpretation and combination of all categories in all spatial plans It indicates the zoning status in each cell for a particular time span Zoning maps are specific for each land use function and have a timestamp since zoning regulations can change over time Numerical zoning map The numerical zoning maps are used to calculate the total potential maps They are derived from the categorical zoning maps for the current simulation time and the current land use map Strictly numerical zoning maps do not exist in the zoning tool itself since the conversion to numerical values takes place when computing the total potential For more information see the section Zoning Because multiple zoning plans can be introduced in the zoning tool it is possible that two plans will provide conflicting zoning information e g according to one plan residential development is allowed whereas it is prohibited in another plan To resolve such conflicts the set of all categories in all zoning plans is ordered hierarchically in the zoning
129. alculating e The rightmost sections of the Status bar indicate which of the following keys are latched down the Caps Lock key CAP the Num Lock key NUM or the Scroll Lock key SCRL 2 1 7 System information The different commands in the Help menu allow you to look up the system information about METRONAMICA For more information see the section Help menu Help Click Index on the Help menu or press the F1 key to open the on line help file of Metronamica Use the Contents tab on the left side of the Metronamica documentation window to navigate to the topic that you want help on You can also use the Search tab to find the relevant section in the user manual If these tabs are not displayed click the Show button at the top of the Metronamica documentation window Licence Click Licence on the Help menu to get the licence information in the Installed licenses window All licences for the Geonamica based software installed on your computer will be listed in the table You can import a licence file with extension lic by clicking the Read a licence file button To remove a license click the Open license folder button and remove the files with the license name you want to remove from the folder You need to restart the application for the changes to take effect There is no need to remove existing licenses before installing a new one 32 Checking for updates Click Check for updates on the Help menu to che
130. aling method from the Scale list or click the Find best scale button to select the scaling method that yields the highest Estimated effectiveness this is a value between 0 and 100 that indicates how well the classification will be able to distinguish the variety of values that occur in the map The available scaling methods are described in the table below Click the OK button to update the lower and upper bounds in the legend editor window Note that the labels in the table will not be updated Scaling method Linear Each class will have the same width 1 e difference between lower and upper bound Arithmetic The width of the second lowest class will be twice the width of the lowest class The width of the third lowest class will be three times the width of the lowest class Etc Geometric The ratio of upper bound divided by lower bound will be the same for each class Over geometric The ratio of upper bound divided by lower bound for the second lowest class will be twice that of the lowest class for the third lowest class three times that of the lowest class etc This scale is useful for data that follows a factorial distribution Each class will cover an approximately equal amount of values Standardised discretisation The width of each class is set according to the standard deviation of the values in the map centred around the average value in the map Method of Bertin This scale applies two linear scales
131. alized cost parameters a Transport model 2 EK Parameters Networks Production attraction Distribution modal split Costs Assignment Zonal accessibility Indicators Input Initial trip distribution trips hour Time period Rush hour peri Purpose Home work v Mode Car Origin Destination Stadskanaal Veendam Beerta Appingedam Hefshuizen Bedum Hoogezand Sappemeer Haren Groningen Grootegast Zuid Stadskanaal 1035 75 39 59 26 02 4 63 0 60 1 19 16 64 1 99 18 93 1 70 Veendam 39 24 648 53 87 95 12 34 1 46 2 58 72 11 4 41 36 12 3 30 Beerta 25 54 86 13 822 33 28 81 2 10 3 48 62 13 6 19 61 08 4 66 Appingedam 4 55 12 58 28 78 936 87 28 54 29 68 36 28 4 15 77 68 4 80 Hefshuizen 0 70 1 70 2 38 31 70 362 69 15 84 3 65 1 22 26 73 1 63 Bedum 1 21 271 3 54 29 36 14 10 358 15 11 64 6 02 188 84 6 48 Hoogezand Sappemeer 16 25 75 56 62 01 36 74 3 25 11 30 897 15 31 30 179 52 Haren 1 84 4 24 5 90 3 87 1 04 5 50 29 56 199 83 140 09 lt Parameters Parameter Purpose Home work Work home Work work Home home Cost sensitivity 1 Euro 0 78200 0 78200 0 78200 0 78200 Distribution inertia 0 80000 0 80000 0 80000 0 80000 Output Trip distribution trips hour Time period Rush hour peri Mode Car v Origin Destination Stadskanaal Veendam Beerta Appingedam Hefshuizen Bedum Hoogezand Sappemeer Haren Groningen Grootegast Zi Stadskanaal 4143 00 158 01 103 60 18 44 2 50 4 78 66 15 7 81 73 85 6 78 Veendam 157 31 2594 12 349 98 4
132. all the files that are required to run models in the system The project file used in METRONAMICA has the extension geoproj A project file contains at least one integrated scenario The locations of input data and files and parameter values of all integrated scenarios can be stored in a single project file A project file must have at least one sub scenario specified for each driver At most one sub scenario per driver can be indicated as the baseline scenario All sub scenarios created in METRONAMICA are editable See the section Saving changes for more information on how to save a sub scenario integrated scenario or project file For Metronamica SL a sub scenario 1s composed of 35 Land use demand scenario related to the total land use demand that you can access via Drivers External factors Total demand Infrastructure scenario related input data files for infrastructure networks that you can access via Drivers Policy measures Driver Infrastructure Zoning scenario related input data files and parameters for zoning regulation that you can access via Drivers Policy measures Driver Zoning For Metronamica ML a sub scenario 1s known as Area demand scenario related to the demand for each area sector per region that you can access via Drivers External factors Trend Area of where is the name of area sector Socio economic trend scenario related to the trend of number of people and jobs
133. allowed planning period 0 to the start of the first allowed planning period 1 with a value of 0 5 for the zoning anticipation parameter Algorithm The zoning for land use fin cell c Z is calculated l eed ug A t t a t p f c 1 Zp eae if trea S S balso P f c p f c 1 0 Sh aa In this equation is p f c the planning period from which onwards land use f will be allowed in cell c t the start of planning period 7 and za the zoning anticipation parameter for land use f Parameters input and output Table 3 17 Zoning parameters Start of planning The start of the first and second planning period for each zoning map periods i Zar Zoning anticipation Parameter controlling the steepness of the increase in the zoning for land use f from the last disallowed planning period to the first allowed planning period Table 3 18 Zoning output GUI Zee Zoning maps A numerical map for each function land use Transition potential specifying whether that land use is allowed Metronamica ML and LUT in each cell 1 or not 0 MBB Regional interaction Zoning with the zoning tool Purpose and use Process description Algorithm to compute categorical zoning maps Algorithm to compute numerical zoning maps for total potential calculation Parameters input and output 183 Purpose and use The zoning regulations can be incorporated in the system by means of the zoning tool A zoning tool
134. alysed afterwards in the Map Comparison Kit part of the Metronamica package or GIS packages see the section Log maps e You can make an animation of a map that shows how the map changes over time see the section Animate maps You can open the animation in a viewer but can also incorporate them in presentations or on a website e You can create a link to Excel through which all selected model results are directly written to Excel see the section Write to Excel This can be used for analyses and post processing afterwards Before running the simulation you can decide which results you would like to save to disk For details about running the simulation and saving results please refer to the section Running a scenario and the section Saving results Step 4 Visualising indicators After a simulation is finished METRONAMICA offers several options to analyse results The first option 1s to visualise indicators The indicators are organised in four groups e Environmental indicators Metronamica SL Metronamica ML and Metronamica LUT e Social economic indicators Metronamica SL Metronamica ML and Metronamica LUT 69 e Transport indicators Metronamica LUT Each of these indicators is calculated on a yearly basis Depending on the type of indicator it is calculated at one or more spatial levels regional transport analysis zone and local You gain access to the indicators by clicking the Indicators tab in the Main window
135. am cccccccsssssesssseseeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaas 97 2 4 2 Model Building Blocks MBBsS ccccccccccssssseseeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaas 98 2 4 3 Connectors and CONNECTIONS cccccccccccccceccseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaaaas 98 2A Dilo WANG WS areited crtceds onscreen E earns 99 2 4 5 Individual model COMponents ce eeeccccccccecceeeseeeccceeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 99 2 5 The Motronamica menu Sy Stem x 6shcc dane sitet sandal ea diiiies avd ih atdactas 159 Dee TC AMC TAU a oeta hast eto tere h tina at wtp eee eta wc atta ane eo tee 159 2 532 SIMU AMON MENU stoves aol hei aaa eins 160 Dede MADS What sear dune 2 naira Coase E N 160 a Came olka tices alah b Cneee eee Decree ener een ae eee re eam Decent eer een Aen ere teem Deena 162 23D Windows MONU ccicsetes sear at Sonus eae eke eeh chara tale abies sceneries 164 ZeSKOr TAG GINS a i EE cose S N E ie E E 164 3 MODEL DESCRIPTION saiicsstceesccccetdecdstec seddccbevcustecavedicetdeedstectsetievtivessteusvediertcs 165 3 1 MBB Land SG ag desire tens cinn O E E OE 165 Skl Descripuoi MBB Lind Useassa A 165 DAZ Celular Atomai ie aa A TE E hens ees 170 31 3 INGishbOurhOod potential sissien ested A 174 e ACOE SSID O e a a E IR 175 De DOADO eeaeee N R ane cacenaeyales 180 DANO AOD Eoo e E E A E a A E A aanlade ae 182 Sled MTIRO PONHA eaa cite a a itelaaaaae ete 187 Delsey Eind Useui T aaie easi 188 3 2 NUTS BS ati a indicator S reinn E E var tadigta
136. amic approach Over the course of a time step only a fraction of the trips will be distributed according to the actual generalised cost matrix the remaining trips will follow the distribution of the previous time step representing a degree of inertia 1 e reluctance to change Algorithm In the distribution model there are two parts to take into account The first is the responsive part based on the generalized cost of travel between zones This part is used for the response to changes The second is the inert part based on the previous trip matrix OD This part reflects the reluctance to change i e the inertia Responsive distribution The model first calculates the trip responsive distribution as if the transport system fully adjusts to changes in cost In order to find balancing factors for the responsive 231 part the following log sum aggregated cost is calculated based on the sensitivity to cost per trip purpose y and the generalised cost for transport _ purpose t l L A O Zo Zq P purpose Vp p sum_mod __ The responsive distribution Qp Z zp ior individual modes are found by the Furness iteration see the section Transport annex 2 Furness Iteration purpose xt CP sum _ mod OP DP e Zo 2d AP Oe ae Furness 0 D Z tp z tp Inert distribution Next the model calculates the trip inert distribution as if the transport system remains unchanged where possible It finds balancing fa
137. ansport assignment origini zone z to the destination zone z4 by mode m during time period tp at time t Generalised cost per trip to go from the origin Transport assignment zone Z to the destination zone zz by mode m during time period tp at time t QP Number of trip origins for zone z purpose p in trips hour Production and 7P time period tp per hour at time t attraction t T P Number of trip destinations for zone z purpose p trips hour Production and Z p in time period tp per hour at time t attraction Table 3 121 Output variables INT slobal m Total trip Global number of daily trips by Transport means of mode m at time t ageregation indicators MX Average trip Global average distance travelled Transport distance daily by means of mode m at time t aggregation indicators t MT Average trip Global average time travelled daily Transport duration by means of mode m at time t aggregation indicators CG Daily Daily congestion per category cat in Transport congestion km at time t aggregation indicators CG Daily Daily congestion per category cat as Transport cE congestion ercentage at time t r ion 8 p 8 aggregation indicators 247 t g al pupos Trip origins Number of trip origins for zone z in Transport time period tp per hour at time t aggregation Z tp indicators t pyfotal_purpos Trip Number of trip destination for zone z Transport ate destinations in time period tp per hour at
138. ar routes There are costs associated to these routes such as the use of fuel and time parking costs and toll costs The route choice of trip makers determines the distances in transport costs between zones The ultimate purpose of the assignment step is to determine these costs Moreover this procedure results in a detailed assessment of the mobility on the road network e g transport intensity travel speed and congestion This detailed assessment of mobility on the road network is therefore also considered a purpose of the assignment step Actors making trips between zones pick the route with the lowest cost They balance different types of costs associated with the travel time travel distance and other factors such as parking costs and tolls General aversion for a certain mode 1s also considered as cost By choosing a route actors add to the intensity of roads and thereby affect the travel speed on these roads The collective response of actors to the changing situation is such that in the end nobody 1s able to find an alternative cheaper route In other words actors choose the shortest path contingent to the choices of the other actors Such an equilibrium situation is called Nash equilibrium Intrazonal transport is not represented by this process therefore it is approximated by a heuristic function of the area of transport zones 233 Process description The assignment step is applied for each mode In this procedure all trip
139. art a consequence of the transport system and at the same time developments in the transport system are by large the effect of land use changes In METRONAMICA the transport system affects the land use in two ways The first is via the notion of accessibility because arguably the most important driver of land use change is the degree to which services markets and people can be reached This is a fact for highly diverse land use types from agricultural land use for which accessibility to the intermediary market is important to natural land for which a low degree of accessibility by humans may be a condition for undisturbed development and to residential land use where the accessibility of services recreation area and jobs is crucial A second impact of the transport system which 1s more often ignored is the impact of transport infrastructure and transport intensity on the direct environment neighbourhood Examples of such impacts are loss of biodiversity due to fragmentation of natural area by busy roads air and noise pollution that significantly impact the quality of life of the population in the proximity of a highway On the other hand there are also positive effects such as the benefits for the services sector of being situated at the intersection of major transport corridors In fact such impacts have historically been the foundation of many modern cities As stated the transport land use relationship is reciprocal if not for
140. ast not immediately detectable On the other hand indicators can also be set up to verify legislative guidelines or policy goals Indicators are in fact small model blocks that generally simplify in order to make complex phenomena quantifiable in such a manner that communication 1s either enabled or promoted Clearly with the system like METRONAMICA which generates evolving land use patterns and the associated high resolution land use land cover maps the generation of spatially referenced indicators in a dynamic manner becomes a distinct possibility The calculation of indicators can be done as part of a post processing task on the spatial output written to file and stored during a simulation The MAP COMPARISON KIT and the OVERLAY TOOL are appropriate instruments to produce indicators based on land use changes respectively composite indicators based on the combination and weighing of land use and ancillary maps Alternatively it is possible to incorporate the calculation of spatial indicators in the system and have them calculated dynamically with the changing land use Like the other variables indicators are thus calculated on a yearly basis and are available in the model in the form of dynamic maps time charts and numeric outputs The functionality available in the spatial indicator models has the following characteristics e A set of indicator algorithms has been incorporated to visualise and assess the effects of urban spatial patte
141. ators Metronamica ML and LUT MBB Regional interaction Metronamica LUT MBB Transport 3 2 MBB Spatial indicators 3 2 1 Description MBB Spatial indicators Objective The METRONAMICA system develops comparable databases to derive indicators in order to understand the evolution of urban areas and impacts on the surrounding environment At the basis of its approach lies the idea that without a spatial approach any urban indicator set aiming to address sustainability would be incomplete The spatial indicators model calculates the spatial indicators dynamically with the changing land use on a yearly basis and are available in the form of dynamic maps and numeric outputs User information Table 3 29 User information in the spatial indicators model Drivers and Links to from other MBB Impacts External influences Land use scenarios either applied externally or internally from land use model MBB Land Use land use map Policy options C Parameter sets for each spatial indicator Policy indicators Impacts e T T General information Table 3 30 General information in the spatial indicators model Type of information Type of model Various indicator models Application All cells within the modelling area Spatial resolution Depending on the application case Temporal resolution 190 Process description An indicator in this context is a measure to make a particular phenomenon perceptible that is not or at the le
142. ay We use the trend of jobs in employment as an example gt Goto the Drivers tab of the Main window and click the External factors icon gt Select Economic trend on the drop down next to Driver gt Select Jobs in Employment on the drop down next to Trend m Main window Drivers D Driver Economic trend v Economic trend sub scenario modified Trend Jobs in Employment v Automatic Total Oost Groningen Delfzijl en Omgeving Overig Groningen Noord Friesland Zuidwest Friesland Zuidoost Friesland Noord Drenthe Zuidoost Drenthe Zuidwest Drenthe Noord Overijssel Zuidwest Overijssel Twente Veluwe Achterhoek Arnhem Nijmegen Zuidwest Gelderland i q Flevoland C a I echt Indicators _ Kop van Noord Holland O OOo 8 ODO S Y DOODOOOOOOOGDOOOOOOO P00000000000000000 To adapt the total trend gt Click the graphic icon in the row of Total on the first line gt Adapt the figures on the graph for the total trend for the selected variable e g Jobs in Employment For more information see the section How to adapt values for external factors gt This total trend will be distributed over all regions For each region two options are available Automatic and Manual If Automatic option is selected the system assigns the value distributed automatically from the total trend to the selected region for the selected variable The graph is not editable The leve
143. base map for different time point The generated suitability layers will be fed into the Land use model automatically You can use the Add time button and Remove time button to organize the base maps at multiple time points With the suitability tool removing a suitability factor gt Go to Main window Drivers Parameters Land use Suitability In the dropdown list titled Land use select a land use vacant or function Click the Factors and base maps tab Click the Suitability factor from the list Click the Remove factor button The sutability base maps under this factor will be removed both from the Factors and base maps tab and the Interpretation tab VV V WV With the suitability tool interpreting a new suitability factor The new suitability map is now introduced into the system however it 1s not interpreted yet so it has no effect yet on future land use changes The interpretation can be done in the Interpretation tab Here you can subsequently set if the suitability factor effect the suitability of the selected land use and you can also set the transformation rule of this factor for the selected land use vacant or function The transformation rule consists of a set of bars for categorical maps or a 2D graph for numerical maps For the numerical maps the values in the base map are always depicted horizontally while the vertical axis ranges from 0 to 1 and represents 118 suitability valu
144. be after the start year of the simulation Otherwise an error message as depicted below will appear when you click the Next button 18 GEONAMICA A Please enter an end year thatis after the start year Lox You can change the end year of the simulation via the user interface after the project is created For more information see the section Simulation menu gt Click the browse button next to Region boundaries map The Open dialog window opens gt Navigate the region map that you want to import and double click on it Note that the region map that you import from here should be a raster map The outside of modelling area should have value 0 New Metronamica project wizard Enter the basic project parameters Simulation start year 1989 Simulation end year 2030 Region boundaries map J 2 amp My Computer File name regions rst v Files of type Supported raster map files asc img sth w My serie C Open as read only After you import the raster region map all the values on this map are listed in the table with the default region names If you do not have a licence which allows you to create a new METRONAMICA project for the specific region you will get an error message If you still want to set up a new project file for this region please contact RIKS for more information see the section If you experience problems
145. be available for 2 dates Base year and Base year2 For validation purposes it is useful to have data from a third year available At the least for either Base year or Base year2 a complete set of data including D1 D3 D5 D6 D7 see below should be available covering the complete area 4 3 1 D1 Land use maps Land use maps for the land use categories are required for each of two years Base yearl and Base year2 the beginning and the end of the calibration period The data for the two years must be strictly comparable they must be generated by the same classification and re sampling procedures and be shown to be comparable as to both land use classes and registration In METRONAMICA applications three types of land use classes are used features functions and vacant classes Features are land use classes that are not supposed to change in the simulation like water bodies or airports Functions are land use classes that are actively modelled like residential or commercial and in some applications also natural and agricultural land uses Vacant states finally are classes that are only changing as a result of other land use dynamics Computationally at least one vacant state is required Usually abandoned land and natural land use types are modelled as vacant state since they are literally vacant for other land use or the result of the disappearance of other land use The values in the file must be integers starting at value 0 one for eac
146. ber of iterations requires more running time The Sensitivity to congestion per road type is used to calculate the speed of one link which is of this road type You can give this parameter per road type in the middle top of the dialog window in the Sensitivity to congestion table Note that the sensitivity to congestion for the road type which is connected to the special node should be given as zero Otherwise an error message as depicted in the figure below appears You can view the road type of a link in its properties table GEONAMICA A Congestion sensivity for the first road type must equal 0 In the computation of the local accessibility in the land use model the influence of the road network is adjusted for the intensity on that part of the network In the Accessibility subtype lower bound table on the top right part of the dialog window you can view and edit the transport intensity lower bound of subtype accessibility type Acc subtype for each Acc type in terms of cars hour Each accessibility type has three subtypes lower intensity Acc subtype 1 medium intensity Acc subtype 2 and High intensity Acc subtype 3 The first lower bound Acc Subtype 1 should be zero for all accessibility type Otherwise an error message appears as depicted in the figure below You can view the accessibility type of a link in its properties table For more information about the acctype categories and the road type categories used
147. biodiversity Creating a new indicator In METRONAMICA except for the predefined indicators the available spatial indicator types are e Cluster indicator e Distance indicator e Distance to map indicator e Habitat fragmentation indicator e Land use change indicator e Mask mapping indicator e Neighborhood indicator e Spatial metric indicator Create new indicator Cluster indicator Habitat fragmentation indicator Land use change indicator Mask mapping indicator Neighbourhood indicator Spatial metric indicator You can add a new indicator by clicking the Add new indicator button at the left top of the Spatial indicators dialog window The Create new indicator dialog window opens gt Select the type of indicator that you want to create from the dropdown list next to Indicator type gt Enter the name of the new indicator in the text box next to Indicator name 136 Create new indicator Indicator type Cluster indicator v iniata name Coa gt Click the OK button The new user defined indicator is displayed on the Spatial indicators dialog window gt Configure the parameters for the new added indicator amp Spatial indicators Remove selected indicator Rename selected indicator xpansion Forested areas Deforested land Abandoned land Habitat fragmentation New cluster indicator 4 gt Indicator type Cluster indicator C Calculate Parameters aya
148. brated which troubles the automatic calibration routine greatly To overcome this difficulty largely the influence functions are transformed to splines defined by only four points For these splines the following properties should hold e The inertia value is always given on the vertical axis that is at distance 0 Thus the first point is 0 inertia e The second point must be located at distance 1 This point is indicated by 1 a e The last point of the spline at distance d should have value 0 such that for all distances larger than d the function value is 0 This point is indicated by d 0 e There is one point b c that can be anywhere between the second and the last point Hence 1 lt b lt d 173 An example of a four point spline is shown in figure 3 3 The vertical lines represent the distances on the 30 concentric circles Previously the influence functions were defined with a point on each of these lines In the four point spline there are still values for each concentric circle but they are linearly interpolated instead of user defined Options Options J Gid If vale ticks C Spline Linear Figure 3 3 An example of an influence function The transition rules The goal of the CA model is to allocate a cell state to each cell on the map in order to simulate the dynamic behaviour of land use functions The allocation is performed on the basis of a to be specified algorithm that works o
149. changed are saved The figure below is an example of the Metronamica ML The title of the network map window indicates the descriptive name of the selected network and the selected year As depicted in the figure above besides the Region boundaries layer and the Hide outside modelling area layer there is only one layer Roads_network 2010 Jan 01 visible in the layer manager pane which shows the high level overview of the network changes for the selected time in the map pane The legend pane consists of 4 legend tabs which are used for editing the legend of network map The Link color and Link width tab are the most useful tabs For more information about how to edit legend see the section Legend editor 85 In Metronamica SL and Metronamica ML for all infrastructure network layers the categories of Acctype are used as the legend For more information see the section Network legends In Metronamica LUT for the roads network the categories of road type are used as the legend for other network layers e g Stations Ramps and Waterways The categories of Acctype are used as the legend For more information see the section Network legends Network layer Roads_network 2010 Jan 01 Nodes Node width Link color Link width R X Hide outside modelling area 4 4 E intercity stations Sus Le lo Region boundaries C O Stations L k 1 a a gt je Roads_network 2010 Jan 01 C E Ordinary roads N N a p 5 j N ge C B rems i EA SAN C J
150. changes gt gt gt Go to Main window Drivers Policy measures Infrastructure Select an infrastructure layer from the Network list Click the Show Edit network at time button at the bottom of the window A window will open where you can select the simulation time for which you want to display the network Select a time from the list and click the OK button A map window will open displaying the selected infrastructure network at the selected time To add a link select which type of link to add from the Link color legend then click the Add link button on the Network tools and draw the link in the map by dragging the mouse from the start point to the end point You may first want to zoom in on the area of interest Note that you can only draw straight lines To remove a link zoom in on it right click on it and select Delete from the context menu that will pop up To change the type of a link zoom in on it right click on it and select Properties from the context menu that will pop up A window will open where you can select the infrastructure type Close the map window to save your changes as a new network change You will be asked to enter a name for the change and a file name where the map will be saved It s best to save this in a subfolder of the project file Note that the system always creates incremental network change maps meaning only the nodes and links that have been added removed or
151. ck if you are using the latest version of Metronamica If a newer version is available the system will tell you how to get it About Click on About on the Help menu to open the About window Here you can find the copyright notice and version number of METRONAMICA The latter is important if you need assistance with the software see the section If you experience problems or when you request an update of the software About Metronamica eee Metronamica Metronamica is a Spatial Decision Support System SDSS for land use modeling A Metronamica is developed by the Research Institute for Knowledge Systems Maastricht the Netherlands More information on the product can be obtained from Ir Hedwig van Delden Director of RIKS hyvdelden iriks nl or the product website http www riks nl products metronamica Metronamica is developed with the dynamica modeling environment GEONAMICA a registered a Metronamica Version number 2 1 8 Closing METRONAMICA You can close METRONAMICA by clicking Exit on the File menu If you have a project file open the application may ask whether you want to save your changes before closing J Would you like to save the changes you have made Click the Yes button to save your changes click the No button to discard your changes and close METRONAMICA or click the Cancel button to keep METRONAMICA open More information on saving changes is available in the section Sa
152. ction of r equal to the distance weighted fraction of nature The KOV chance of appearance is now KOV s n For the full description of the indicator we refer to Klepper 1997 The z parameter by default is 0 3 and the resistance values for the different degrees of traversibility are 1 easy 10 neutral 100 difficult and 1000 very difficult Parameters input and output Table 3 39 Habitat fragmentation indicator parameters Search radius r The search radius around the centre cell The unit of the search radius depends nee on the cell size This comes forth from the empirical relation N c A where N is the number of species c is a constant and A is the surface Resistance of road The resistance of a road If a road crosses through a cell the resistance of that cell is taken as the maximum of the resistance of that land use and this value Signals per land use whether it belongs to the habitat 1 or not 0 Resistance w The resistance of the corresponding land use 200 3 2 8 Land use change indicator Purpose and use This type of indicator can be used to display particular land use changes between a base year and the current year in particular areas Process description The current land use map 1s compared to the land use map for a base year which can be entered in the indicator The resulting value can be specified for each possible combination of a land use in the base year and in the current year
153. ctors for the inert part on the basis of aggregated previous trip distributions per purpose ODP w nen mod 2 ODP D Zd tp 02 d gt tp The inert distribution Q for individual modes are found by the Furness iteration see the section Transport annex 2 Furness Iteration purpose xt CP sum _ mod t OP t NP Yp Zo Zd tp Or Furness O D e Zo tp Zg p Trip distribution The trip matrix ODP tor the current time is then generated for all trip purposes separately based on the responsive distribution Or 2 gt the inert distribution Or p and the distribution inertia factor o where the inertia factor p determines to what extent the responsive or the inert distribution prevail ODPIS o P Oe PO a Trip matrices per mode are aggregated over the purposes OD _ ODP Zo Zd P ae Parameters input and output Table 3 104 Distribution and modal aie parameters y pepo Cost a ae Sensitivity to cost for trips of purpose p balan inertia Inertia fraction of the trip distribution matrix for purpose p Initial trip Initial trip distribution between two zone z and Zz trips hour distribution by mode m during time period tp trip purpose p The initial trip distribution values should be 20 Table 3 105 Distribution and modal split inputs 232 Number of trip origins for zone z purpose p trips hour Production and in time period tp p
154. d L 1000 t m Zo gt Zg4p 2 Parameters input and output Table 3 108 Transport assignment parameters Dir Road Indicates whether the road network is network is directed or not directed AT Acc type Accessibility type of link or the road network at time t Road type Road type of link at time t L VL l cai a nai l Speed Limit Speed limit of link at time 1 l ic saa I O Extracost Extra cost of link at time t Ext l CA The area of one cell K Kappa Multiplication factor to calculate the intrazonal distance for a zone from the area of that zone A Lambda Exponential factor to calculate the intrazonal distance for a zone from the area of that zone K m at time t hour at time t uc C Aversion Aversion cost for mode m av UC gt Zd cost urbanisation class of the origin and the destination zone UC respectively uC C g Fixed cost Fixed cost for a trip to destination A zone zy by means of mode m Cc Additioanal Additional fixed cost for a trip to LOBE fixed cost a destination zone with urbanisation class uc by means of mode m it Number of Number of iterations iterations Fi Fraction of Fraction of traffic allocated in trips to iteration it assign 239 Sensitivity to Sensitivity to congestion for road congestion type rt The sensitivity to congestion for road type 0 special road type must be zero Maximum The maximum slo
155. d Link land use functions to sectors Show advanced settings gt Click the dropdown list in the Corresponding sector column gt Select the corresponding sector from the list next to each land use function If you would like to create a more complex links than only one to one 21 gt Click the Show advanced settings button The table will transform to show a matrix of values between 0 and 1 gt Change the values to specify the function to sector correspondence thereby adhering to the following requirements e All values must be larger than or equal to 0 and smaller than or equal to 1 e The values for each land use function must sum to 1 with 12 digits precision e Each area sector must be linked to exactly one land use function with the value 1 and 0 for all other land use functions e The values for each sector must sum to a value larger than 0 New Metronamica project wizard Link land use functions to sectors Land use function Sector Gre Hou Indu Serv Soci Fore Exte Nature Rec Greenhouses Housing low density Housing high density Industry 0 0 0 0 Services Social cultural uses Forests Extensive pastures Nature Recreation oOo 1 oc e 0 10 SE AE S FE OE You can still specify the matrix for the links via the user interface after the project is set up gt Click the Next button A new wizard dialog window opens to ask you entering initial data
156. d files e Animations animation maps generated during a simulation e Data base maps required to run a simulation and the intermediate output maps for the current simulation year e Legends map legends e Log logged maps generated during a simulation e geoproj the project file of METRONAMICA created for the specific case The project file Randstad geoproj is made for the purpose of demonstration The project file Randstad _exercises geoproj is made for the purpose of exercises For more information about exercises we refer to the document Metronamica_ Introduction Exercise pdf under C Documents and Settings My Documents User Metronamica 2 1 4 MAP COMPARISON KIT directory structure By default the MAP COMPARISON KIT is installed in the directory C Program Files Geonamica By default the additional data for the MAP COMPARISON KIT are installed in C Documents and Settings User My Documents Geonamica MCK There are four sub directories in this folder e Examples examples developed for the MAP COMPARISON KIT e Palettes palettes legends for the MAP COMPARISON KIT 2 1 5 Starting METRONAMICA Once installed you can start the METRONAMICA application as follows gt Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar gt Go to All Programs Geonamica Metronamica gt Click on METRONAMICA Importing the licence file The first time you start METRONAMICA a dialog window will appear asking you to install a licence fil
157. d on the Simulation menu When Pauses is selected the Pause Settings dialog window opens You can use the Run command on the Simulation menu or press the Run button on the toolbar to advance the simulation again until the next pause is reached 55 Pause settings Pauses 2050 Jan 01 Display format O Year Date Date and time Time seconds ox Time milliseconds Display format In the Display format pane of the Pause settings window you can define the display format of pause tabs by clicking the radio button in front of the format that you want to display When you switch the format the list of pauses is displayed accordingly Be aware that the Display format that you defined in the Pause settings dialog window will be used for the integrated time in the system such as the time format in the Log maps on the Options menu and Simulation clock on the toolbar Add You can add a new pause by clicking the Add button on the top right of the Pause Settings dialog window Enter the year in which you want to halt the simulation in the text box next to Time and then press OK The pause at this year will be added to the Pauses list Simulation start time 2000 Jan 01 Simulation end time 2050 Jan 01 Current simulation time 2001 Jan 01 2005 Time Generate You can predefine pause instances by using the
158. d use map of the current simulation year by pressing the Show current land use map button in the Output part Neighbourhood The neighbourhood rules table displays the influence land uses have on each other For example people do not like to live close to an industrial area so industry will have a negative influence on housing that decays as the distance between the two places increases The influence that a certain land use has on another land use or itself is described as a function of the distance between two cells which is represented as a piecewise linear function An example of such a function is shown in the figure below where the points are connected by linear interpolation In this graph the distance runs along the horizontal axis and the vertical axis displays the influence that land use A has on land use B Click the Neighbourhood tab on the Land use change model window to access the neighbourhood rules The top table in this window displays the Intertia convertion effect for vacant land uses This can be altered to change how vacant land uses are allocated which only happens after all land use functions have been allocated 106 Land use change model Land use Commercial Land use type Function l Land use Neighbourhood Accessibility Suitability Zoning Parameters for all land uses Inertiafconversion effect for vacant land uses
159. d values values from the previous time step Transport Regional interaction or land Suitability Accessibility Land use Neighbourho od potential The equations used in the land use model are described in the sub sections of this section Each of the elements in black Neighbourhood potential Accessibility Suitability Zoning Transition potential and Land use is described in a separate the section Input Table 3 3 Input used in the Land use model LUD Cell demand Demands for land use for Number Metronamica SL User each function f of cells defined via GUI Metronamica ML and LUT MBB Regional interaction Zonal accessibility The zonal accessibility at Metronamica ML and SL time for land use function f Metronamica LUT MBB in transport zone z z the Transport transport zone in which cell c 1s located 168 Parameters Table 3 4 Parameters used in the Land use model LU ini Initial land use The initial land use map containing the GUI map land use that occupies each cell Network layer The network layers that consist of nodes Line GUI maps and links of different types representing segment the transport network Lyfe Zoning maps The zoning maps for each land use GUI function prepared in ArcGIS or OVERLAY TOOL Suitability maps The suitability maps for each land use GUI function and land use vacant prepared in integer values from 0 to 10 Maximum Maximum suitabi
160. d with the a parameter The values for suitability and zoning are weighed and summed to give the combined effect of physical and institutional suitability on the land use This is then multiplied with the accessibility to provide a measurement of the heterogeneity of the modelled area If the value of the neighbourhood effect is positive we multiply it with this measure to yield the transition potential If it is negative we subtract this measure from its maximum value and multiply the result of that with the neighbourhood effect to yield the transition potential since the transition potential should decrease with a decrease in the measure of heterogeneity Algorithm The transition potential for land use function f in cell c P is calculated using the following equations Ry 1 e ifa gt 0O t V ix t Rye else t t t t T tp Vireo Spe Fre Are if V 20 oe Vy 2 Spe Zpet Apne ai 187 The transition potential is a multiplication of the neighbourhood potential R the suitability S the zoning Z and the accessibility A If a stochastic perturbation is included two extra factors have to be taken into account a random value drawn from a Weibull 1 distribution e and a parameter that controls the extent of the random effect in the potential a The value of this last parameter must be in the range 0 1 For vacant states the transition is simplified to S f c L Tis
161. data Exogenous mode data Policy measures Variable Extra costs Euro Mode Public transport w Time period AM rush hour period v Origin Destination LMS1 LMS2 LMS3 LMS4 LMS5 LMS6 LMS7 LMS8 LMS9 LMS10 LMS11 LMS12 LMS13 L oo oF o H 88 p oo i 2110 0 910 he Ose a ar lO l O O 2 O O G O O OOG o ea e E amp Q CO O Oo rea S e o amp te D amp sa oa eo oTfrsoc oie oo s o o rea HE BE SE HE Mi SE Zi Fu SE SE ia ie eek SE ee Be ee FME FE M ME AE MEl vis cai ciiolveilqai saioult ola o e 2 O01090 6 Oo ae eid 0O o T amp Mi BE ME ore lio co ls e ea o amp as oi el oi oTrsis clo os o co rea 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n n lw Sore oo re SG eo or a te oo o Select your time period of interest The corresponding values of Extra costs for the selected time period appear in the table Click on your cell of interest in the table Enter a new value for the selected cell Press the OK button on the right bottom of the Exogenous mode data dialog window The Save exogenous extra cost matrix dialog window opens Enter a new name with extension h5 to save the changes under a new name You have adapted the extra costs of the public transport You have now adapted the scenario for the Infrustructure driver in the Policy measures page The active sub scenario at
162. defined for each driver in the Main window The name of the active sub scenario is displayed at the top of the driver see the image below for an example When you hover the mouse cursor over this name a description of the sub scenario will be displayed as well The values that are displayed for the driver are the values that belong to the active sub scenario Whenever you change a value the name of the active 49 sub scenario will change to modified to indicate that the currently displayed value does not belong to any existing sub scenario gt Go to the zoning driver in the Main window gt Change the zoning status for one of the categories The name of the active sub scenario will change to modified Active sub scenario v erae P Main window Plans and categories calnital setup fence Land use type Industry Plan Zoning status 27 35 Ke zone Noise contours Unspecified Gross Ecological M Ecological corridors Weakly restricted L7 Existing natural ar Ecological corridors Strictly restricted 7 Planned natural ar Ecological corridors Weakly restricted 27 20 Ke zone Noise contours Unspecified L7 Green heart Urban expansio Strictly restricted 2 Urbanization ring Urban expansio Actively stimulated LF Inner urban area Urban expansio Allowed iY Outer urban area Urban expansio Allowed iY Outside gross Ecol Ecological corridors Unspecified gt Sleezsssezzz HOOH0H0HHH
163. del until you close the map window and choose to save your change If you choose to save your changes make sure you save them in a new file and do not overwrite an existing file or otherwise the system may not process your changes correctly You can use one of the link properties to present the link colour for the network map To do so select the link property of interest from the dropdown list next to Color master field In other words the categories of the selected property of a link will be used as the colour legend of the network displayed in the map pane Similarly you can use a link properties selected in the Line width master field to present the link width for the network map For maps that display infrastructure elements the Acctype is used by default to display the network map The colour legend and width legend are predefined in the system see the section Network legends You don t need to change them Network legends For Metronamica SL and Metronamica ML the categories of Acctype are used as the legend for all network layers For Metronamica LUT both the categories of Acctype and Road type are used as the legend for all network layers e Ifthe roads network layer is selected the categories of Road type are used as the legend in the legend pane for both the link color and the link width e If one of the other network layers e g station railway ramps and waterways is selected the categories of Acctype are used as
164. dicators Click on the dropdown list in the Environmental group column for the land use of interest Select one of the groups from the list urban forest natural non forest and other gt You need to determine the land use group for each land use for creating the social economic indicators Click on the dropdown list in the Social economic group column for the land use of interest Select one of the groups from the list work residential recreation and other For more information about the indicators see the section Visualising indicators New Metronamica project wizard Enter the basic land use model parameters Map size 650 x 540 rows x columns Cell size 500 meters Initial land use map E RIKS Netherlands_ML Landuse_Maps LU_1989 rst Land use classes Value Class name Colour Type Environmental group Socio economic group 8 Social cultural uses BE marc Urban M Work 9 Forests BE morc Y Forest Other 10 Extensive pastures DF rare Y Natural non f Y Other 11 Nature BE morc Natural non f Other 12 Recreation BE rar Y Natural non f Y Recreational 13 Airports E rect Y Other VY Other 14 Fresh water Feat Other Other 15 Salt water ae ee Other V Other 16 Foreign country Dy reat Y Other Other 17 eek amp amp amp v The number of land use classes is taken from the initial land use map you imported In order to facilitate the scenario
165. division of time periods it 1s probably possible to process this data to use it nonetheless Measured trip intensities on specific segments This will not so much help calibration but it will allow an evaluation of the computed results Some other data can be observed in reality such as parking costs costs per km for gasoline and historical data for mobility growth over time 264 A 265 Appendix A Metronamica release history Version 4 3 0 29 November 201 2 Suitability Tool for deriving suitability maps from base data Improvements to the functionality and user interface of the scenario manager Added support for large raster maps that don t fit entirely in memory Added in the wizard the matrix of land use function to sector correspondence Impassable land uses now form an obstruction when calculating the distance to the nearest infrastructure element Inertia conversion effect for vacant land uses Land use change indicator type added to user defined indicators Clumpiness indicator type added to user defined indicators Legend files can be associated with ancillary maps manually Added functionality to export projects with all associated data maps Added support for GeoTIFF raster file format Map windows are more responsive as the displayed images are rendered in the background Improved error checking less and easier to understand error messages Various performance improvements Version 4 2 2 February 25th
166. down list next to Variable and Time period respectively The corresponding data from zone origin to zone destination are displayed in the table You can edit the data by clicking the cell of interest and entering a new value Man yyw ew lt i The available variables for the public transport are trip distance in km trip duration in hours and extra cost in currency Particularly the trip duration is time lined variable You can add the trip duration for a specific year by using the Add time button The newly added year appears immediately on the dropdown list next to Time with by default values specified for the previous specific year You can specify the values for this specific year For other years the system takes the interpolated values on the basis of the values for the two closest specified years On the other hand allows you to delete the existing time except for the first time and its data from the dropdown list next to Time by using the Remove time button As long as you finish the changes on the variable of interest you press the OK button in the Exogenous mode data dialog window The Save exogenous matrix dialog window opens where you need to give a new file name to save the data for the variable on which you made changes with the extension 5 The symbol represents the name of the variable on which you made changes Press the Save button to save the new data file and close the
167. e system Output is those variables calculated by the respective MBB They can be used as input for other MBB in the system and or displayed as results and indicators in the user interface Internal variables are only used internally in the respective MBB 3 1 MBB Land Use 3 1 1 Description MBB Land use Objective The land use model allocates the changes in demand for land use on the land use map User information Table 3 1 User information in the Land use model Drivers and Links to from other MBB Impacts External Metronamica SL Total demand for land use functions influences Metronamica ML and LUT MBB Regional interaction cell demand for land use functions number of cells Metronamica LUT MBB Transport zonal accessibility Zoning regulations Adaptations to the infrastructure networks Other user Adaptations to the suitability maps for land use functions and land use vacant options Adaptations to the interaction rules Adaptations to the accessibility parameters Policy Land use map indicators Environmental indicators Socio economic indicators Impacts MBB Spatial indicators land use map Metronamica ML and LUT MBB Regional interaction information on physical suitability available space accessibility and spatial configuration Metronamica LUT MBB Transport land use map and information on land use type configuration 165 General information Table 3 2 General information in the Land use model Ty
168. e and jobs t DA o in this zone and is explained by the figure below In this figure urbanization level 2 is the densest area while urbanization level 0 is the most rural area jiobs km inh km Figure 3 9 Urbanization levels 0 1 and 2 increase with the density of jobs and population in a zone Thresholds DL determine the classification for each zone UC min uc DW gt DL Parameters input and output Table 3 96 Parameters 22 Activity weight The relative importance of activity of transport activity activity a for the urbanization level Lower bound per Threshold value for the density for the weighted 1 cell urbanisation class sum transport activities for urbanisation class uc The lower bound of the last lowest urbanisation class must be 0 Table 3 97 Input variables Density of transport activity a in zone z at activity cell Regional activities to time transport zonal activities Local activities to transport zonal activities Table 3 98 Be variables Urbanisation class of zone z at time t Production and attraction Distribution and modal split Transport assignment Table 3 99 Intermediate variables Weighted transport activity of zone z at timet 1 cell Urbanization level 3 4 5 Production and attraction Purpose and use People make trips for different purposes Purposes can be defined by the origin and destination for instance home to work or work to work
169. e classes restrictions can be relieved over time The classes Allowed from tl and Allowed from t2 are especially useful for urban expansion plans Zoning map Industry J Allowed lo Region boundaries amp g Allowed from t1 J O Allowed from t2 je Zoning map Industry E Grid tools Pen Flood Inspect Copy region Copy value Save Grid To edit the zoning map you have just opened gt Open the zoning Map for your land use of interest by selecting this land use and clicking the Show Edit button gt Enlarge the Zoning Map until you can see the individual cells gt Select the Pen or the Flood option to draw the desired zoning plans You can select the category you want to draw by clicking on the radio buttons in front of the legend items gt Close the Zoning Map One message window appears to ask you whether or not to save changes you made gt Press the No button to cancel saving the changes you made gt Press the Yes button to save the changes you made The Save map Zoning map dialog window opens where you can save the changed map under a new name It is strongly recommend entering a new name for the changed map so 80 that you can always find the original map that comes with the software else it will be overwritten Since the manually editing cells are often inaccurate it 1s advisable to prepare your new map in OVERLAY TOOL or in a GIS package before
170. e file name You may have to reset the simulation for the map to be actually loaded and verified in the model It is also possible to edit input maps in METRONAMICA by displaying them and using the Grid tools to change the map see the section Grid tools gt Go to Main window Drivers Parameters Land use Land use tab gt Click the browse button inside the Initial land use map box A dialog will open that allows you to select a different file to import gt Click the Cancel button in the Select initial land use map window gt Click the Show Edit button for the initial land use map A map window will open where you can edit the initial land use map see the section Grid tools The changes you make in a map window will not be stored until you close the map window At that time you will be asked to save your changes If you click the Yes button you can select a file name where you want to store the altered map It is important that you do not overwrite any existing files as it could cause METRONAMICA to malfunction When you have selected a new file name the map will be saved and the new file name will be set in the Initial land use map box 2 2 4 Saving changes The previous section Editing input and displaying output describes how to edit the input in METRONAMICA This section describes how to save changes that you made in METRONAMICA Saving sub scenarios Sub scenarios can be
171. e for METRONAMICA Once a license is installed the software will skip this step unless the installed license has expired gt Click the OK button on the message window A dialog window will open allowing you to navigate to the folder where you put the licence file for METRONAMICA that you have received gt Open the licence file with the extension ic Each time you start METRONAMICA the About window appears see the section About 5 gt Click the OK button on the About window Creating a new project file for Metronamica SL Selecting the project configuration METRONAMICA consists of a dynamic spatial land use change model and can optionally include a regional migration model and a transport model for modelling congestion and traffic pressure on the transport network The availability of the versions depends on the licence file that you are using e Metronamica SL containing only the land use model as a single layer e Metronamica ML containing the land use model and the regional model as multiple layers e Metronamica LUT containing the land use model the regional model and the transport model After you click the OK button on the About window the Open project file dialog window opens You are going to create a new project file Metronamica m Simulation Maps Options Window Help New project Open project 1 E RIKS Randstad geoproj Exit gt Click the Cancel button on the Open
172. e model window 111 Accessibility parameters which describe the influence of certain land uses to be close to elements of the infrastructure network play an important role in the allocation of the land use functions In the Parameters part the system allows you to specify the parameters used for the accessibility maps for each function land use by following Steps gt gt t12 Select the land use of interest in the dropdown list Land use in the control pane Select the check box in front of Land use is build up if the selected land use in the model is contained in the set of urbanised land uses for example residential land use You need to determine whether a land use is build up or not for all land uses Select the check box in front of Land use is impassable if the selected land use is impassable for example water You need to determine whether a land use is impassable or not for all land uses Set the implicit accessibility parameters for each land use function The Implicit accessibility values range from 0 to 1 Enter the Implicit accessibility parameter for the selected land use function on a build up area in the text box next to Implicit accessibility for build up areas Enter the Implicit accessibility parameter for the selected land use function on a non build up area in the text box next to Implicit accessibility for non build up areas The text boxes of Implicit accessibility parameters are only available when one of t
173. e simulation has been initialised see the section Reset or the accessibility has been computed see the section Step Use the Step command to compute the new accessibility maps after the network has been changed or when accessibility parameters have been changed Output map You can view the accessibility map of the selected land use function for the current simulation year by pressing the Show accessibility map button The Accessibility for the selected land use function map window opens Accessibility 1s expressed in the range 0 to 1 and is displayed in colours varying from red to green red meaning low accessibility 0 and green meaning high accessibility 1 All the network layers incorporated in the system are displayed as well in this map window Since the accessibility map is only calculated for function land uses the contents in the Parameters part and the Show accessibility map button in the Output part are not available if the selected land use is vacant or feature Network map window opened via the modeller user interface The user interface of the network map window opened via the policy user interface is different from the one opened via the modeller user interface In this section we focus the one opened via the modeller user interface For the other one we refer to the section Policy measures Infrastructure e You can view and edit the exact network changes for the selected network and for the specific year
174. e the number of zoning states and their names You could not change these via the user interface after setting up the application Once the number of zoning states and their names are set in this step you can also modify their numerical values after setting up the application For more information about how to reset the numerical values see the section Zoning gt You can edit the name of the zoning states and their numerical value by clicking in the cell of interest and entering a new name and or a new value gt You can add a new zoning state and its numerical value in the last empty line gt You can delete a zoning state and its numerical value by selecting the correspondent line and press the Delete key on your key board 12 gt Press the Next button on the Enter the zoning tool parameters dialog window A new dialog window opens to ask you entering the infrastructure networks New Metronamica project wizard Enter the zoning tool parameters Entering the infrastructure networks You can import the infrastructure networks from this step and you can also add or remove any infrastructure networks via the user interface after setting up the project see the section Accessibility for more information New Metronamica project wizard Enter your infrastructure networks To import the infrastructure networks in this step gt Click on the Add button The Add new map dialog window opens
175. e to the local accessibility in the land use model and not to the transport module These links can be introduced with a value 1 You can think of bicycle roads or railway tracks in this case AccType is also an integer value that identifies road types for the land use model as incorporated in the local accessibility Road segments normally have values from 0 upwards The value 1 has a special meaning since these segments are not accounted for when computing the local accessibility This is for example the case for special links Length is a double field expressing the length of a single link in meters Speedlimit is a double field representing the speed limit on a particular link It is expressed as kilometres per hour Capacity is total capacity of a link which is expressed as mode equivalent per hour The mode equivalent is typically cars Besides the speed limit the capacity of a line depends on the number of lanes that are available As a guideline this can be calculated as follows Ciana 3600 Lanes ree l 3 6 CarLength TimeGap ___ Speedlimit Where Lanes number of road lanes in one direction TimeGap time passing between two cars typically 1 5 seconds sec CarLength length of a typical size car m Speedlimit maximum speed on the link km hour 3 6 CarLength time for a typical size car to pass sec Speedlimit Extracost is a field to indicate costs that are intrinsic to travelling a li
176. e toolbar F 94 Menu bar Toolbar Work pane Map Comparison Kit 3 2 MCK log DER File Edit View Options Tools Window Help S A Ss fo E g Land use z J Ntand_use Land use map_2000 rst z 26 Land_use Land use map_2030 rst X f tit 12 E 23 53 EF Land_use Land use map_2000 rst Er Result statistics Per category Other agriculture Sel Other agriculture Te E i roti E Otter es F A E of amp Result statistics Past 3 Seer rap eee lCe E ici g san AART fe Rs s Map 2 C Docum and Settings yshi My Docu Land use map_2030 rst _ Arable land p MLS RE Oh Statistics SS paene i Greenhouses Pi ees ETa Innoneof the maps 38925 Onlyinmapi 1275 ieo i 5 In both maps 453 Onlyinmap2 532 E Housing low density E ofl ee ahatekiak mir e i J Housing high density v Sack eae Algorithm settings Per category tg Arable land _Greenhouses_ _Housing low density_ Housing high densit Cancel Other agriculture a OK Pastures Apply E Other agriculture er ae O in none of the maps E Pastures z i 4 Sa a gate a E in both maps _ Arable land pie es z a 5 Ss otal E orl in map 1 not in map 2 E Greenhouses pare gt a r aa E only in map 2 not in map 1 LC Housing low density v Comparing maps in the MCK First we will analyse how the maps of the Baseline integra
177. e trips for people visiting them 222 Production and attraction step The number of activities population and jobs per zone generates trips The fact that people travelling to a zone creates the trips origin and the fact that people travelling from a zone creates the trips destination The production and attraction model trips travelling to and trips travelling from People make trips for different purposes Trips are divided by trip motivations such as shopping working visiting etc Distribution and model split step People choose the destination close by more often than far away With knowing the trip from the start zone to the destination people will choose the mode of transportation by car by bus or by train The choice of mode is made based on the travel costs They choose cheap modes more often than expensive ones It takes time however for people to change their behaviour and preferences Therefore the existing situation in the previous year will be taken into account Assignment step Trips between zones are made over particular routes There are costs associated to these routes such as the use of fuel travel time travel distance and other factors such as parking costs and tolls People pick the route with the lowest cost By choosing a route people add the intensity of roads and thereby affect the travel speed on these roads The collective response of people to the changing situation is such that in the end nobody 1s
178. eases the execution time considerably Moreover before increasing the resolution of the CA model it is essential to analyse whether this would lead to any better results It would be wrong to decrease the size of the cells beyond the typical physical entities the blocks or plots that are the subject of the location decisions of the spatial agents determining the use of the land Very often also the basic map material will not be available or it will become unreliable at high resolutions and the processes modelled are laden with uncertainty Thus a higher spatial resolution might give a false impression of detail and information but could result is less realistic spatial dynamics The neighbourhood The cell neighbourhood is defined as the circular region around the cell out to a radius of eight cells The neighbourhood thus contains 196 cells see figure 3 1 arranged in 30 discrete distance zones forming concentric circles We indicate the collection of cells that form the neighbourhood of a cell c by D c The distance between cells a and b d a b is given by VX Y where X and Y represent the horizontal and vertical distance between the cells respectively The distances between the cells in each concentric circle and the centre cell in figure 3 1 are listed in table 3 6 Table 3 6 Distances and distance numbers in the cell neighbourhood Concentric circle 1 2 3 f4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Distance in cells 0 1 14
179. ected changes Policy measures Parameters C Show Edt network at ime Zoning maps Zoning maps represent the policy part of the land use model Different locations have different restrictions for particular land uses For any particular area the development of one set of land uses can be allowed while the development of another set of land uses can be prohibited Areas that can be facilitating for one land use like forest reserves for the land use forest can be restrictive for other land use functions like residential or industry amp commerce For this reason there is a specific zoning map for each main land use function incorporated in the system The vacant land uses do not have a specific zoning map since we assume that this kind of land use is allowed everywhere but that there are no areas where it is specifically planned In general vacant land uses are the land uses that appear when agricultural land is abandoned and also the land use that can easily be taken over when socio economic functions expand There are two ways to generate the zoning maps used in METRONAMICA 74 1 Choose the option of using zoning tool when you create a new project file You can use the zoning tool to create the zoning maps via the policy user interface in METRONAMICA after you set up the project file For more information about how to work on the zoning regulation with the zoning tool see the following sub sections whose title is star
180. ed to change the presence or location of the incorporated feature classes Since vacant and function classes are allocated by the model changes in these can not be made explicitly in the system It is recommended to prepare your land use deltas map in a GIS package before you import it into METRONAMICA The land use delta map should only include the information on the land use feature classes For instance if you have a new land use map for 2006 you can extract the location of the land use feature classes in a GIS package into a new land use delta map This new extracted map will be used as one land use delta for 2006 You can use the Add time or Remove time button to add or delete the land use changes When you move the mouse over a land use change on the map file list and click on it this land use change is highlighted with blue background Then press the Show current land use map and selected changes button at the bottom of Input the section and a Land use changes map window opens which is an overlay of the land use map for the current simulation and the selected land use changes Random coefficient The Parameters part is in the middle of the dialog window You can edit and view the general parameters for the land use model here Random coefficient Random seed and Total potential formula These parameters work for all the land uses In this version of software the total potential formula is not editable The random coef
181. ed when the simulation excludes a regional model For the case including a regional model see section Regional activities to transport zonal activities The transport model operates at the scale of transport zones The land use 225 model however operates at the local scale of cell The activities of the land use model are input to the transport model therefore the activities are aggregated Process description The assumption underlying the aggregation is that within a zone land use densities can be considered uniform in space The activity in a transport zone follows from integration over space The transport activity represents the number of cells of that land use on the land use map The list of activities in the transport model consists of activities associated to each land use type of the land use model functions vacants and features Algorithm The transport activities in the transport model include activities associated to the land use functions vacants and features TAct FcUOV OFf The density of transport activity a in transport zone z DA_ is calculated based on the ageregated activities in this zone and the total area of this zone TA c Taz z A LUA a TA DA r c Taz z The land use function transport activity correspondence F4 is calculated l iff a FA a J 0 otherwise Parameters input and output Table 3 93 Activity conversion input variables Description Unit Taz The T
182. edence tab of the zoning tool will be reset to the default values for the categories on the edited zoning plan You will find the categories at the bottom of the table With the zoning tool interpreting zoning plans After you have imported all zoning plans you can interpret them to indicate the effect for each land use function On the Category precedence tab of the zoning tool the interpretation of all zoning plans is displayed in a table The order of the categories in the table indicates the precedence categories at the top overrule lower placed categories You can change the order by selecting a category 1 e a row in the table and clicking the buttons to the left of the table The order is the same for all land use functions The start and end time of each category can be set in the last two columns These settings are the same for all land use functions Double click the browser button inside the cell to change the start or end time The displayed icons indicate the start of the simulation period 4 or the end of the simulation period When the start time of a category is set to 1 1 2010 that category will not influence the land use change model before that date This means that the category first has an effect on zoning on the first day of 2010 which is only considered in the land use allocation on the first day of 2011 The end time indicates the simulation time from which a category no longer has an influence If thi
183. eeeee ees 4 2 1 3 METRONAMICA directory structure cccccccccsssseseeeseeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaas 4 2 1 4 MAP COMPARISON KIT directory Structure cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 HLS Sarn METRONAMICA 5220s4icc inara TEAT T a 5 DEO DOr On Wa VO UU aa E E OEE E 31 DQ Agd Sye LOTMATION ei E E shania tue siamdelnasauraones 32 2 1 8 Closing METRONAMICA ccccccccccccccccecccccaeeeeesessseseeeeeececeeeeeeesaaaaaaas 33 21 9 If YOUCXPEriCNnCe Problems sq eeivei cars either anes 33 Zed IRWIN TS SUN TATIO ossea ued noses ehciehwlcesasatauadsasbereleentsed matadies 35 2 2 1 Project file integrated scenario and SUb SCeMATIO cccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeees 35 22 2 PeninG a Project Hleneiran dnote ate icae eds 36 2 2 3 Editing input and displaying OUtpUL cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 38 DDG SAAN Ae shakes a his chatetgasstataast nic eahietis ls N 49 2 225 R nno asenin Oesia O E laa as wuts cen dl eatues 54 22 0 DAV INO TESTU Sree E a a T 57 22 1 Vools for analysing TeSu ts srera ne EE a E AA A 59 23 POCINIOCI aaedadns onaatete Measanenanees 68 Zou OVERVIEW ofthe policy IMLerlace siere ien i E 68 232 SEn T UPDATS ai ust ees Pa a a N E E GE 70 ZO VASUALISING indicator Snae ea A tla eddie iae cbnadtiutt hag 88 ZS ATIALY SIO DESUINS erer i oaaotee nee aeaeees 94 Ze Modeler mE ACE sucess eet atti ced dpe tuner cb lula taataclhs Sad A cece tenaten cel a tastactti iad 97 2 4 1 Overview of the system diagr
184. ens METRONAMICA comes with nine predefined spatial indicators urban clusters distance from residential to work distance from residential to recreation soil sealing urban expansion forested areas deforested land abandoned land and habitat fragmentation The spatial indicators represent by means of tabs in the Spatial indicators dialog window In general each tab is structured by the Input or and Parameters Output parts displaying from top to bottom You can select your indicator of interest by clicking the corresponding tab on the top of the dialog window The active sector is highlighted with a whiter background 126 Spatial indicators 50il sealing Urban expansion Forested areas Deforested land Abandoned land Habitat fragmentation pe Riodiversity indicator Infrastructure type Is obstacle Intercity stations Vv Average value 68 3315 71 0531 68 1066 69 9634 68 8676 71 4382 The tool pane is located the right top part of the dialog window Two scroll buttons are positioned that enable you to arrange the tabs of the dialog window in an easier way to work when tabs are not all displayed in the Spatial indicator dialog window BO ooo It represents the most left side tab 4 Move tabs to left Move tabs to right B It represents the most right side tab Alternatively for each indicator you can switch the compute option on or off by selecting or unselecting the check the Calculate box on
185. er hour at time t attraction Number of trip destinations for zone za trips hour Production and D 1p purpose p in time period tp per hour at time t attraction Generalised cost per trip to go from the origin E Transport assignment zone Z to the destination zone zz by mode m during time period tp at time t Table 3 106 Distribution and modal split outputs Trip Number of trips between origin zone trips hour Transport distribution z and destination zone z for mode assignment m in time period tp per hour at time t Transport indicators Table 3 107 Distribution and modal split internal variables Description tcp sum _mod Aggregation of the generalized cost over the modes Zo Zd tp tO T Aggregation of trip distribution matrices over the modes KZE hour ODp _ Number of trips between origin zone z and destination zone Z4 for mode trips hatte hour 7o 7d P m per purpose p and time period tp per hour at time t system would be fully inert Number of trips between origin zone z and destination zone zg for mode trips hour m per purpose p and time period tp per hour at time t if the transport system would be fully responsive om Number of trips between origin zone z and destination zone zz for mode trips hour I iZi 24 lp m per purpose p and time period tp per hour at time t if the transport 3 4 7 Transport assignment Purpose and use Trips between zones are made over particul
186. ere the name of the indicator is displayed in the title of the map window Soil sealing z s er H Sealed soil je Soil sealing LayerM anager n Pe Flood Copy region Copy value To visualise choropleth maps in Metronamica ML and Metronamica LUT gt Go to the Socio economic section of the Indicators tab Go to the Regional values part Select the indicator of interest from the dropdown list next to Indicator VV Vv Click on the Show map button next to the indicator of interest The choropleth map window for the selected indicator opens which shows the regional difference of this indicator Normally you could manually adjust the legend for the choropleth map To do so gt Click the Generate class bounds button The Generate class bounds window opens gt Click on the dropdown list next to Order to choose the order of legend entries gt Check the Choose automatically box to fill these values with the lowest and highest values in the map 91 gt If the Find best scale button is clicked the legend editor will iterate over all available scaling methods and select the one with the highest estimated effectiveness Click the OK button Click on the Generate labels button The Generate labels window opens Select the desired format from the dropdown list next to Format Define the number of decimals for the label in the text box next to Decimals If you want to di
187. es You can define the mapping from input values to suitability values as a set of points that are linearly interpolated For categorical maps you can enter the suitability value per category directly 119 gt gt gt Select the land use in the Land use model dialog window from the dropdown list Click the Interpretation tab Click the check box in the row of the newly imported suitability base map to include this map to generate the suitability map for the selected land use Click on the cell in the column of Transformation and in the row of the suitability base map If the suitability base map is a categorical map the Edit transformation dialog window opens Set the suitability weight by entering directly the value per category a Land use model f ox Land use Housing low density Land use type Function Land use Neighbourhood Accessibility Suitability Zoning Factors and base maps Interpretation a os Interpretation of suitability factors Indude Hydrology for nature Elevation Land use function Housing low density Suitability factor Cumulative noise Slope in percentage Combination method Arithmet z Preview suitability map gt If the suitability base map is a numerical map e g slope in percentage map the Transformation for
188. es 224 3 4 3 Local activities to transport zonal activities sossseeeeenensssssseeeeessss 225 SAG UrDanizaton eVe os acicr acsevrcdssncsitotecdun cxaheecdonediecancanassineamatitedeeaareees 221 SA Producionand attrac Hoi ieur si aascssecceaeetaniesckedabaaeavtanipeeiee 228 3 4 6 Distribution and modal split 0000oenennnnnssssseeennnsssssreeresssssssseeressssss 231 DA VEANSDOTMASSIONING en a a ate 233 zA S Transpor Indicators cerise iTe 242 II 3 4 9 Transport annex 1 Bootstrapping distribution cccccceeeeceeeeeeees 248 3 4 10 Transport annex 2 Furness Iteration ccececceccccceeecceeseeeeeeeees 250 4 METRONAMICA DATA REQUIREMENT cccssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssees 253 4 1 Model specication tise ans ectaeade ces nes A 253 4 1 1 Definition of the region modelled eeseessssseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 253 4 1 2 Base years for which data can be collected ce cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeees 253 4 1 3 Resolution of the land use model eeeeeeesessseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeas 254 4 1 4 Length of typical simulation runs 200 00 cccccseseseseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaas 254 4 1 5 Land use types modelled at the local level ccc ccccceeeeeee eens 254 4 1 6 Sectors modelled at the regional level ee eeecccseeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaees 254 4 2 Required data and configuration of Metromamica ccccccccccccsssssseeeeeeeeees 254 4 3 GIS Catastor the land use Modeka
189. essing the importance of good access to an infrastructure element of type s for land use f A positive value indicates that land use f is positively influenced by the nearness of infrastructure of type s and a negative value indicates a negative influence The local accessibility of all link types with negative distance decays is defined LAE Wig TA SES p aral seS In these equation is LA the total negative local accessibility of cell c for land use f at time S the set of all link types that have a negative distance decay parameter for land use f w the relative weight of the proximity to the different networks on the total local accessibility the values of these parameters lie in the range 0 1 LA the local accessibility of cell c to link type s for land use f w the total weight of the local accessibilities with a negative distance decay parameter The total local accessibility of cell c for land use f LA fe 1S calculated 178 1 1 w8 1a 1 w LA se LA ee oo O oo OoOO i te E se In this equation is LA the total negative local accessibility of cell c for land use f w the total weight of the local accessibilities with a negative distance decay parameter S the set of all link types that have a positive distance decay parameter for land use f w the relative weight of the proximity to the different networks on the total local accessibility the values of these para
190. eters Networks Production attraction Distribution modal split Costs Assignment Zonal accessibility Indicators Parameters Kappa multiplier for intra zonal distance Lambda exponent for intra zonal distance f 0 5 Mode dependent costs Transportation mode Car v Aversion costs Euro Timeline parameters UC orig UC dest High Medium Low Costs per km Euro 0 00 0 00 0 00 1989 Jan 0100 00 00 0 08 Add time Delete time 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Costs per hour Euro 1989 Jan 0100 00 00 7 40 Add time Delete time Additional fixed costs Euro Time UC dest High Medium Low 1989 Jan 01 00 00 00 3 40 3 40 3 40 Delete time 2015 Jan 0100 00 00 3 40 3 40 3 40 The dialog window on Cost tab gives the cost parameters that are applied in the trip Assignment step of the transport model The cost parameters include Kappa parameter Lambda parameter aversion costs fixed costs distance costs costs per km time costs costs per hour and additional fixed costs The last 5 cost parameters are used to calculate the generalised cost On the top of the dialog window you can view or edit the Kappa and Lambda parameter in the text boxes Kappa is the multiplication factor to calculate the intrazonal distance for a zone from the area of that zone Lambda 1s the exponential factor to calculate the intrazonal distance for a zone from the area of that zone In the Mode depe
191. etronamica project wizard Enter the basic project parameters After you import the raster region map all the values on this map are listed in the table with the default region names If you do not have a licence which allows you to create a new METRONAMICA project for the specific region you will get an error message If you still want to set up a new project file for this region please contact RIKS for more information see the section If you experience problems New Metronamica project wizard Enter the basic project parameters 2000 E RIKS Randstad_SL Region_Maps Regions asc i Outside of modelling area H Green heart 2 Area outside of green heart You can edit the region name by clicking on the cell of interesting and entering a new name Press the Next button A new wizard dialog window opens to ask you entering the basic land use model parameters Entering the basic land use model parameter The map size and cell size are displayed on the top of this window for your information which are generated from the region map that you imported in the previous step Note that in Metronamica all raster maps such as land use maps region maps suitability maps zoning maps should be strictly comparable they must be of identical map size 1 e cover the same area resolution cell size and origin the lower left x coordinate and the lower left y coordinate New Metronamica project wizard Enter the basic land use
192. etwork changes 2010 Jan 01 Road expansion 2010 2010 Jan 01 New roadin the north 2010 M E RIKS Netherlands_ML DataWe Network changes for layer Roads_network Sel Nodes Node width 7 ee dki i X Hide outside modelling area 9 intercity stations RT i lo Region boundaries io 201 C J Stations Road expansion 2010 C Jj Ordinary roads l C J Ramps C E Waterways C E Airport The title of the network map window indicates the descriptive name of the selected network and the selected year As depicted in the figure above besides the Region boundaries layer there is only one layer Road expansion 2010 visible in the layer manager pane which shows the exact network changes for the selected time in the map pane The legend pane consists of 4 legend tabs which are used for editing the legend of network map The Link color and Link width tab are the most useful tabs For more information about how to edit legend see the section Legend editor For the roads network the categories of road type are used as the legend for other network layers e g station railway waterway ramps the categories of Acctype are used as the legend For more information see the section Network legends The ratio buttons in the legend pane indicate that this network map is editable You can view edit the link properties or add new links on the network map gt Select the net
193. ew project Open project Cirl 0 Save project Save project as Close project 1E RIKS BabyLOV geoproj Exit New project Create a new project file with Section Creating a new METRONAMICA project file for Metronamica SL or section Creating a new project file for Metronamica ML Open project Open a project file stored on a disk Section Opening a project file Save project Save changes to the current project file Section Saving a project Save project as Save a project under a different name Section Saving a project Export project Save a project and all associated data files to Section Exporting a project a new location Close project Close the project o ooo o Recent file list Display the names and the paths of the 4 most recently opened project files If you select one of the 4 files it will be opened Quit METRONAMICA 159 2 5 2 Simulation menu You can use the Simulation menu to control a simulation The commands Update Run Stop and Reset can also be invoked when pressing the respective buttons on the Toolbar Option Function Link Recalculate variables that are affected by changes except Section Update for the initial values and initial maps via the user interface for the current simulation year This command will not change the simulation time Advance the simulation with one time step Section Step Advance the simulation till the next pause moment has Section Run been reached Stop o Stop a
194. f interest from the dropdown list next to Trend Click the graphic icon for the region of interest The corresponding graph window opens There are several ways to enter new figures in the graph window The first way is to drag the bubbles in the graph to the desired value You can also enter the precise values by right clicking on a bubble More bubbles can be added to the graph by double clicking with the mouse in the graph and bubbles can be removed by double clicking with the left mouse button on a bubble gt Remove all points bubbles for which you do not want to provide scenario information Be aware not to remove the bubble for the last year on the graph If you accidently delete the last bubble by double clicking on it press the Cancel button instead of the OK button in the graph window gt Adda point for years you would like to provide scenario information for Once you add a point on the graph for a specific year for a specific variable a point for this year will be added on all the graphs for all variables available on the dropdown list gt Drag the bubble s of the year s you would like to change to the desired location gt Or right click the bubble to enter the exact values for the year of interest gt Press the OK button to save your results and close the graph You have now adapted the scenario for the specific variable in the external factors page The active sub scenario at the top of the driver reflects
195. ficient controls the stochastic perturbation effect to simulate the effect of unpredictable occurrences The system enables you to enter the Random 101 coefficient 1n the Parameters part on the Land use tab The value of this parameter must be not less than 0 According to our experience range of 0 2 is recommended A value of 0 means no random effects You can determine the Random seed to run the simulation e Select the radio button next to Variable to run the simulation in full random mode e Select the radio button next to Fixed to run the simulation in a pseudo random mode You can enter the number of random seed in the text box next to Fixed to Total potential formula The total potential for function states combines the effect of the neighbourhood suitability zoning and accessibility The total potential for vacant states is a function of its suitability and inertia only The default total potential algorithm is displayed in the text box under Total potential formula The model is very sensitive to the total potential algorithms Hence changing them may have drastic effects on the land use change dynamics It is better not to tinker with the total algorithms unless you have gained experience with the model Normally the equation used to compute the total potential in METRONAMICA is fixed However in some situations it may be desirable to use a different formula e g to easily investigate the influence of zoning suitabili
196. for each zone the central node is specified as well as the connector links Normal node Central node Link Connector Zone border Figure 3 10 Zones nodes and links For every zone z there is a special node N_ All links attached to that node should also have the following properties 235 Cae 0 IP 0 AT 1 Assigning trips to road segments The intensity relates to generalized costs Considering that transport participants will try to minimize their own cost it 1s clear that generalized cost also affect intensity The model assumes that all traffic participants will make their route choices in such manner that none of them will be able to reduce costs by selecting an alternate route Such an equilibrium situation is in game theory called a Nash equilibrium The total road length RL inside zone z at time is calculated as follows t t 5 L p 5 L line 1000 p 1000 g ee ee ea f 2 Then the drainage intensity of zone z during time period tp at time 1s caculated t m t m gt OD p mie gt OD Z tp t Z Z ID p L oe QZ Z EN XZ Z 2 max 0 001 RZ where N K l x 9 Taz z cA The model applies a heuristic procedure which iteratively assigns traffic to the transport network and adjusts the link attributes accordingly Each iteration it is associated with a fraction F of all traffic Furthermore the following must also hold z ae it 1
197. g essential input raster maps for running a simulation output raster maps and ancillary maps You can access all these maps via the Maps menu see the section Maps menu for more information For instance you want to compare the initial land use map and the current land use map gt Go to Select map on vertical axis pane gt Regions Regions map Click on the Regions map gt Go to Select map on horizontal axis pane Land use model Land use Initial land use map Click on the Initial land use map wate Main window Analysis Map Comparison Selected map on vertical axis Select map on vertifal axis Select map on horizontal axis Regions Land use model Neighbourhood Suitability 4 Zoning Accessibility Total potential Land use Initial land use map Land use map Target land use Target land use map Indicators Initial land use Initial land use map Soil sealing Soil sealing map Urban expansion Urban expansion map E Regions Regions map Land use model E Neighbourhood H Suitability Zoning Accessibility 4 Total potential Land yee Gauna Target land pse Target lnd use map Indicators Initial landjuse Initial jand use map 5 Soil sealirfe Soil gealing map Urban expansion Urban expansion map a S a Show contingency table Selected map on horizontal axis gt Click on the
198. g Zoning as computed by the land use model Table 2 1 Variables allowed in the user defined formula The following table lists the allowed expressions Expressions with a higher rece Nae will be evaluated before expressions with a lower precedence dence Encapsulation S 1 The expression between brackets 1s fe oe processed before the rest of the equation expression between brackets a einai between brackets Minimum Maximum If else if S gt 0 N S 0 If the first expression evaluates to if N gt 0 1 1f N lt 0 true or something other than 0 1 0 takes the value of the second expression Else take the value of the third expression Note that either the second or third expression 1s evaluated The expression to the left of the caret is raised to the power of the expression to the right of the caret 0 5 2 1 e 0 5 2 The expression to the right of the 2 N minus sign is negated Note that power has higher precedence than negation so the result of the second example is 0 25 IS If the expression to the right of the N gt 0 exclamation mark is 0 this evaluates to 1 Else this evaluates to 0 S Z A Multiplies the expression on the left 2 log N 0 5 A and right side of the asterisk Note that the multiplication sign is explicit meaning the expression 2x is invalid and should be written Power Multiplication as 2 x Division Divides the expression
199. g states and their names are set in this step you can also modify their numerical values after setting up the application For more information about how to reset the numerical values see the section Zoning gt You can edit the name of the zoning states and their numerical value by clicking in the cell of interest and entering a new name and or a new value gt Youcan add a new zoning state and its numerical value in the last empty line gt You can delete a zoning state and its numerical value by selecting the correspondent line and press the Delete key on your key board gt Press the Next button on the Enter the zoning tool parameters dialog window A new dialog window opens to ask you entering the infrastructure networks New Metronamica project wizard Enter the zoning tool parameters Entering the infrastructure networks You can import the infrastructure networks from this step and you can also add or remove any infrastructure networks via the user interface after setting up the project see the section Accessibility for more information 23 New Metronamica project wizard Enter your infrastructure networks To import the infrastructure networks in this step gt Click on the Add button The Add new map dialog window opens gt Enter the name of the infrastructure network in the text box next to Map name gt Click the browse button next to Filename The Open dialog wi
200. g the spatial indicators Except for spatial indicators all environmental indicators and 3 social indicators all the other indicators in METRONAMICA are calculated by default for each year of the simulation The METRONAMICA system allows you to configure which Spatial indicator should be calculated during the simulation via the modeller s user interface For more information see the section Spatial indicator models Note that calculating more indicators may increase the computation time of a simulation 89 s Spatial indicators Urban clusters Distance from residential to work Distance from residential to recreatic gt Go to the Main window Drivers Parameters Spatial indicators Click on the tab of indicator of interest Select the check box next to Calculate to compute this indicator during the simulation Or unselect the check box next to Calculate not to compute this indicator during the simulation If you select the check box next to Calculate for one environmental indicator before you run the simulation the selected environmental indicator will be calculated for each year of the simulation If you select the check box next to Calculate for one environmental indicator during the simulation is running the selected environmental indicator will be calculated from the next year of the simulation Visualising indicators You can visualise indicators at any point in time any year during the simulation To
201. g to a simple transition rule the automaton A conventional cellular automaton consists of e a Euclidean space divided into an array of identical cells For geographical applications a 2 or 3 dimensional array 1s most practical e acell neighbourhood For flow and diffusion processes the 4 Von Neumann neighbourhood or 8 Moore neighbourhood adjacent cells are sufficient but for most socio economic processes larger neighbourhoods are required e a set of discrete cell states e aset of transition rules which determine the state of a cell as a function of the states of cells in the neighbourhood e discrete time steps with all cell states updated simultaneously Until recently Cellular Automata models raised only limited interest in the geographical community despite the fact that Tobler 1979 referred to them as geographical models Originally they were developed to provide a computationally efficient technique for investigating the general nature of dynamical systems Recent applications however have been directed at representing geographical systems more realistically both in terms of the processes modelled and the geographical detail These advances have been accompanied by an increase in the complexity of the 170 models and in the effort to build more realistic models Couclelis 1997 A concise overview of the application of CA models in land use modelling and spatial planning can be found in Engelen et al 1999
202. ght hand side of the window Influence values with a grey background represent interpolated values and cannot be changed Influence values with a white background correspond to bubbles in the graph These values can be edited in the table as well as in the graph The neighbourhood influence rules describe the effect of one land use on another at each distance in the neighbourhood These influences are accumulated to produce the neighbourhood potential in each cell for each land use function Click the Show neighbourhood potential map button to display the neighbourhood potential map for the land use selected in the Land use list at the top of the Land use change model window Accessibility Click the Accessibility tab to access the contents depicted in the figure below 107 Land use model Land use Industry v Land use type Function Land use Neighbourhood Accessibility Suitability Zoning Input Go to infrastructure layers Parameters Land use is built up C Land use is impassable Implicit accessibility for built up areas Implicit accessibility for non built up areas Infrastructure type Distance decay cells Weight The accessibility for each function land use is calculated as a function of the distance to the nearest infrastructure network and the weight of this particular network It represents how easy a location can fulfil its needs for transportation for a particula
203. gncsaneceeteee 190 3 2 1 Description MBB Spatial indicators 20 00 ccceeeeeeeeeccceeeceaeseeeeeeeees 190 322 MISUSE INTC ALON aa da acetate east tai nated wien aar yaaa 194 32 INCISNDOUEROOC IMdicator ges scch rsd ccessare stan ereestucestuatebonedinwesaceieie hee easeseeeks 195 D2 Distance Indicator mra eich enc a A N 196 3 29 Distance to map INGICALON niensenceieseant ie a Ei 197 320 Mask mappiin INCI CalOn cormans a a eeaney as 199 3 2 7 Habitat fragmentation KOV Indicator ccccsssssssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 199 328 Woanid MSS CHAM OS ANG IC ALON sips dated asset A A AN 201 329 Spaa l Meee Indicator siio eea E E encase 201 3 3 MBB Rezionakinteracti olson a a a a 202 3 3 1 Description MBB Regional interaction nnnnnnnennnnnnesssssssssseeeeereeeeeee 202 D ACN V aaa a a a 206 Iko Nitonal Grow opsin ssdeasesandesieugl scdiesbtantiin itemmesendaatiaplaatuasttanaiee tes 207 sae Miaa E ct E E A 208 3 3 5 Attractivity for activity in all sectors 20 0 ccccsssseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 209 20 WROGUCUN I ena A a eeaetani eis 216 Sind Celldemands DEL SCCUOL deea E E AE ades scaees 218 3 3 8 The sector to land use conversion model bIOCK ee eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 219 3 4 IVES Tat U0 ose bere tceaasazccuepereeasan cs esau bones causa cestenttesuiacce me aeunanen a eteee 221 244 Descriphom MBB Trams port 25 35 05 s tssoeh oneness A ental 221 3 4 2 Regional activities to transport zonal activities cceeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeee
204. go from Transport the origin zone z to the destination assignment zone zy by mode m during time period p at time t Table 3 113 Output variables Generalised Generalised cost per trip to generally go MBB Regional from the origin region r to the destination interaction region r4 at time t Generalised Generalised cost per trip to generally go Zonal accessibility cost from the origin zone z to the destination zone Z at time t Table 3 114 Intermediate variables Description EZR The fraction of the area of zone z included in region r t pReg m Number of trips between region r and rg by means of mode m during time period wP tpat time t Reg m Cost of trip between region r and rz by means of mode m during time period tp at time Surrogate number of trips between region r and rz by means of mode m during trip time period tp at time t for when there are no trips conducted between region r and r4 by all modes during a whole day Reg Surrogate number of costs of trips between region r and rg by means of mode m trip aP during time period tp at time t for when there are no trips conducted between region r and r4 by all modes during a whole day Tat tp Zonal accessibility Zonal accessibility for an activity in the transport model expresses how well that activity can be reached from and within a zone For instance a high accessibility of population means that many people are found within small dista
205. gory precedence tab in the zoning tool while the Preview zoning map window is open The map will be updated interactively as you make changes to the settings This way you can immediately observe the influence of your changes on the zoning map Note though that the system needs to recalculate the zoning map after every change you make in the Category precedence tab so the system may become somewhat slower to respond You can close the Preview zoning map window at any time and open it again later It is not possible to preview zoning maps for multiple land uses at the same time As soon as you change the selected Land use type in the Category precedence tab the Preview zoning map window will be closed automatically For more information about working with a map window see the section Map window Without the zoning tool importing all zoning maps at once generated by OVERLAY TOOL It is important to keep the default names of the zoning maps which are assigned by the OVERLAY TOOL You can import all zoning maps at once by selecting as location the folder where you just stored all zoning maps generated by OVERLAY TOOL gt Go to the Drivers tab in the Main window and click the Policy measures icon in the navigation pane gt Select Zoning from the dropdown list next to Driver gt Click the Import from Overlay Tool button The Import Overlay Tool maps dialog window opens gt Click the
206. graph by double clicking on a location in the white part of the graph gt You can remove points by double clicking on the point you want to remove gt Youcan move a point by dragging it You cannot move a point beyond its left or right neighbour gt You can precisely edit the value of a point by right clicking on it This will open a dialog where you can enter exact values gt Youcan change the display range of the graph by clicking the Options button Single value Single values in METRONAMICA are displayed in text boxes Normally the displayed value is rounded However when you click on the text box the exact value will be displayed You can change the value directly in the text box press the Tab key to commit your change gt Go to Main window Drivers Parameters Land use Land use tab Parameters part gt Move the mouse point on the text box next to Random coefficient that you want to edit The text box becomes editable gt Enter anew numerical value in the editable text box Parameters Random coefficient Text box D f D D D B E D D D Total potential formula Vacants TP S ee Time series Some time series are displayed as graphs in Metronamica Others for example time series of maps are displayed as a list of time value pairs in a table In this case you can add or remove values for specific times in the time series by clicking the Add time o
207. gs window Animate maps on the Options menu will now be checked to indicate that maps are animated when you run a simulation gt Click the Reset button on the toolbar When the simulation is reset click the Run button to run the simulation till the end year gt The animated GIF files are stored in the folder you have selected You can view them with any descent browser or image viewer Note that the simulation time is printed in the top left corner of the image gt To turn map animations off click Animate maps on the Options menu again Then deselect all Maps to animate and click the OK button You will see that Animate maps on the Options menu is no longer checked 2 2 Tools for analysing results The METRONAMICA system provides you several tools to analysis your results They are Contingency table tool Monte Carlo tool and Map comparison tool Contingency table tool You can use the Contingency table tool to produce a contingency table of two selected maps from the system Contingency table details the cross distribution of categories on the two maps The table is expressed in number of cells You can access the Contingency table tool from METRONAMICA as follows gt Go to Main window Analysis gt Contingency table 59 Two trees of maps display in the content pane on the right side of the Main window Maps displayed on the trees of maps at here are raster maps in the system includin
208. gt Click on one of the boxes just below the gradient bar to select it The dropdown list under Edit colour will display the colour of the selected box You can change the colour of the selected box using the dropdown list under Edit colour You can add extra boxes by clicking anywhere on the gradient bar You can delete an intermediate box by right clicking on it and selecting Delete from the context menu Press the OK button update the colours in the legend editor Generate colours Predefined Top 46 Bottom Edit colour LPP Pee meet ier 1 Lio JL Other Edit width of links or nodes for network layers You can edit the width of links or nodes for the network layer map The road network map is used as an example of working with legend editor for the network layer map gt gt gt Go to Drivers Policy measures Drivers Infrastructure Click the Roads network from the dropdown list next to Network Click the Show Edit network at time button and select the year of interest and click OK button The roads network for the selected year appears in the opened map window Click on the Link width tab in the legend pane Click on one of the classes to open the Legend editor dialog window Click on the cell in the Width column for the class of interest to open the Choose line width dialog window Click on the up down spin buttons to select the line width of interest for
209. gt Click the Start writing button Metronamica will open a new Excel workbook in the background gt Take one or more simulation steps by clicking the Step button on the toolbar gt Click Write to Excel on the Options menu again gt Click the Open Excel workbook button The Excel workbook that Metronamica has written the model results to will open Model results are written to Excel in a format that is suitable for making pivot tables This way you can easily arrange the values in Excel in the way you want to present them For more information advice the Excel help function Log maps Click Log maps on the Options menu to save maps that are calculated by METRONAMICA to disk for further analysis The logged maps are automatically added to a log file that can be opened with the MAP COMPARISON KIT see the section Analysing results The maps themselves are saved in subfolders of the log file You can store the maps for different simulation runs in different subfolders This way you can easily log the maps for different scenarios and then compare the scenario results in the Map Comparison Kit Note that network maps can be logged but are not added to the MCK log file and cannot be displayed in the MCK gt Make sure the Baseline integrated scenario is active by selecting it from the Integrated scenario list on the toolbar gt Click Log maps on the Options menu The Log settings wi
210. gt Enter the name of the infrastructure network in the text box next to Map name gt Click the browse button next to Filename The Open dialog window opens Navigate the infrastructure network map stored that you want to import and double click on it Note that the infrastructure network should be in shp or bin format and contain a field named Acctype For the network shape file in point format you need to convert it to polyline format before you import it as an infrastructure layer gt Press the OK button in the Add new map dialog window The newly added infrastructure network appears on the list 13 New Metronamica project wizard Enter your infrastructure networks Add new map Map name Transport network Filename RIKS Randstad_SL Network_Maps Netwo E7 If you have multiple network layers e g roads network railway network or stations repeat the steps above to add more layers to the list New Metronamica project wizard Enter your infrastructure networks Stations E RIKS Randstad_SL Network_Maps Stations shp Transport network E RIKS Randstad_SL Network_Maps Network shp gt Select one of the infrastructure networks The Edit button and Remove button on the right side of the window become available gt You can edit the map name and change the file via Edit button and you can delete the selected map by clicking t
211. h of the land use land cover categories For the structure of the model it is necessary to have the following order vacant states functions features Within these categories the order does not matter Finally the model cannot handle no data values Therefore no data should be classified as a separate feature land use for example out of modelling area It is easiest to make it the last feature class 4 3 2 D2 Base maps required for suitability calculation Suitability maps could be generated with the suitability tool inside of METRONAMICA or with external tools outside of Metronamcia A digital elevation model DEM on a grid is required as a base map for the calculation of suitability maps Beside the elevation map other maps that would be useful are e Slope map e Aspect map e Soil quality map e Natural hazards map fire flood landslide etc e Air noise water soil pollution map e Aquifers and salinisation e Other maps that may be relevant to your opinion 255 In the order of priority the following maps are wanted for the calculation of the suitability 6 DEM map 7 Slope map can be calculated from the DEM 8 Aspect map can be calculated from the DEM 9 Soil quality map or Geomorphologic map 10 Natural hazards map fire flood landslide etc 11 Pollution maps 12 Other maps Values in the DEM map and the slope map must be floating values You can import suitability base maps in the suitab
212. hbourhood effect accessibility suitability zoning and a stochastic factor gt Click the OK button to confirm the changes you made For more information about how to composite a user defined formula see the following sub section Functional form If the formula is not composited correctly a message will appear to indicate the error Functional form The syntax of the user defined formula is checked when you click the OK button in the Total potential formula dialog window The equation must start with TP The right hand side can contain decimal numbers the variables listed in table 2 1 and the expressions listed in table 2 2 Note that the variable names are case insensitive so no distinction is made between small and capital letters year Simulation year The year in the simulation for which the total potential is computed random Stochastic factor A random variable drawn from a Uniform 0 1 distribution for each cell and for each land use function The range of this variable is 0 1 When random is used multiple times in a formula each is independent alpha Random coefficient Random coefficient as entered in the Land use model window This value cannot be negative IN Neighbourhood effect Neighbourhood effect as computed by the land use model LA Accessibility Accessibility as computed by the land use model 1S Suitability Suitability as computed by the land use model 103 Description Zonin
213. he Inspect tool see the section Grid tools Double clicking on the map pane of the Land use map window this does not work for other map windows opens the Contingency table Land use map and Regions map window that shows the surface area of each land use in each region see the image below You can select the unit for the surface area from the Display values in list If you select the Include cells outside modelling area checkbox the land use outside the modelling area will be displayed in the first column Otherwise these values will be zero The last row and column in the table display the totals Land use map a Other agriculture Pastures E cropland A i3 pa fo i Fi Pai 7 E Cia IREEN Ay ky ie i FUE ff fe eS f thee x Network layer Waterways BJ Housing low density aay k 7 ca ee i ee x Network layer Stations B Housing hich density Contingency table Land use map and Regions map x Network layer Roads_network E industry it e po Network layer Ramps EREA Display values in cels _ Indude cells outside modelling area a x dis X Hide outside modelling area lo Region boundaries E Social cultural uses Oost Gronin Delfzijl e o Overig Groni Noord Fi je Land use map Pastures 315 305 ae Cropland 436 Greenhouses Extensive pastures 0 Zoom tools 73 2 30 Housing low Housing high Industry Services Social cultur Named viewports eo oc ae o
214. he Remove button gt Click the Next button on the button The Configure accessibility settings dialog window opens where the values of Acctype in all the networks that you imported are listed in the table 14 New Metronamica project wizard Configure accessibility settings Please enter names for the accessibility values that were found in the networks you entered O Motorway 1 Dual carriageway 2 Local road 3 Main station gt You need to enter the accessibility type name for each value in the text boxes of Accessibility type name column gt Click the Next button at the bottom A new dialog window opens asking you to fill in the name and the path for the new project file Finalizing the setup of project This is the last step of the new project wizard gt Specify the name of your project in the Project name box gt Specify the location where it should be stored Metronamica will automatically create a new sub folder with your project name in the folder selected by you All the data you have imported in the new project wizard will be copied there You can select any location on a hard dist USB stick or network drive gt You can selecte the Support large maps check box if you want to create a project that contains large maps For projects where the option Support large maps is enabled METRONAMICA will cache map data on the hard disk causing it to run slower Therefore t
215. he land use functions in the model is currently selected on the dropdown list Specify the distance decay and weight parameters per land use function The parameter table allows you to set the Distance decay for the effect of each Infrastructure type of the network on the selected land use function and it s Weight The distance decay is the number of cells after which the effect 1s halved for positive decays or doubled for negative decays The weight determines the relative importance of the infrastructure element for the particular land use function The distance decay can be positive for example industries like to be near highways or negative for example natural areas are preferably not located close to highways With positive decays this is then the maximum value and with negative decays the minimum value To turn off the accessibility effect of a specific land use function you can set its weight to Zero and use model Land use Industry _ Land use type Function Land use Neighbourhood Accessibility Suitability Zoning L Input Go to infrastructure layers Parameters Land use is built up C Land use is impassable Implicit accessibility for built up areas Implicit accessibility for non built up areas Infrastructure type Distance decay cells Weight 0 0 0 6 0 8 0 4 In order to visualize the accessibility map of a function land use it is imperative that th
216. he option is not advised unless you experience problems without it The new project wizard will automatically select the check box if the expected memory usage based on the information you have entered exceeds a certain threshold If the check box 1s automatically selected and you clear it there is a risk that METRONAMICA may crash while using the new project If you select the check box you may want to change the cache folder for map data see section Raster map cache folder gt Click the Finish button when you are ready to save your new project to the specified location Your new project will be opened automatically 15 New Metronamica project wizard Almost done Project name Randstad Select the directory where you want to save your new project in C Documents and Settings yshi My Documents Geonamica Metronamica Support large maps slower but enables the use of large maps The METRONAMICA will be started and you will see the METRONAMICA application window on your screen where is the project name that you entered in the last step After the project is set up all the maps that are used during setting up the project file will be copied in folder Data Creating a new project file for Metronamica ML Selecting the project configuration METRONAMICA consists of a dynamic spatial land use change model and can optionally include a regional migration model and a transport model for modelling
217. he parameters of the regional interaction model for the selected sector via the parameters table in the Parameters group You can open the Function sector correspondence dialog window by clicking the Function sector correspondence button on the right hand side of the Parameters group It shows the relationship between sectors and land use functions Function sector correspondence Input Function sector correspondence Output Inverse correspondence Region Oost Groningen On the top of the Function sector correspondence dialog window it features a default input table Function sector correspondence table which represents the land use functions of the land use model in the rows and the sectors in the columns in which we specify the extent to which each land use function contributes to each sector The ratio coefficients in the Function sector correspondence table are used to convert the cell counts for each function at the local level to the cell counts for each sector at the regional level By means of clicking on the cells of table you can adjust the ratio coefficient between the land use functions and the sectors Note that the values can be fractional between 0 and 1 but each function totals should add up to exactly 1 Once you made changes on the ratio coefficients the Apply button and the Reset button under the Function sector correspondence table become active You can apply changes that
218. he same tab can differ per land use type The content pane is structured by Land use tab Neighbourhood tab Accessibility tab Suitability tab and Zoning tab Most of the contents in the content pane are related to the selected land use in the control pane except that the Input and Parameters parts on the Land use tab Neighbourhood tab and Zoning tab are for all the land uses Land use Click the Land use tab to access the contents depicted as the figure above Initial land use map 100 The Input part is on the top of the Land use tab The system allows you to view or edit the initial land use map here You can change the initial land use map by clicking on the browse button next to Initial land use map and selecting the file that you want to import A map window of Initial land use map opens after pressing the Show Edit button on the left side of the text box You can view or edit the initial land use map via the map window Initial land use map a DEAR E Other EAA J Pastures J E Cropland ae E R J FA Greenhouses Ni W iy EN 3 sF i e Initial land use map C JJ Housing low density att ee as C JB Housing hich density C E industry C J Services E E Social cultural uses C E Forests x Hide outside modelling area lo Region boundaries Zoom tools Named viewports Land use change Land use changes after the start year of the simulation can be incorporated as land use deltas These can be us
219. he simulation 144 Regional interaction model f v Sector type Econ h sector Derive initial cell counts and densities Go to regional distances Parameters Inertia in relocating of activity Distance decay for activity migration Distance decay for job potential Distance decay for population potential Distance decay for activity potential Exponent activity Evnanont irmminrstnn omiorstian ratin Cell demand Density job Crowding Available sp 67 187 104 B 30 181 1 417 378 amre ame Output All outputs in the regional interaction model are displayed in the Output group of the Regional interaction model dialog window which is indicated with the green frame in the figure above All outputs are updated automatically during the simulation e First of all the table shows the outputs for the selected sector per region for the current simulation year You can adjust the view of the table by moving the scroll bar and slider bar in a vertical or horizontal orientation Regional migration output Sector STAN v Sector type Migration jobs From To Oost Gronin Delfzijl e o Overig Groni Noord riesl Zuid Oost Gronin Delfzijl e o Noord Friesl Zuidwest Fri Sieiegiegieieg ie eg igieiseie g ieife e Seieigigigegiegisgigigiegigqoiegisecicie s Seieiegiqgieigigigigqgi igi oqaisesi cic is es amp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
220. he system diagram The Regional interaction model dialog window opens The Regional interaction model dialog window is structured so that the Input Parameters and Output parts are displayed from top to bottom Regional interaction model SE Sector TET Sector type Economic sector ital value obs Conop Region Initial activity jobs Oost Groningen 12536 Delfzijl 0 5433 Overig Groningen 30886 Noord Friesland 26043 4 t gt t rran Go to regional distances Go to total activity Parameters Inertia in relocating of activity Function sector correspondence Distance decay for activity migration Distance decay for job potential Distance decay for population potential Distance decay for activity potential Exponent activity Exponent immigration emigration ratio Exponent population potential Region Cell demand Density job Crowding Available sp Oost Groningen 67 187 104 3326 Delfzijl 0 30 181 1 1065 Overig Groningen 74 417 378 4902 Noord Friesland 61 426 934 6541 Zuidwest riesland 17 444 706 2418 v lt gt Cell demands per land use function Sectors In the control pane of the Regional interaction model dialog window you can select the land use function on the dropdown list next to Sector The sector type of the selected land use function 1s displayed on the right top of the dialog window The sector types in METRONAMICA could be Economic Population and Are
221. he top of the Suitability tab This maximum suitability value should be the highest value on any suitability map in the METRONAMICA system In general if the suitability map is created in OVERLAY TOOL with a maximum suitability value of 10 it can be used directly in the METRONAMICA system by setting the value for maximum suitability as 10 The path of the suitability map file for the function land use for the first date is displayed by default when you open the system The system allows you to add or delete the suitability map for a selected land use at a specific time by clicking on the Add and Delete button You can view or edit the suitability map for the selected vacant or function land use and for the selected time by clicking on the Show Edit button at the bottom of the Suitability tab With the opened Suitability map window it is possible to change the suitability value of individual cells A higher value indicates a higher suitability Suitability is displayed in the map in colours varying from red to green representing values between 0 not suitable and 10 perfectly suitable Before you add the suitability map to the system you have to ensure that the values on the map are integer values Zoning The zoning or institutional suitability is characterized by one map for each land use function It is a composite measure based planning documents available from the national or regional planning authorities and can contains informat
222. he user interface of each individual model components 2 4 5 Individual model components Land use model To access the modeller user interface for the Land use model gt Goto the Drivers tab of the Main window gt Click the Parameters icon in the navigation pane on the left side of the window The system diagram is displayed in the content pane on the right side of the window gt Click the Land use MBB box at the Local level in the system diagram The Land use model dialog window opens Land use classes Land use is classified in categories some of which are modelled dynamically while others remain static Dynamic land uses are called Functions or Vacant land uses e Vacant states are classes that are only changing as a result of other land use dynamics Computationally at least one vacant state is required Typically abandoned land or natural land use types are modelled as vacant state since they are literally vacant for other land uses or the result of the disappearance of other land use functions 99 e Functions are land use classes that are actively modelled like residential or industry Functions change dynamically as the result of the local and the regional dynamics The non dynamic land uses are called Features Features are land use classes that are not supposed to change in the simulation like water bodies or airports However they do influence the dynamics of the Function land uses and thus influence their l
223. hort overview of the MCK The MCK looks as depicted below The MAP COMPARISON KIT application window consists of the Menu bar the Toolbar and the Work pane You can simultaneously open different windows for maps and statistics Furthermore it is possible to keep the Comparison Settings dialog window opened while working with the tool e The Zst Map window contains the first map to compare analyse You can open it by clicking the 1 icon on the toolbar The list next to the toolbar displays which map is selected You can select a different map from the dropdown list and the map displayed in the Ist map window as well as the result map and results statistics will be updated immediately e The 2nd Map window contains the second map to compare analyse It works the same way as the Ist map window e The Result map window contains the result map It can be opened by clicking the 1 2 icon on the toolbar 2 This map shows the spatial result of the last performed map comparison Depending on the selected comparison method the results are presented in a continuous scale or a nominal scale e The Result statistics window contains the numerical non spatial results of the last performed map comparison It can be opened by clicking the table icon on the toolbar e The Comparison settings dialog window allows you to change the settings of the current comparison algorithm It can be opened by clicking the button on th
224. i e tether aie AR 254 Al TDI Tsai WSS MapSereresirrii nai e 255 4 3 2 D2 Base maps required for suitability calculation eee 255 4 3 3 D3 Suitability maps generated with external tool eee 256 4 3 4 D4 Base maps required for zoning calculation ccccccccceeeeeeeeeees 256 4 3 5 D5 Zoning maps generated with external tools cece cc eee esse eee 257 ADO WIG INGCEWOLKS gurs A neuen vtacl denature ee 258 Ao WT BOrders Ob FEC1OM Goss i ea E ides aghncoiani ou sase hs 258 4 4 Census and other statistical data for the regional model cc eeeeeeeeeeeeee 258 AA IOS POPUlAUON diarii e a TT 259 AAD DEMIO MEN na cae 259 4 5 Additional data for the transport model ccccccccccccccsesseeeeeeceeeeceaeeeeeeeeeees 259 AST DECISION OR ISS UD aranna shin a A a a 259 4 5 2 Overview data for the transport model cc eeeccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 261 45 D10 Transportzone ina Pe AAN 261 ASA D1IlRoads network Maps eis cha cic cedadceshadestiewacsianatacoaseaedaisestedaseskscaieees 261 4 5 5 D12 Roads network changes maps ccccceeeesssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeas 263 4 5 6 D13 initial trip distribution for car transport and for public transport 263 4 5 7 D14 Other data for public transport c cc ceecceeccccceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 263 4 5 8 D15 Data for calibrating the transport model ccccccceeeeeeeee eens 264 APPENDIX A METRONAMICA RELEASE HISTORY ccccssss
225. icators including the choropleth maps e Transport indicator Some of these indicators describe a state or a condition and others show a change over time The first set of indicators for the start year is already available when starting up the simulation for the second set the simulation requires a step first otherwise no change can be calculated While the Forested areas shows both the condition and the change Indicators describe a state or a condition e Soil sealing e Forested areas category Forest e Habitat fragmentation e Urban clusters e Distance from residential to work e Distance from residential to recreation e Population e Jobs e Transport indicators Indicators show a change over time e Expansion of urban areas e Abandoned land e Forested areas category Deforestation e Forested areas category Afforestation As mentioned earlier to view the maps of the indicators which show a change over time you should first press the Step button or the Run button on the toolbar e In the start year of the simulation the maps of the indicators which show a change over time are displayed as blank e If the calculations for these indicators are disabled the maps of the indicators which show a change over time are displayed as blank e If the calculations for these indicators are disabled the maps of the indicators which show a state or a condition are displayed as the maps calculated from the last time Calculatin
226. iesl 83 3179500 68 7408868 47 6973041 23 1918979 35 5720179 33 7655685 59 6433720 88 3641919 65 1607545 78 5911076 For Metronamica LUT this action opens the Indicator tab in the Transport model dialog window In this case the system takes the output interregional costs in the transport model as input regional distances for the regional model Therefore they are not editable Total activity You can access the total activity per economic and population sector by clicking the Go to total activity button in the Input part The Total activity input dialog window opens where you can view and edit the number of jobs and people for each socio economic sector Using the Add time button to edit the time series that you want to display in the table The system takes the interpolated values between the two closest years as the values for the newly added years Using the Remove time button you can remove the time series from the table 142 Total activity input 1989 Jan 01 2030 Jan 01 9598589 8 9598589 8 5205184 81 5205184 81 1389531 1389531 2143534 2143534 1663490 1663490 Change made on the total activity in the regional interaction model reflects directly to the regional trend under the External factor the section For more information see the section How to adapt values for external factors Parameters and function sector correspondence You can enter or edit t
227. ieve this effect in our distance determining algorithm we say that a segment of the network is not reachable from a cell occupied by an impassable land use 177 However while some land uses are impassable for activity generated by other land uses they are passable for activity generated by its own land use think for example of a military land use Therefore when a land use is impassable the explicit accessibility for the same land use is equal to the implicit accessibility while the explicit accessibility for other land uses is 0 Total accessibility These four types of accessibility are combined in a single value in the range 0 1 for each land use and each cell expressing the effect that the transportation network has on the possible future occurrence of that land use in that cell If the cell is currently occupied by an impassable land use the total accessibility is equal to the explicit accessibility Otherwise the total accessibility equals the product of the zonal accessibility the local accessibility and the implicit accessibility Algorithm The local accessibility of cell c to link type s for land use f LA ye 18 calculated a f ifa gt 0 D ceta p i LA se 30 ifa 0 a f otherwise D cetla y In this equation D is the distance in cells between cell c and the nearest cell that is covered by a link type s at time and a the accessibility distance decay parameter expr
228. ifies the effect that planning and legislation has on the possible future occurrence of each land use function on a certain location Process description The zoning maps specify for each cell and for each land use the moment from which the specific land use is allowed in that cell One of four moments can be chosen the start year of the simulation the first planning period and the second planning period and never The start of the first and second planning period can be specified per zoning map hence per land use If a land use is allowed in a cell the zoning for that land use and cell is 1 If it 1s not allowed and also not allowed from the next planning period onwards the zoning will equal 0 If it is not allowed right now but it is allowed from the next planning period onwards then the value of the zoning will be equal to the fraction of the time from the current planning period to the next that has passed raised to the power of the inverse of the zoning anticipation parameter Hence with the zoning anticipation parameter equal to 1 the zoning will linearly increase from 0 at the start of the last planning period where the land use is not allowed to 1 at the start of the first planning period from which onwards the land use is allowed A higher value for the zoning anticipation parameter will yield a steeper rise of the zoning at the beginning of this phase 182 0 1 Figure 3 5 Increase of zoning from the start of the last dis
229. ility appropriately the aggregated accessibility is divided by the number of cells that belongs to the corresponding sector in a particular region Algorithm The function which determines the value of the output variable looks as follows Fer l Ay tA ea O ki J F feLUp Here LU is the set of all function land uses C is the set of all cells c in region 1 Parameters input and output Table 3 74 Input variables used in the accessibility conversion model block Function The fraction of land use The sector to land use sector function f that contributes to conversion model block correspondence sector k F Fk tN Cell demands The cell demand of land use Number The sector to land use Ja function f in region i at time t ofcells conversion model block 215 tA The accessibility effect of land Accessibility model block fie use function fin cell c at time t t Land use map The current land use map the MBB Land Use f c MI land use that occupies cell c at time Table 3 75 Output variables given by the accessibility conversion model block GUI tA Average The average accessibility Attractivity for activity in all i accessibility effect of sector k in region i at sectors model block time t 3 3 6 Productivity The levels of activity form a restriction on the cell allocation in the CA model To be more precise the demand for activity can be converted to a number of cells that needs t
230. ility tool and directly generate suitability maps inside of Metronamica The suitability base maps used in the suitability tool could be categorical maps and or numeric maps If you want to create the suitability maps in OVERLAY TOOL the base maps mentioned above should be reclassified as categorical maps The weights will be given for each category of each available base map 4 3 3 D3 Suitability maps generated with external tool It is required one suitability map for each land use vacant and land use function covering both the calibration period between Base year and Base year2 and the simulation period beyond Base year2 at the same resolution as the land use maps Suitability maps could be generated with the suitability tool inside of Metronamica You can also generate these maps outside of METRONAMICA with external tools e g with the OVERLAY TOOL or GIS software before you introduce them in the system Sutiability values in the file generated with external tools must be non negative integers in the range of 0 not suitable to maximum suitability value perfectly suitable The OVERLAY TOOL is developed by RIKS to generate the suitability maps outside of METRONAMICA on the basis of the suitability base maps available The weights that are given to the individual map layers in the OVERLAY TOOL will be estimated as part of the calibration of the model The maps required for the calculation of the suitability are mentioned in section
231. in METRONAMICA see the section Network legends GEONAMICA A Value for first accessibility subtype must equal 0 The output of the Assignment step is the Generalised costs Trip distance and Trip duration per trip to go from the origin zone to the destination zone per time period and per mode which allocates on the lower Output part of the dialog window You can select your output variable time period and mode of interest from the Variable dropdown list Time period dropdown list and Mode dropdown list respectively The corresponding output for the selected variable for the selected time period and for the selected mode is displayed in the table at bottom of the dialog window You can export the values for these variables from departure transport zones to arrival zones by using the function of Write to Excel For more information see the section 156 Write to Excel Particularly the generalized costs between regions could be written as well to Excel which will be used as interregional distances in the regional model Zonal accessibility Zonal accessibility for a zone in the transport model is calculated on the basis of generalized cost from that zone to another and activities in that zone which expresses the degree to which each activity type can be reached The zonal accessibility will be used to calculate the accessibility in the land use model On the top of the dialog window you can view and edit the Minimum zonal
232. in the model because they are can be an attraction or repulsion for certain land use functions and are as such included in the Neighbourhood potential Note Zoning maps can be produced in METRONAMICA with the zoning tool or produced with the OVERLAY TOOL or with another GIS tool Suitability maps for land use function and land use vacant can be constructed in METRONAMICA with the suitability tool or produced with the OVERLAY TOOL or with another GIS tool Maps generated with the OVERLAY TOOL can be adapted in METRONAMICA If you would like to have more information about the OVERLAY TOOL please contact RIKS Assumptions e The model is developed on the assumption that all actors land use functions are in competition for space with one another Actors are in search for 167 interesting locations and can occupy those when they have the financial power to do so Constraints e It is not possible to allocate more cells than there are available in the model area of the map e Land use demands are determined exogenously Equation rules or algorithm The following figure explains the relations between the different components of the land use model and its relation to the other models incorporated in METRONAMICA Elements in black are included in the land use model elements in grey represent other components of the METRONAMICA system The arrows show the flows of information black arrows represent current values and dashed arrows lagge
233. ion Functions Features E O0 O0 H E a SES ES la Figure 3 2 For the calculation of the neighbourhood effect a circular neighbourhood consisting of 196 cells is applied left For each land use function the transition rule is a weighted sum of distance functions calculated relative to all other land use functions and features right ie i Repulsion In general cells that are more distant in the neighbourhood will have a smaller effect Thus each cell in a neighbourhood will receive a weight according to its state and its distance from the central cell e the neighbourhood effect is calculated as 2 rine alee c eD c with Ry e The neighbourhood effect in cell c for land use f at time t d c The land use occupied by cell c at time t d ab The Euclidian distance between cell a and cell b see table 3 6 wy phd The influence function expressing the strength of the influence of a cell with land use f on land use f for each distance d in the CA neighbourhood An example of an influence function for the influence of one land use on another land use is shown in figure 3 3 At every distance in the CA neighbourhood the influence function has a value that can be changed Hence in total the influence function is determined by 30 points This has the advantage of enabling the definition of very complex functions However its disadvantage is the large number of parameters that needs to be defined and cali
234. ion from among others ecologically valuable and protected natural areas protected cultural landscapes buffer areas etc As described in the sections Creating a new project file for Metronamica SL and Creating a new project file for Metronamica ML you can choose to use zoning tool or not to use 122 zoning tool in your new project file Depending on the configuration of your project file the modeller s user interface of the Zoning tab is different e For more information about how to work on the zoning parameters with the zoning tool see the following sub sections whose title is started with With the zoning tool e For more information about how to work on the zoning parameters without the zoning tool see the following sub sections whose title 1s started with Without the zoning tool With the zoning tool zoning tab If the zoning tool is included in the project file that you are working on you can access the contents depicted as the figure below by clicking the Zoning tab The Output part is related to the selected land use in the control pane and use model SEE Land use Industry Land use type Function Land use Neighbourhood Accessibility Suitability Zoning Input Go to zoning tool Parameters De Facto zoning Land use function Greenhouses Housing low Housing high Industry Services Sodal cultur Other agriculture a BP 5 Pastures E Cropland E Greenhouses iv Housing low densit
235. is diagonally adjacent to cell c if v c sI cellsize lt v d v d v c t cellsize add d to the end of list L end if end for end while for each cell c that is occupied by a land use that is not indicated as source set the value of cell c to no data end for Parameters input and output Table 3 36 Distance indicator parameters Road is obstacle Determines whether a road can intersect a target cluster checked or not unchecked By default this is checked Target cluster radius This is the minimum size that a cluster of target cells should have to be considered a target This value can range from 1 to 25 and is set to 10 by default Role of land use Per land use you can specify whether it is a source a target or neither n a 3 2 5 Distance to map indicator Purpose and use This type of indicator approximates the distance from a cell with a certain land use to the nearest target cell specified on an ancillary binary map As in the distance indicator one can specify the measure of distance However the distance is measured to the closest target cell not the closest target cluster 197 Process description The distance between each pair of cells 1s approximated by taking paths from one cell to another that is horizontally vertically or diagonally adjacent This approximation overestimates the actual distance by less than 10 We calculate for each source cell the smallest distance to a cell
236. ity Purpose Home work Work home Work work Home home A Greenhouses 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Greenhouses 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Housing low density 0 24 0 00 0 00 1 14 Housing low density 0 00 0 24 0 00 1 14 Housing high density 0 24 0 00 0 00 1 14 Housing high density 0 00 0 24 0 00 1 14 Industry 0 00 0 73 0 27 0 00 Industry 0 73 0 00 0 27 0 00 On the lower Output part of the dialog window the output for the current simulation year is grouped by Origins and Destinations tables You can select your time period of interest The two tables show the number of trip origins and destinations per hour per zone per trip purpose for the selected time period The output will be updated over time during the simulation Distribution and modal split Links between trip origins and trip destinations are made in the Distribution step If people will go to work the links between home and work are determined for the home work purpose The modal split step is calculated within the same time step of distribution to decide the transportation mode People will choose which mode of transport they want to use The dialog window on the Distribution modal split tab gives access to the parameters used and displays the output calculated in the Distribution step and Modal split step 151 The variables and parameters of distribution and modal split are presented in two separate dialogs One is used to specify the exogenous public transport travel time The other presents the gener
237. iver has been changed you can select one of three options from the list next to the driver name see table below Discard changes The driver will be reverted to the last loaded or saved sub scenario Your changes will be lost Save in active sub scenario The active sub scenario will be overwritten with the changes you have made Click the More button to update the description of the sub scenario This option is not available if the active sub scenario is read only Save as new sub scenario The value for the driver will be saved as a new sub scenario for which you need to provide a name The active sub scenario before you made the changes will remain as it was Click to More button to specify the name and description of the new sub scenario If a driver has not been changed since the last time it was saved the disabled list will show No changes Otherwise the list will provide the option to discard the changes or to save them in the active or a new sub scenario By default the settings in the Save project window will be set to overwrite the last active sub scenario 1 e the one that was active before you made changes unless that sub scenario is read only gt Select the option Save as new sub scenario for the land use demand driver Note that the Save as active integrated scenario option will become disabled This prevents you from accidentally overwriting an integrated scenario gt Click the M
238. k net gt gt Enter the sector name in the text box in the Sector name column gt Press Enter on your keyboard A dropdown list arrow appears in the column of Sector type gt Select the sector type from the dropdown list in the Sector type column for the newly entered sector New Metronamica project wizard Specify the sectors of the regional model gt Repeat the steps above till specifying all the sectors 26 New Metronamica project wizard Specify the sectors of the regional model gt Click the Next button A new wizard dialog window opens to ask you linking the land use functions to sectors Linking land use functions to sectors The second step in setting up the regional interaction model is to link the sectors to the land use functions Area sectors must be linked one to one to a land use function Population and economic sectors can be linked to land use function with a many to many relation The available land use functions are listed in the Land use functions column of this dialog window which were determined in step Entering the basic land use model parameter In the Corresponding sector column all the sectors available are listed on the dropdown list which were the sector names determined in step Specifying the sectors of the regional model By default the wizard shows a table in which sectors and land use functions can be linked one to one New Metronamica project wizar
239. k can be fulfilled by any of the link types is the same as the complement of the extent to which this need cannot be fulfilled by any of the link types Again cannot be fulfilled is the complement of can be fulfilled Hence we are looking for the complement of the intersection of the complements of the extent to which this need can be fulfilled by each link type In set theory theorem is known as DeMorgan s law Casella amp Berger 1990 Implicit accessibility The implicit accessibility reflects the fact that when an area is occupied by an urban land use measures will be taken to assure its accessibility This is the case even if it does not appear so on the network map For the land use model this is especially significant because as the cellular automata model changes the land use map it does not change the network map accordingly The implied accessibility takes one of two possible values for each land use class one for urbanised areas and one for non urbanised areas A cell is urbanised if its current land use class is flagged as a built up area These flags are therefore parameters of the accessibility model block Explicit accessibility When determining the distance from a certain location to the nearest link of a certain type we should take into account that areas occupied by some specific land uses such as lakes cannot be crossed Hence this distance cannot be measured in a straight line To ach
240. k the Factors and base maps tab Click the Add factor button The Add suitability factor dialog window opens VV V WV Give an appropriate name in the text box next to Name which you can recognize the map in the system v Click the browse button inside the Map box to open the suitability base map to import gt Select an existing legend or create a new one Click the Edit legend button to preview or change the legend see the section Legend editor gt Click the OK button The name will be added to the Suitability factor list in the Factors and base maps tab The suitability base map will be added on the Interpretation tab 117 gt You can view the imported suitability base map by selecting it on the Factors and base maps tab and clicking the Show Edit button gt After importing the suitability base map you can click the Edit button in the Legend row to change the legend Land use model Land use Other agriculture vi Land use type Vacant Land use Neighbourhood Accessibility Suitability Zoning Factors and base maps Interpretation satay factor ummiatve rose Legend F RIKS Metronamica SVN Trunk Metronamica Sampk Base maps 2000 Jan 01 09 a ea e Belang Oe UP abel 9 eee To allow the suitability maps to change over the course of the simulation it is possible to introduce the suitability
241. ks nl
242. l non f Y Other v v v v v v The number of land use classes is taken from the initial land use map you imported In order to facilitate the scenario study METRONAMICA allows you to add additional land use classes as land use feature To do so gt Go to the last empty line of the Land use classes table gt Click the cell in the Class name column and a name for the land use feature that you want to add gt Press the Enter key on your key board The Type of the newly added land use will be set automatically as Feature You could not add additional land use classes for vacant or function A new empty line appears at the bottom of the Land use classes You could add another new land use feature by repeating the steps described above gt Click on the Next button on the Enter the basic land use model parameters dialog window Entering the zoning tool parameters If you have not selected the check box in front of Use zoning tool this step will be skipped and a new dialog window opens to ask you entering the infrastructure networks For more information see the section Entering the infrastructure networks If you have selected the check box in front of Use zoning tool the dialog window Enter the zoning tool parameters depicted as below appears Four default zoning states are listed in the table with their default numerical value In this wizard step it is very important to defin
243. l of activity for the selected region is not restricted If Manual option 1s selected the system will take the value defined by the user for the selected variable for the selected region The graph is editable The level of activity for the selected region is restricted You can edit the minimum and maximum activity for the selected region and for the selected variable To adapt the restricted level of activity for a specific region e g jobs in industry WZ gt gt gt Select the Jobs in employment on the drop down next to Trend Select the radio button in the Manual column next to the region of interest Click the graphic icon on the left side to open the graphic window for the minimum jobs in employment for the selected region Click the graphic icon on the right side to open the graphic window for jobs in employment for the selected region gt Adapt the figures on the graphs You have now adapted the level of activity for a certain sector and a certain region for which the level of activity is restricted between bounds How to adapt values for external factors gt Go to the Drivers tab of the Main window gt Click the External factors icon For Metronamica SL gt Click the graphic icon next to the land use of interest e g Industry The corresponding graph window opens For Metronamica ML or Metronamica LUT gt Select the Driver of interest from the list e g Economic trend gt Select the variable o
244. lay a list of model blocks that allow their results to be written to Excel Enter a unique sheet name for each model block that you want to write to Excel you can copy paste the model block names Then enter a list of simulation times at which the model results should be written When you click the Start writing button a new Excel workbook is opened in the background and the model results will be written as you run the simulation While the link between METRONAMICA and the Excel workbook is open you can see that Write to Excel on the Options menu is checked Come back to the Write to Excel settings window and click the Open Excel workbook button to stop writing to Excel and display the created workbook gt Click Write to Excel on the Options menu The Write to Excel settings window will appear gt Select all of the model block names and press Ctrl C to copy the names gt Select the cell just below the Excel sheet name column heading and press Ctrl V to paste the copied names The values in the Excel sheet name column should now match the values in the Model block name column 57 gt Click the Generate button The Generate moments window will appear The default settings in this window will generate a list of moments for each year of the simulation period gt Click the OK button The list of Writing moments in the Write to Excel settings window will be filled
245. lete network that replaces the previous network in a simulation run or you can import a network that only indicates which network elements should be added or removed In the latter case the network needs to have a property column called DeltaType case insensitive with value 1 for all elements that should be deleted If the property is missing all elements in the file will be added to the network gt Go to Main window Drivers Policy measures Infrastructure gt Select type of infrastructure network that you want to import from the Network list gt Click the Import network change button A window will open where you can enter the information required to import a network 87 gt Click on the browse button inside the File box to open the file to import gt Select the Incremental check box if the network to import only contains the elements to be added or removed Clear the check box if the network should replace the existing network at the specified simulation time Click the OK button when you have entered all information The network change will be added to the in the Main window 2 3 3 Visualising indicators The integrated model in METRONAMICA contains several components that calculate policy relevant indicators In order to calculate these the model also calculates various other results which are not useful for scenario analysis but can be used by modellers to calibrate or validate the mode
246. lity for all land uses User defined suitability for which is used to rescale the integer all land uses values of input suitability maps to the range from 0 1 Enactment date The start of the first and second planning en eee Zoning Parameter controlling the steepness of Calibration anticipation the increase in the zoning for land use f from the last disallowed planning period to the first allowed planning period Neighbourhood The spline that determines the influence Calibration influence rules of a land use f on another land use f for each distance in the neighbourhood coefficient Built up area True false parameter per land use I lisa specifying if the land use is contained in the set of urbanised land uses LUU or not Implicit The implicit accessibility for a land use ae Ene accessibility of ona built up area built up area Implicit The implicit accessibility for a land use Calibration accessibility of on anon built up area non built up Impassable True false parameter per land use Calibration specifying if the land use is impassable for other land uses or not Relative The relative weight of the local Calibration importance accessibility for a certain link type and land use in the total local accessibility for that land use Accessibility coefficient expressing the Calibration importance for land use f of having good access to certain elements e of the infrastructure network Output Table 3 5 Output given in the La
247. lity tool see the following sub sections whose title is started with Without the suitability tool Suitability tool If the suitability tool is included in the geoproject suitability scores depended on all three considerations selected factors characterisation of relationships transformation rules weight optional and combining factors There is no definitive method for defining and characterising suitability Instead different combinations of attributes weightings combinations and methods can be explored to evaluate the impact of different representations of suitability within Metronamica Normally suitability is evaluated on a scale from 0 0 completely unsuitable to 1 0 most suitable in increments of 0 1 gt Click the Suitability tab to access the contents depicted as the figure below Land use model Land use Housing ing low density v Land use type Function ton Land use Neighbourhood Accessibility Suitability Zoning racire ai bane mape M Suitability factor Cumulative noise v Legend C Documents and Settings User My Documents Geor Base maps Interpolate Date Base map 2000 Jan 01 C Documents and Settings User My Document With the suitability tool adding a new suitability factor gt Go to Main window Drivers Parameters Land use Suitability In the dropdown list titled Land use select a land use vacant or function Clic
248. located cell It 1s easy to verify that this procedure yields an outcome that satisfies the conditions of the equilibrium state Moreover 1f we assume that all transition potential values are unique the equilibrium state is unique as well Algorithm for each region allocate the current land use to all cells occupied by a land use feature while some cells have to be allocated to some land use function select the land use function for which we still need to allocate more cells that has the highest total potential value in an unallocated cell allocate the land use to that cell end while while not all cells have been allocated a land use select the vacant land use with the highest potential in an unallocated cell allocate the land use to that cell end while end for Parameters input and output Table 3 26 Land use parameters LU inj Initial land use The land use map at the start of the GUI map simulation Table 3 27 Land use input P Total potential The transition potential for each land use and Transition potential maps each cell c 189 Name Description Source t N o Regional demands The number of cells that need to be allocated Metronamica ML and to each land use function f in each region i LUT MBB Regional interaction Metronamica SL GUI Table 3 28 Land use output He Land use map The land use that currently occupies Neighbourhood model block each cell in the map at time t MBB Spatial indic
249. lowing ODP oq bP _ o cP Zo Zd AP Ca 524 _ purpose ty pm Yp Ca Zd fp where a T c _ are balancing factors calculated to match the constraints presented below The factors a b c _ are found in an optimization process satisfying the Zo following Onas ODN as to aL _ opp Zo tp ao Zq pP Zo tp m Zd ro D Zd tP o DP Po yy oom Zq lp ty p Zq lp 2 2 Dus P 2q to m p D Zd tP gt ODF 02d P The equations above takes place to ascertain that the total number of trips corresponds to that of OD Zo Zq Ap The procedure to match the constraints is very similar to the the normal Furness iteration see the section Transport annex 2 Furness Iteration that is also used elsewhere in the model Note that each of the constraints corresponds to a balancing q is calculated on the basis of the constraints on the number of Zo factor factor origins per purpose factor KA on the number of destinations per purpose and factor c on the number of trips between pairs of zones for each mode For stability a Zo Zd nested procedure is adhered as follows while out_of balance while out_of balance set_a_to_constraint_O set b to constraint Di cet co to constraint T 249 The bootstrapping procedure is implemented such that it takes the original trips per to m p purpose MA as input It then aggregates these over the purposes to ge
250. ls The Indicators tab in the Main window provides organised access to all policy relevant output calculated by the integrated model Structure of indicators In METRONAMICA the basic output produces are maps However these maps are not always easy to interpret at first instance For that reason METRONAMICA offers you the opportunity to compute indicators as well An indicator in this context 1s a measure to make a particular phenomenon perceptible that is not at least not immediately detectable You can access the indicators via the Indicators tab in the Main window m Main window Expansion of urban areas Forested areas Deforested land Abandoned land Show map se eon Nr of cells 230 82 325 314 90 192 213 231 140 286 102 Regional averages Indicator Soil sealing Region Oost Groningen Delfzijl e o Overig Groningen Noord Friesland Zuidwest Friesland Zuidoost Friesland Noord Drenthe Zuidoost Drenthe Zuidwest Drenthe Noord Overijssel Zuidwest Overijssel Default indicators incorporated in the system are different depending on the configuration of Metronamica The figure above is an example of the Metronamica ML For Metronamica SL e Environmental indicators e Social economic indicators For Metronamica ML e Environmental indicators e Social economic including the choropleth maps For Metronamica LUT e Environmental indicators 88 e Social economic ind
251. ls with a value of 1 are industry in all of the 5 runs that were used to generate the result whereas a cell with value 0 4 was only industry in 2 out of 5 runs A closer investigation shows that most cells actually have a value of either O or 1 this indicates that they are either always or never developed as agricultural areas Of course the main interest of the Monte Carlo Analysis is in the cells for which their development is less certain It should be noted that for proper analysis a multitude of runs is required The number of runs will thus be much higher than the 5 used in this example However it would take some time to generate these runs You can export these probability maps to the hard disk of your computer gt Click the Export probability maps button in the Results part The Browser For Folder dialog window opens gt Create a new folder Probability maps by clicking the Make New Folder button gt Press the OK button in the Browse For Folder dialog window Now you export all the probability maps produced by the Monte Carlo analysis for all vacant and function land uses to Probability maps folder on your hard disk When the Monte Carlo option is used the logged maps in the Log folder are only for the current simulation run These maps will be overwritten after another run In this example after 5 simulation runs the logged land use maps are the result land use maps in all 5 runs of the Monte Ca
252. lution land use transport interaction model In the METRONAMICA transport model it 1s possible to have one mode modelled endogenously endogenous mode and several modes modelled exogenously exogenous mode Typically the endogenous mode is the mode car or private transport which modelled the assignment to the network the exogenous mode is the bus train or public transport mode It is important that you have at least one endogenous mode usually car and none to several exogenous modes The transport model is a classical four primary steps model Production Attraction Distribution Modal split Assignment Additionally a fifth step can be recognized as Indicators To access the modeller user interface for the Transport model gt Go to the Drivers tab of the Main window gt Click the Parameters icon in the navigation pane on the left side of the window The system diagram is displayed in the content pane on the right side of the window gt Click the Transport MBB box at the Regional level in the system diagram The Transport model dialog window opens The Transport model dialog window is split into 8 tabs as depicted in the figure below The structure of the model is also reflected in the user interface The different tabs in the Transport model dialog window give access to the parameters and variables of the model components 147 Transport model Time period data Name Duration hours X Ru
253. meters lie in the range 0 1 LA spe the local accessibility of cell c to link type s for land use f The implicit accessibility ZA is calculated n in if f c eLU a N Urb otherwise In this equation 1s Urb the implicit accessibility for land use f of a cell that 1s occupied by an urban land use NUrb the implicit accessibility for land use f of a cell that is occupied by a non urban land use f c the land use occupied by cell c LU the set of urbanised built up land uses The explicit accessibility EA is calculated if yey 0 otherwise t EA In this equation IA is the implicit accessibility of cell c for land use fand f c the land use occupied by cell c The total accessibility A f 1s defined as i EA if f c eLU oo ZA ra lpp UA otherwise In this equation is EA the explicit accessibility of cell c for land use f f c the land use occupied by cell c LU the set of impassable land uses LA the zonal accessibility for land use function f in transport zone z z the transport zone in which cell c is located LA the local accessibility of cell c for land use f and Z4 the implicit accessibility of cell c for land use f Parameters input and output Table 3 10 Accessibility input Source Infrastructure The network layers that consist of nodes Metronamica SL and ML GUI network maps and links of different types rep
254. mode The generalised costs consist of the cost associated to transport over one unit of distance the cost associated to transport over one unit of time the extra cost the fixed cost such as parking cost the additional fixed cost caused by the urbanization level and the cost of modal adversion C OX C T E Co Zo Zd Ap Zo Zd 4p Zo Zd Ap Zo Zd p fix Zg HG C fix uz AVUC UC Algorithm of assignment for endogenous mode Principally every trip is assigned to the route with the lowest generalised costs function of travel time travel distance and other costs It must also take into account that as trips are assigned to the road network the costs will be impacted Quite simply as the intensity of cars on a road rises the travel speed will drop as a function of the road capacity Thus an iterative approach is followed that approaches a Nash equilibrium in which not a single car user can reduce his travel costs by choosing an alternative route The assignment step has several outputs that are relevant both internal to the transport model as indicators and as input for land use model in an integrated land use transport interaction model Primary output is the travel cost between zones which is used in the distribution step and may be passed on to integrated land use models too In the assignment procedure the transport network has a central role The transport network can be seen as a collection of links
255. mode parameters gt Click on the browse button next to Initial land use map The Open dialog window opens gt Navigate the initial land use map that you want to import and double click on it You have been imported the initial land use map to the new project New Metronamica project wizard Enter the basic land use model parameters 140 x 180 rows x columns 500 meters aa Look in Landuse_Maps v Q i e gm Landuse_2000 asc a Landuse_2006 asc Fies ftype Supported raster map fles Casc img rt Y C Open as read only Once the initial land use map is imported the path of the map is displayed in the text box next to Initial land use map At the same time the information on the initial land use map appears in the table under Land use classes in a default way 10 gt gt New Metronamica project wizard Enter the basic land use model parameters Map size 140 x 180 rows x columns Cell size 500 meters Initial land use map RIKS Randstad_SL Landuse_Maps Landuse_2000 asc Land use classes lt aL m Class name Colour Type Environmental group Socio economic group Land use dass 0 E Vacant Other Other Land use dass 1 Vacant Other Other Land use dass 2 n Vacant Y Other Other Land use dass 3 E Vacant Other Other Land use dass 4 Li Vacant Other Other Land use dass 5 E Vacant Other Other Land use dass 6 3 Vacant Othe
256. modelAccessibility Table 3 118 Intermediate variables Description t zone Average generalised cost to travel between zone z and z in both ere directions at time Maximum zonal accessibility for transport activity a at time t Transport aggregation indicators A collection of main aggregation indicators summarizes the transport system They are e Total number of car trips e Total number of public transport trips e Average car trip distance e Average public transport trip distance e Average trip distance e Average car trip duration e Average public transport trip duration e Average trip duration e Zonal number of trip origins e Zonal number of trip destinations The indicators at zonal level are weighted in such a way that a trip from Zo to Zg 1s included in both the indicator for zo as well as in the indicator for zz both with factor 0 5 A trip from zone z to that same zone z will be included in the indicator for z as full The same principle is applied to the following indicators daily number of car trips NT7 per mode m in zone z daily trip distance X2 per mode m in zone z a Baten daily trip duration per mode m in zone z gt OD OD pay z z tp NEO z D tp D O a a ODE 2p XP 2p ee a D tp 245 t m trym t m trom 5 Z Z tp i l T O Z Z tp j Tes T 3 z f D tp where D is the duration of time period tp i OD i
257. mpare Click the icon on the toolbar to adjust these settings If a comparison algorithm has no settings this icon will be greyed out You can click the Apply button in the Algorithm settings window to update the comparison results directly 2 4 Modeller interface This section deals primarily with the interaction between the Modeller and the software The modeller can have more detailed access to the underlying models of the system diagram to update data and parameters and to check the output For details about the models we refer to the chapter 3 Model description of METRONAMICA Only a global overview of the model itself and the features which are not directly linked to the model description will be described in this user manual 2 4 1 Overview of the system diagram To access the modeller user interface gt Go to the Drivers tab of the Main window gt Click the Parameters icon in the navigation pane The system diagram of the integrated models becomes visible in the content pane on the right hand side of the Main window m Main window Spatial p Scenarios Analysis The system diagrams for Metronamica SL ML and LUT are different depending on the configuration The figure above is an example of the system diagram for Metronamica SL The system diagram in the content pane is the most essential feature of the user interface for the modeller It shows an overview of the structure of the integrated
258. n a vector of values one value for each cell state for each cell known as the transition potentials These transition potentials are determined on the basis of the neighbourhood effect but can take other factors into consideration as well such as the physical or institutional suitability of the location the availability of transport connections or even a stochastic factor to take into consideration the possible effects of unpredictable occurrences Together these transition potentials and the allocation algorithm make up the transition rules of the CA model In the simplest of cases the transition potential can be taken as the neighbourhood effect and the allocation algorithm allocates the cell state with the highest potential to each cell that is occupied by a land use function as indicated before land use features are not modelled by the CA model but are taken as static elements In a more complex model the factors mentioned above are incorporated into the transition potentials and the allocation algorithm takes into account the number of cells that need to be allocated to each cell state which is exogenous to the CA model 3 1 3 Neighbourhood potential Purpose and use This block calculates the neighbourhood effect as described in the previous section Cellular Automata The neighbourhood effect is used to calculate the Transition potential values Clicking this model block will open the influence table dialog 174 windo
259. n also set the colour of all the categories by clicking the Generate colours button see the section Generate colours 43 Legend editor File E RIKS Netherlands_ML Legehds Land use txt Legend type Categoric v Number of classes 17 Colour Label Other agriculture Pastures Cropland _Greenhouses_ _Housing low density_ _Housing high density_ _Industry_ _Services _ _Socdal cultural uses_ _Forests_ eee ee ee ek ee Generate colours Cancel Numerical legends When the Legend type in the legend editor is set to Numerical the window will look similar to the image depicted below You can set the number of classes by typing the desired number or by clicking the up down arrow buttons Legend editor File E SRIKS Netherlands_ML Legends Urban clusters txt Legend type Numeric Number of classes sa Lower bound Upper bound 80000 800000 80000 800000 8000 80000 8000 80000 800 8000 8000 80 800 800 0 80 80 0 Generate colours Generate labels Generate class bounds The table displays the classes in the order they will appear in the legend pane You can change the lower and upper bound of each legend class by double clicking on the number in the table When you set the lower bound higher than the upper bound of a class the values will be given a red background to indicate the error You have to adjust the values before you will be able
260. n another land fof table use for each distance in the neighbourhood Table 3 9 Neighbourhood output Neighbourhood A map for each land use Transition potential potential map function containing the Metronamica ML and LUT MBB Regional neighbourhood effect for interaction that land use for each cell 3 1 4 Accessibility Purpose and use Accessibility measures the effect of the nearness and importance of different types of transport networks such as local roads highways or railroads on the possible future occurrence of each land use function on a certain location The accessibility is used to calculate the Transition potential values 175 Process description The accessibility for each land use function is a composite measure of four types of accessibility zonal accessibility local accessibility implicit accessibility and explicit accessibility Zonal accessibility The zonal accessibility is a measure based upon the generalised cost from a transport zone to origins and destinations It is calculated in the transport model The transport zones are specified in an additional region map Local accessibility The local accessibility reflects the extent to which the need for the presence or absence of the transportation network of a land use can be fulfilled The network consists of a number of network layers that are made up of nodes such as stations and links such as roads The local accessibilit
261. n be specified and the measure of distance can be adjusted Process description The distance between each pair of cells 1s approximated by taking paths from one cell to another that is horizontally vertically or diagonally adjacent This approximation overestimates the actual distance by less than 10 We calculate for each source cell the smallest distance to a cell that is in the centre of a cluster of target cells A cell is a source cell if it is occupied by a land use marked as source Idem for target cells The centre cells of a cluster are those cells for which all cells in the neighbourhood are target cells Cells that contain a link type that is indicated to be an obstacle are not target cells even if the land use that occupies the cell is marked as a target 196 Algorithm let v c denote the value of cell c set all cell values to no data for each cell c that is occupied by a land use indicated as target and does not contain a link type that 1s an obstacle if all cells in the neighbourhood of cell c are occupied by a land use indicated as target and do not contain a link type that is an obstacle v c 0 end if end for put all cells with value 0 in list L while L 4 remove the first cell c from list L for each cell d that is horizontally or vertically adjacent to cell c if v c cellsize lt v d v d v c cellsize add d to the end of list L end if end for for each cell d that
262. n f Table 3 20 Zoning input fic Land use The map that contains the land use that Land use model block map occupies each cell at time t 186 Table 3 21 Zoning internal variables A binary map that indicates for each cell c if A equals the value that B corresponds to category r Table 3 22 Zoning dka aid Zoning map A categorical map specifies the zoning status Zoning with the zoning tool in cell c for land use function f at time t model block Numerical A numerical map specifies the value used Transition potential zoning map for zoning in the calculation of the total MBB Regional interaction potential for land use function f in cell c at time 3 1 7 Transition potential Purpose and use The transition potentials form the basis on which the allocation algorithm is to determine which land use will occur in each cell after a time step has been made They can be interpreted as the utility level that a location ascribes to a particular land use being present and vice versa which a land use ascribes to being located on that location Process description The transition potential combines the effect of the neighbourhood accessibility suitability and zoning on the possible future occurrence of each land use on a particular location Moreover the neighbourhood effect is given a stochastic perturbation to simulate the effect of unpredictable occurrences The extent of this perturbation can be controlle
263. n in each region Note that vacant land uses need not be allocated to a 188 specific number of cells but will be allocated after the required number of cells has been allocated to all land use functions This procedure can be understood most easily by considering the land use functions as agents that need to occupy a certain number of cells in each region such that the accumulated transition potential in those cells is maximal and considering the cells in each region as agents that want to be occupied by a land use that has the highest transition potential in that cell In this light the allocation procedure yields an equilibrium outcome in which no land use can find a cell that it can occupy meaning the currently allocated land use has a lower transition potential value in that cell while vacating another cell and thereby increase its accumulated transition potential At the same time no cell can find a land use that is willing to vacate another cell and occupy this cell thus increasing its accumulated transition potential thereby increasing the transition potential in this cell The equilibrium state is found by an iterative procedure in which the land use function that has the highest transition potential in an unallocated cell in the region is allocated to that cell as long as more cells need to be allocated to that land use Thereafter the vacant land use with the highest transition potential is allocated to each unal
264. n is opened and every time a change is made in the settings of the zoning tool It is not recomputed while running a simulation Secondly zoning maps are converted into numerical values to be used in the computation of the total potential The parameters to interpret the categories are given in the parameters of the land use model not in the zoning tool The conversion takes into account the De Facto land use Let the set of all plans the set of all categories in all plans the set of all land use functions and the set of zoning status values where for example the default zoning Status are Ss actively stimulated allowed strictly restricted weakly restricted unspecified ADA Each plan is represented by a zoning map SP that shows the location of all categories r within that plan Each cell c in map SP can have only one category 1 e no overlaps are allowed Where categories do not apply cells have the value no data For each zone in a plan p a binary map B is created indicating where that category occurs in the plan B A binary map that indicates for each cell cif SP equals the value that corresponds to categoryre R Furthermore there are some parameters that can be set Let 184 T the start time of category reR I the end time of category re R ZS E S the zoning status for land use function f e F and category re R and O 1 R the order of domina
265. n the calculated land use map you introduce a new zoning plan where the agriculture is not allowed to develop on this location The zoning status for agriculture function will still be allowed at this location If a check box in the De Facto zoning table is unselected for certain land use and for certain function each year the zoning status will not be corrected for the De Facto land use For instance the check box for Agriculture land use and for the Agriculture function is unchecked if a location has agriculture on the calculated land use map you introduce a new zoning plan where the agriculture is not allowed to develop on this location The zoning status for agriculture function will be not allowed at this location The table under Zoning state values part shows the numeric relationship between land use functions and zoning states The number of zoning states and their names are set within the wizard step of creating the project file see the section Entering the zoning tool parameters for more information You could not change these via the user interface after setting up the application You can set the zoning state values for each land use function and each available zoning state category in the Zoning state value table The zoning state values will be used to calculate the numerical zoning map You can view the numerical zoning map by clicking the Show numerical zoning map button on the Zoning tab 124 Witho
266. n the cell You can view and edit the zoning map for the selected function land use by clicking the Show Edit button A Map window showing the Zoning map opens where represents the selected land use function With the Grid tools in this Map window it is possible to assign specific zoning statuses to individual cells You can import a zoning map by clicking the browse button next to the text box The Import zoning map dialog window opens Navigate to the file that you want to import and double click on it 125 For more information see the section Without the zoning tool viewing and editing a zoning map In the Parameters part you can adapt the start dates of the zoning plans for the selected land use function The enactment date phase 1 corresponds to the allowed from tl on the zoning map The enactment date phase 2 corresponds to the allowed from t2 on the zoning map e If there are the classes of allowed from tl and allowed from t2 on the zoning map for the selected land use function you need set both dates e If there is only the class of allowed from t1 on the zoning map for the selected land use function you need set the date on the dropdown list next to Enactment date phase 1 It is not important which date on the dropdown list is selected as Enactment date phase 2 as long as the date is after the date for Enactment date phase 1 In the Zoning anticipations for all land uses part the system allows you to c
267. n the top left table you can view or edit the Origin destination weight in the O D weight row which is used for balancing the number of trip origins with trip destinations for trips per trip purpose You can also view or edit the parameters of daily distribution per time period in the same table which specifies the prevalence of time period for trips per trip purpose On the top right of the dialog window in the Timeline parameters part you can select your parameter of interest from the dropdown list next to Parameter Mobility growth factor Cargo fraction Persons per car equivalent In the transport model the mobility growth factor controls the development of transport over time For instance if year 2010 has a mobility growth factor of 1 2 150 every job or person will generate 20 more mobility than in the base year e g 2003 The Mobility growth factor for the start year should be 1 It is not editable The Cargo fraction specifies the fraction of trips per trip purpose that are primarily meant for transporting cargo The Person per car equivalent is the average number of persons travelling per vehicle per trip purpose These parameters are exogenous trends and are therefore represented as an editable timelines which change over time You can add new time for the selected parameter by clicking the Add time button on the right hand side The newly add time is displayed immediately on the table with the default values for
268. n this document takes the trip matrices per mode and time period and further disaggregates it to trips per purpose using the relevant information present in the model in particular the generalized cost of transport between zones and the sensitivity of trip makers to that cost In order to obtain the initial value for thoese trip matrics a bootstrapping procedure is applied This section describes the procedure Te i Gide OO aes The initial trip distribution 7o7aP for individual purposes are found by a modified Furness iteration purpose x t0 cm T4 Zc 2 ODP Furness O DP 3 OD nse an Zo Zd p Zo p Zq p 2 Zo lt q lp Where ODP is the calculated initial trip distribution between two zone zo Zinta tp and zz by mode m during time period tp trip purpose p 248 Os is number of trip origins for zone zo purpose p in time period tp per hour at time to D y is number of trip destinations for zone za purpose p in time period tp per hour at time to OD is number of trips between origin zone z and destination zone za for Zo Zq ofp mode m in time period tp per hour at time to purpose P lo m Zo Zq tP is sensitivity to cost for trips of purpose p is generalised cost per trip to go from the origin zone zo to the destination zone za by mode m during time period tp at time to The algorithm of the modified Furness calculates the trip distribution according to the fol
269. nactment date phase 2 at here is corresponding to the Allowed from t2 on the zoning map 79 If there are classes of Allowed from tl and Allowed from t2 on the zoning map for the selected land use function you need adapt both dates If there is only the class of Allowed from tl on the zoning map for the selected land use function you need adapt the date on the dropdown list next to Enactment date phase 1 It is unimportant to select which date on the dropdown list next to Enactment date phase 2 as long as the date is after the date for the Enactment date phase 1 Without the zoning tool viewing and editing a zoning map gt Go to the Drivers tab in the Main window and click the Policy measures icon in the navigation pane gt Select Zoning from the dropdown list next to Driver gt Select the land use of interest from the dropdown list next to Land use GG 66 If there is no zoning map for the selected land use the is displayed in the text box next to Zoning map You can only view and edit a zoning map which has been already imported in the system Zoning map J Show Edit gt Click the Show Edit button on the right side of the path text box The Zoning Map for the selected land use function and for the selected region opens In the zoning map you will find four different classes Allowed Allowed from tl Allowed from t2 and Prohibited As you can see from thes
270. namica Status bar Application Window Menu bar The Menu bar provides access to various functions in METRONAMICA The menus are summarised in the table below Each menu item is described in detail in the section The Metronamica menu system Window Manage your windows on the screen Look up the system information and find help documentation Toolbar The Toolbar gives faster access to some of the more frequently used functionality Each item on the toolbar is described in the table below Open a project file from the disk ased Save the opened project file to disk 31 Integrated scenario Baseline _ Displays the active integrated scenario The dropdown list shows all the available integrated scenarios You can load an integrated scenario by selecting it from the dropdown list EE Rives sini iene pe esha Status bar The Status bar is displayed at the bottom of the application window It contains different sections that provide different kinds of information e The leftmost section provides general information When you navigate through the menu it describes the selected menu item e The second section from the left provides local information when you move the mouse over a map For a raster map it lists the cell index and the value in that cell For network maps it lists the x and y coordinates of the location e The third section from the left displays a progress bar while the model is c
271. national growth model block t l A The activity in sector k and region iat Number of Activity model time previous time step people or jobs block t M Migration The migration The number of people Number of Migration model in sector k that move from region i to people or jobs block region j at time t NA Activity The total level of activity in sector kat Number of Trend time people or jobs 1 NA The total level of activity in sector kat Number of i time previous time step people or jobs Table 3 52 Output variables given by the national growth model block ki j t E The fraction of national growth of Number of Activity model j activity in sector k that ends up in people orjobs block region i at time t 3 3 4 Migration Purpose and use This model block determines the migration within a sector from one region to another This information is primarily used in the activity model block Process description The migration from one region to another is the product of the not inert activity of the former and the relative attractivity of the latter relative to the attractivity of the other regions The relative attractivity weighs the attractivities of the different regions in accordance to the interregional distances Algorithm The function which determines the value of the output variable looks as follows t Ny t dT My 1 d H a7 L i l k l l Parameters input and outpu
272. nces In the land use model accessibility expresses how well activities that are relevant to a land use can be reached For instance the accessibility of land use function residential area depends 243 on the degree to which people can reach a zone Therefore we can say that the zonal accessibility of the land use function residential area has a one to one relation with the zonal accessibility of population Zonal accessibility for activity type a in zone z ZA is calculated as the cost weighted integral over trip destinations CE Cl AVE 525 Zq p t activity t Cy activity ZA TA e me Z t zone activity where y is the sensitivity to cost for activity a and TA_ the activity level of activity a in zone z The maximum zonal accessibility for activity a ZA is calculated as follows and max a it will be used to normalize the zonal accessibility for function f late ZAY max Lm max ZA max a The zonal accessibility will be rescaled between 0 and 1 as in the land use model the accessibility for land use function is of values between 0 and Moreover as most zonal accessibility will depend on accessibility of more than one activity type Therefore a weighted mean over activities is used Thezonal accessibility for land use function f is calculated FA i VA iki A E E7 gt Lize where FA 1s the land use function f transport activity a correspondence and ZA nin
273. nd sparse residential 4 5 Additional data for the transport model These data are required for the transport model at the regional level Before the actual data processing for the transport model some fundamental decisions need to be made relative time period and its duration trip purpose transportation mode Some dimensions of parameters should be determined as well in order to prepare the data with the correct dimension later on 4 5 1 Decision for setup Prior to collecting data you need to make some decisions for your transport model These include the number of transport modes you want to include the number of time periods you want to simulate and which trip purposes you want to include in a simulation Besides the data mentioned previously you also need to predefine the urbanization classes and congetion categories These two are not directly linked to the data 259 collection But it is essential to know the dimenions of the urbanization classes and congetion categories before setting up the transport model Time period Computation time of the Metronamica LUT mainly depends on the transport model Computation time of the transport model mainly depends on the number of times that trips are assigned to the network and the number of assignment iterations per time period The day or specific period could be split into different time periods For example rush hour period and the rest of day period This is to simulate that du
274. nd use map window that is opened when you open a project in METRONAMICA as an example A Map window is split into 5 areas called panes as depicted below Panes are separated from each other by means of splitter bars You can move the splitter bars to change the size of a pane Beware opened maps windows are updated while a scenario runs This consumes processing time and will slow down the overall program Legend pane Layer visibility button Layer manager pane La UES MOD Bkk EEEk eE f a E E F Hide outside mode m Pastures J a o Arable land fj Greenhouses lo Region boundaries lo Network layer Roa i Housing low densit E Housing high densi Ej Industry Overview pane The overview pane displays the entire modelled region When the map is zoomed in a rectangle is displayed that indicates the area displayed in the map pane You can drag this rectangle to move the view of the map Map pane The map pane in the Land use map window displays the land use map for the current simulation year This is a raster map that displays the predominant land use for each cell When a simulation is running the Land use map window will be updated after each time step Right clicking inside the map pane will display a context menu Click Cell information on this menu to list the land use and district in the exact cell you right clicked on You can also access the same information by using t
275. nd use functions and static elements called land use features Land use features will not change as the result of local scale dynamics They do not change location but influence the dynamics of the land use functions and thus affect the general allocation process For example a land use function Beach tourism will be strongly influenced by the presence or absence of the land use feature Beach Clearly raising the number of states in the CA will increase in theory at the least the number of possible state transitions of each cell and defining the transition rules of the model will become more cumbersome Again it requires special attention on behalf of the model developer to keep this complexity within limits It is useful to distinguish between land uses if and only if these land uses behave differently in space If however their spatial dynamic is very similar then land uses can just as well be combined into a single land use function The neighbourhood effect The fundamental idea of a CA is that the state of a cell at any time depends on the states of the cells within its neighbourhood Thus a neighbourhood effect must be calculated for each of the land use function states to which the cell could be converted 172 In our models the neighbourhood effect represents the attraction positive and repulsion negative effects of the various land uses and land covers within the neighbourhood see figure 3 2 Attract
276. nd use model 169 LU Land use of cell y at time MBB Land Use MBB Spatial indicators Metronamica ML and LUT MBB Regional interaction Metronamica LUT MBB Transport References Engelen G White R Uljee I 1997 Integrating Constrained Cellular Automata Models GIS and Decision Support Tools for Urban Planning and Policy Making In Decision Support Systems in Urban planning Edited by H Timmermans Chapman amp Hall Part II Engelen G White R Uljee I Drazan P 1995 Using Cellular Automata for Integrated Modelling of Socio environmental Systems Environmental monitoring and Assessment 30 203 214 White R Engelen G Uljee I 1997 The Use of Constrained Cellular Automata for High Resolution Modelling of Urban Land Use Dynamics Environment and Planning B Part II 24 323 343 White R Engelen G 1997 Cellular Automata as the Basis of Integrated Dynamic Regional Modelling Environment and Planning B 24 235 246 White R Engelen G 1993 Cellular Automata and Fractal Urban Form A Cellular Modelling Approach to the Evolution of Urban Land Use Patterns Environment and Planning A 25 8 1175 1199 White R Engelen G 1993 Cellular Dynamics and GIS Modelling Spatial Complexity Geographical Systems 1 2 3 1 2 Cellular Automata Cellular automata CA get their name from the fact that they consist of cells like the cells on a checkerboard and that cell states may evolve accordin
277. ndent costs part of the dialog window you can select your mode of interest on the dropdown list next to Transportation mode The aversion in the transport model is the aversion against transport over this mode The aversion costs per mode expresses how much people dislike travelling with this transport mode in terms of currency The aversion costs from one zone origin to one zone destination are determined on the base of the urbanisation of the zone origin and the urbanisation of the zone destination You can view or edit the aversion costs for the selected transportation mode by clicking on your cell of interest in the Aversion costs table and entering a new value 153 You can view or edit the fixed costs per destination zone in terms of currency by means of the selected transportation mode in the Fixed costs per zone table on the lower left part of the dialog window In general you can consider the parking costs as the fixed costs The aversion costs and the fixed costs for the selected mode are constant over time The distance costs time costs and additional fixed costs could differ over time during the simulation Hence you can add new time or delete time non start time for the corresponding parameter by clicking the Add time button or the Delete time button on the right hand side For more information about adding time or deleting time see the section Production and attraction Then you can edit the values for the
278. ndow opens Navigate the infrastructure network map stored that you want to import and double click on it Note that the infrastructure network should be in shp or bin format and contain a field named Acctype For the network shape file in point format you need to convert it to polyline format before you import it as an infrastructure layer gt Press the OK button in the Add new map dialog window The newly added infrastructure network appears on the list New Metronamica project wizard Enter your infrastructure networks Add new map Map name Roads network Filename E RIKS Netherlands_ML Wetwork_Maps Roz S If you have multiple network layers e g roads network railway network or stations repeat the steps above to add more layers to the list 24 New Metronamica project wizard Enter your infrastructure networks Ramps E RIKS Netherlands_ML Network_Maps Ramps_lines shp Roads_network E RIKS Netherlands_ML Network_Maps Roads_network shp Stations E RIKS Netherlands_ML Network_Maps Stations_lines shp Waterways E RIKS Netherlands_ML Network_Maps Waterways shp gt Select one of the infrastructure networks The Edit button and Remove button on the right side of the window become available gt You can edit the map name and change the file via Edit button and you can delete the selected map by clicking the Remove button
279. ndow will appear v In the Maps to log select the land use map Entire model Land use model Land use Land use map Change the MCK log file if you want to store the maps in a different folder Enter a Simulation name that is equal to the active integrated scenario Baseline Click the Generate button and change the settings to generate log moments Click the OK button in the Generate log moments window VV VV V Make sure the Turn logging off after last log moment option is selected If it is not you risk overwriting previously logged maps By automatically turning off the logging at the end of a simulation run you will have to manually turn it back on when you run e g a different integrated scenario At that time all you need to change in the Log settings window is the Simulation name By choosing a unique name you will prevent overwriting previously logged maps gt Click the Turn logging on button Log maps on the Options menu will now be checked to indicate that maps will be logged when you run a simulation gt Click the Reset button on the toolbar When the simulation is reset click the Run button to run the simulation till the end year gt Go to Main window Analysis gt Map Comparison gt Click the Start MCK button The Map Comparison Kit will open with the log file that you selected before in the Log settings windo
280. ne Click the Edit legend button to preview or change the legend see the section Legend editor Click the OK button The zoning plan will be added to the list in the Plans and categories tab of the zoning tool The categories in the zoning plan will be added to the bottom of the table on the Category precedence tab The default settings of these categories will be such that they have no influence on the zoning maps that are calculated by the system If you later change the legend of the zoning plan the settings for these categories will be reset to their defaults so make sure the legend you enter is correct before you click the OK button v 76 gt You can view the imported zoning plan by selecting it on the Plans and categories tab and clicking the Show button Edit zoning plan Name AISA EEEE Map file _E RIKS Randstad_SL_Zoningtool Zoning_Base_ EJ Legend Use existing legend Protected natural areas y Make new legend To edit an existing zoning plan gt Go to Main window Drivers Zoning Plans and categories gt Select the zoning plan you would like to edit gt Click the Edit button Change the settings in the window that pops up and click the OK button to confirm The information in the zoning tool will be updated If you have changed the legend of the zoning plan or if you have selected a different legend the settings on the Category prec
281. ng as there is enough land use change between them Typically 10 to 15 year intervals are used with the final year as recent as possible In the following we refer to them as Base year and Base year2 253 4 1 3 Resolution of the land use model Resolution of the spatial data can be chosen in the range 50m to 1000m depending on the precise purpose of the model the data available and the size of the region modelled Although technically coarser or finer resolutions are possible it does not represent the scope of the model and its explorative character Typically urban areas are modelled at 100m while regional applications use 200m to 500m cell sizes 4 1 4 Length of typical simulation runs Define for what years into the future should the model produce results The length of simulation runs 1s typically run for 20 30 years could be longer but the results will become more uncertain In the following we refer to this as Horizon year 4 1 5 Land use types modelled at the local level Technically the number of land uses is limited to 50 of which functions should be 16 or less Besides the availability of data one should consider the intended application when deciding on the amount of land use classes Besides the more classes there are defined the more changing land use is needed over the calibration to achieve a proper calibration 4 1 6 Sectors modelled at the regional level This is only required for Metronamica ML and Metronamic
282. nitial network layers are listed in the table by Network layer name You can adapt an initial network layer for the specific layer by clicking on the browse button next of the specific layer and selecting the file that you want to upload You can also view and edit the selected initial network map by clicking the Show Edit selected button The Parameters part is on the lower part on the Networks tab You can select your network of interest on the dropdown list next to Network layer gt Click the Add button to import a network change at a specific time for the selected network gt Click the Remove button to delete a network change at a specific time for the selected network 149 gt Click the Show Edit selected button to a network change at a specific time for the selected network These operations work similarly with the operations described in the section Importing a network Production and attraction Any activity in the transport zone causes number of origin trips which 1s so called production Any activity in the transport zone causes number of destination trips which is so called attraction The dialog window on the Production attraction tab gives access to the parameters used in the Production and attractions step and display the output Transport model EEr Parameters Networks Production attraction Distribution modal split Costs Assignment Zonal accessibility Ir 1 gt Parameters
283. nk This is for example toll costs It is expressed as a double value represented in currency This costs 1s for the whole link regardless the travelling speed or distance Preintens finally is an optional field 1 e it doesn t need to be present to run a simulation The value in this field represents the number of mode equivalents per hour on a given link which are additional to those computed by the model This can for example represent traffic that is originating outside the modelled zone but still passing through If fields are left empty in the database the model fills in dummy values itself This will make sure that the model will not give error reports However these dummy values will not give any meaningful results so it is up to the user to check the data 262 The roads network map as used in the transport module consists of links In order to compute transport traffic flows over these links links must be connected if they are connected in reality This means that every road segment needs to be defined separately like every part between two junctions crossings or every segment with a separate speed limit or capacity Transport networks can be directed or not When a network is directed it means that cars can only pass in one direction while on undirected networks cars can pass in both directions In directed networks most roads actually need to be represented twice once for each direction Naturally actual roads are direc
284. nk in the Urban expansion map window Forested areas The indicator is a predefined land use change indicator The forested areas indicator shows where forest has disappeared and has appeared since the start of the simulation and which cells are forest for the current year of the simulation It shows both a change over time and a state The Forested areas tab is structured by the Parameters and Output parts 132 Spatial indicators recreation Soil sealing Urban expansion Forested areas Abandoned land Habitat fragmentation 4 gt Indicator type Land use change indicator Calculate Parameters Other agricu Pastures Forest Deforestation Afforestation 93 12 51 35 42 When you created the project with the wizard you had defined which land uses were forest group for the environmental indicator For more information see the section Entering the basic land use model parameter In the Parameters part you can still set whether a land use contributes to the forest or not and set the weight of each land use e The value 0 represents from non forest change to non forest e The value represents from forest change to forest e The value 2 represents forest disappeared from forest change to non forest e The value 3 represents forest appeared from non forest change to forest In the Output part you can observe the cell counts of forest deforestation and afforestation region in the table You can also open the
285. nsport assignment outputs Operating speed of link of the road Transport network during time period tp at assignment time t tT Intens Intensity of link of the road cars hour Transport we network during time period tp at assignment time Transport CG Congestion Congestion of link of the road est network during time period tp at assignment time y SpeedMin Minimal operating speed of link Lof km h Transport mn the road network during the day at assignment time IntensMax Maximum intensity of link of the cars hour Transport road network during the day at time assignment t CongestMax Maximum congestion of link of the Transport road network during the day at time indicators t Generalised Generalised cost per trip to go from Distribution and cost the origin zone z to the destination modal split zone Za by mode m during time Transport period p at time t indicators MBB Regional interaction Trip Generalised distance per trip to go Transport distance from the origin zone z to the indicators destination zone zz by mode m during time period tp at time t Trip Generalised duration per trip to go Transport duration from the origini zone z to the indicators destination zone zg by mode m during time period tp at time t SAT Accessibility Accessibility sub type of link on Local i subtype the road network at time t accessibility Table 3 111 Transport assignment internal variables Description
286. nthetic value is calculated over all cells of the map a sum weighted sum or average of all cells depending on the algorithm This value is represented as an index value in a time chart that is also accessible via the dialogue window e Finally the indicator maps can be written to a log file or animated GIF file The log files can be opened by means of the MAP COMPARISON KIT enabling the analysis of changes in the indicator maps generated within a single run or 19 in different runs of the model The animations are automatically stored on the hard disk and available after the simulation as animated GIF files that can be opened and viewed with any graphical viewer or internet browser program The system includes the pre defined spatial indicators From the above it will be clear that the user can also define a set of new indicators based on the algorithms currently available in the models or he can extend or modify a list of existing indicators This is done by means of the Spatial indicators dialogue window see the section Spatial indicator models Assumptions Some indicator algorithms use a search radius or target cluster radius defined in terms of a number of cells This means that the indicator will work within a neighbourhood of the cell being analysed that has a radius equal to the value of this parameter The neighbourhood is defined analogous to that of the neighbourhood effect in the land use model Hence the resulting area is ci
287. o be allocated to a sector by modelling the average activity per cell in a region this is known as the productivity The number of cells allocated to each sector can in turn be converted to a number of cells that needs to be allocated to each land use class note that sectors and land use classes are not necessarily equivalent This is related to the allocation algorithm of the MBB Land Use Overview productivity model block Purpose and use This model block determines the productivity of a sector in a region 1 e the number of jobs or people per cell Process description The productivity takes into account the assumption of a continuous growth Further the productivity depends on its own past For instance if the productivity was high last year it is likely to be high this year as well Another factor in the determination of the productivity is the growth of activity A last factor is the so called crowding effect This occurs if the number of cells in a region is not sufficient anymore to accommodate the demand for cells Algorithm The function which determines the value of the output variable looks as follows t O3 k yy _ W g S ly Aii O O5 y eg ee EE Oe ki Ty i ki 0 k i EYE where W lt constitutes the initial value k i Parameters input and output Table 3 76 Parameters used in the productivity model block Wmin Minimum Minimum guaranteed level of cell Number of Calibration produc
288. o compute categorical zoning maps The algorithm to compute the categorical zoning maps Z can be described as follows 185 For each time that is either the start time of the simulation or is set as start or end ime for one of the classes Initialise the zoning maps Z for each land use function f e F with all no data values For each class r ordered by O descending If o lt t lt i For each f eF If ZS no data For each cell c for which B 1 Zp ZS End for End if End for End if End for Algorithm to compute numerical zoning maps for total potential calculation For each cell c For each f eF Let u indicate the current land use in cell c If Z no data t _ ZV max DFZ f V a Else Z Ve End if End for Parameters input and output Table 3 19 Zoning parameters Source A categorical map represents the spation plan p GUI The start time of category r Calibration The end time of category r Calibration The zoning status for land use function fand category Calibration r oO The order of domination for category r Calibration DFZ 7 De Facto zoning The De Facto status of land use function fon land use Calibration l indicating if land use function f is always allowed to develop in areas where land use occurs value 1 or not value 0 f Zoning status The value that needs to be assigned to zoning status s Calibration value for land use functio
289. o describe transport system and how it evolves through time For assessment purposes as well as model integration additional variables are derived These variables we call indicators The indicators summarize the transport system at various spatial levels Generalized cost For the transport indicators the generalized cost between regions and zones are aggregated over modes and time period The integrations take place according to the following equations c IR r laz z e Taz z ipee LO FZR s FZR OD D FZR Fo F4 tp Zo Zd AP Ce D Z922q P f Zo Zd P tp Yq 4P t Reg gt FZR f FZR OD tmRegm __ t Jf a UL l C MY p o gt FZR Zo FZR Zd C Zd Lp D Zo Zq o g 2 2 FZR a FZR 2a D Os Farg tp m tp py Reg m hid if F FJ lp gt 0 ry tp m tp t Re m ip Cl ord 2 ko Farg tp m tp it gt Reg m _ gt gt tprReg m ei T Fj tp m tp m ip 242 2D op Zo an D n a aa D 4 DNP Caw t Zone __ Zo 04d if 2 OD sa Y m tp Parameters input and output Table 3 112 Input variables I a ainsi RN i cell c bi a ea a e a r Ee number of the specified cell c zone map Trip Number of trips between origin zone trips hour Distribution and distribution z and destination zone z4 for mode modal split m in time period tp per hour at time t Generalised Generalised cost per trip to
290. ocation For example a Function Tourism would be influenced expressed by a spatial interaction rule by the occurrence of the Feature Beach due to the simple fact that tourist tend to recreate near the sea at the beach Overview The Land use model dialog window has been grouped in so called Control pane and Content pane which are indicated in the red and in the blue frame respectively in the figure depicted below 2 at on ma mms nd use Industry w Land use type Function Tan Use Meonboumiood Access uitaDility oning Control pane Input Initial land use map 3 Metronamica Randstad SL Data u2000 asc Show Edit Land use changes Time Map Add time 2000 Jan 01 J Remove time Show curent land use map and selected changes Parameters Content pane Random coefficient 0 7 Random seed Variable Fixed to Total potential formula Vacants TP I S Functions TP 1 dog 1 random alpha N if N gt 0 A S 2Z 2 Output Show total potential map Show curent land use map In the control pane you can select a land use class of interest in the land use model from the dropdown list next to Land use The selected land use type is displayed on the right side of the control pane The content pane is structured by tabs Each tab has its own dialog window allowing you to set parameter values and view results The content of these dialog windows for t
291. odes of transportation like public transport These modes can be subdivided per public transport mode As such public transport can for example be subdivided in buses and trains Urbanisation class Each transport zone will be appointed to an urbanization class degree according to population density job density and provided boundaries We recommend having three urbanization degrees to point out differences of urbanisation areas high medium and low urbanisation class Congestion category The congestion category will be used to show the transport indicators The lower bound for each congestion category expresses the fraction of road capacity The higher value represents the road is much busier The lower bound of congestion for each category could be changed according to the indicators 260 4 5 2 Overview data for the transport model Data on transportation can be used in two ways in the transport model First there is the initial setup second there is the actual calibration Ideally data for the initial setup should be derived from real world data The main data required to setup and calibrate the transport model are as following Their detailed descriptions are provided in the following the sections e Transport zone map e Transport network maps including all network available roads urban train maritime and aqueducts networks etc e Transport network changes maps e Number of trip origins and trip destinations per activity
292. of people R Neighbourhood The neighbourhood effect of land MBB Land Use C map use function f in cell c Neighbourhood potential t Land use map The current land use map the land MBB Land Use f c use that occupies cell c at time t Land use K Suitability map The suitability effect of land use MBB Land fs function fin cell c at time Use Suitability 205 Numeric zoning The zoning effect of land use MBB Land Use function fin cell c at time t Zoning sce The accessibility effect of land use MBB Land Use function fin cell c at time t Accessibility e Distance between region i and Metronamica ML distance region j at time t Default value or specified by user Generalised costs from the origin Currency Metronamica LUT region i to the destination region j MBB Transport at time t Output Table 3 46 Output given in the Regional interaction model ty Activity The activity in sector k and regioni Number of MBB Transport ee at time t people or jobs GUI menetors Migration The migration The number of Number of people in sector k that move from people or jobs region i to region j at time t Cell The cell demand of land use Number of ae i demands function fin region i at time t cells MBR MBB Land Use Mij References 3 3 2 Activity Purpose and use This model block keeps track of the level of activity 1 e the number of jobs and people in economic and population sectors respectivel
293. of car equivalents of a unit of a cargo equivalent vehicle ist Mees ieelpummepatiney trips of purpose p at time t gt ee ee a E destinations trip destinations for trips of purpose p Table 3 101 Input variables TA Level of transport activity Regional activities to transport zonal activity a in zone z at activities time Local activities to transport zonal activities UC Urbanisation class of Urbanization level i zone z at time t Table 3 102 Output variables QP Trip origins Number of trip origins for zone z trips hour Distribution and 2p purpose p in time period tp per hour at modal split time G P tp nz P tp Trip Number of trip destinations for zone trips hour Distribution and destinations z4 purpose p in time period tp per modal split hour at time t Table 3 103 Intermediate variables 230 Multiplier to include the effects of mobility growth j Production and time period prevalence time period duration attraction conversion of cargo trips to normal trips and mode sharing for purpose p during time period fp at time t Intermediate unbalanced value for the number of trips hour Production and trip origins per hour for zone z purpose p in time attraction period tp at time t Intermediate unbalanced value for the number of trips hour Production and trip destinations per hour for zone z purpose p in attraction time period p at time t TTP Total number of trips per hour for pu
294. of the initial cell counts and the initial activity In this way the regional interaction model uses the consistent information from the initial land use map and the initial activity Lower bound and upper bound for socio economic sector If the economic sector or population sector is selected the Lower bound and Upper bound on the dropdown list under Input become available Since the lower bound and upper bound work in a similar way we use the lower bound as example at here The minimum level of activity restricted for a region means 1f the actual activity in this region is smaller than the lower bound the regional model takes the lower bound as the activity for this region The difference between the actual activity in this region and the lower bound will be compensated by other regions which meet the restricted condition as well In this way the sum of the activities for all regions keeps consistent with the total activity obtained from the macro economic model or defined externally On the opposite the maximum level of activity restricted for a region means if the actual activity in this region is bigger than the upper bound the regional model takes the upper bound as the activity for this region Change made on the lower bound or upper bound in the regional interaction model reflects directly to the regional trend under the External factor the section For more information see the section How to adapt values for external factors 140
295. ollowing options are available Minimum Maximum Arithmetic mean Weighted arithmetic mean Geometric mean Weighted geometric mean For more information about the algorithm see section Suitability gt You can view the final suitability map for the selected land use by clicking the Preview suitability map button Now you should save the changes you made on the suitability Since the suitability parameters are not part of the policy drivers you cannot save the new setting in a new scenario In this case you need to save the new setting in a new project file For more information see description about Save project as in the section Saving a project Without the Suitability tool Click the Suitability tab to access the contents depicted as the figure below 120 and use model Land use Neighbourhood Accessibility Suitability Zoning Input Maximum suitability for all land uses 10 Import from Overlay Tool Te e E a e a a 2000 1 KS Netherlands_ML Data Suitability_Industry rst It is important to keep the default names of these suitability maps which are assigned by the OVERLAY TOOL in the case you can import one or all suitability maps generated by OVERLAY TOOL by clicking the Import from Overlay Tool button In the Import Overlay Tool maps dialog window enter the time for which you want to import the suitability maps select the location where you stored all suitability map
296. olumn for the land use of interest Select one of the types from the list You need to determine the land use group for each land use for creating the environmental indicators Click on the dropdown list in the Environmental group column for the land use of interest Select one of the groups from the list urban forest natural non forest and other You need to determine the land use group for each land use for creating the social economic indicators Click on the dropdown list in the Social economic group column for the land use of interest Select one of the groups from the list work residential recreation and other For more information about the indicators see the section Visualising indicators 11 New Metronamica project wizard Enter the basic land use model parameters Map size 140 x 180 rows x columns Cell size 500 meters Initial land use map E RIKS Randstad_SL Landuse_Maps Landuse_2000 asc Land use classes Value Class name Colour Type Environmental group Socio economic group 7 Services BE Func Y Urban M Work 8 Socal cultural uses BE marc Y Urban M Work 9 Forest BE morc Forest Y Other 10 Wetlands DF rare Y Natural non f Other 12 Recreation land B aur Y Natural non f Recreational 13 Airport E reat Y Other Other 14 Fresh water Feat Other Other 15 Salt water ae Y Other V Other 16 v v v v 11 Dryland nature BE car Y Natura
297. om Removing an user defined indicator When the use defined indicator is selected the Remove selected indicator button becomes available You can remove the selected user defined indicator by clicking the Remove selected indicator button on the top of the dialog window One message window appears Click the Yes button to remove the selected user defined indicator GEONAMICA YD Are you sure you want to delete the indicator New duster indicator Ls JIL ne Renaming an user defined indicator When the use defined indicator is selected the Rename selected indicator button becomes available You can rename the selected user defined indicator by clicking the Rename selected indicator button on the top of the dialog window The Rename indicator dialog window opens Enter the new name in the text box next to New indicator name Click the OK button to close the Rename indicator dialog window The new name is displayed on tab of the Spatial indicator models dialog window 137 Rename indicator 138 Regional interaction model To access the modeller user interface for the Regional interaction model gt Go to the Drivers tab of the Main window gt Click the Parameters icon in the navigation pane on the left side of the window The system diagram is displayed in the content pane on the right side of the window gt Click the Regional interaction MBB box at the Regional level in t
298. omatically selected and you clear it there is a risk that METRONAMICA may crash while using the new project If you select the check box you may want to change the cache folder for map data see section Raster map cache folder gt Click the Finish button when you are ready to save your new project to the specified location Your new project will be opened automatically 29 New Metronamica project wizard Almost done Project name Randstad Select the directory where you want to save your new project in C Documents and Settings yshi My Documents Geonamica Metronamica Support large maps slower but enables the use of large maps The METRONAMICA will be started and you will see the METRONAMICA application window on your screen where is the project name that you entered in the last step After the project is set up all the maps that are used during setting up the project file will be copied in folder Data Opening the project file If you have already had your project file geoproj on your computer and you have imported your licence file for METRONAMICA you can open your project file as following steps For more information about how to import the licence file see the section Importing the licence file For more information about how to create a new project see the section Creating a new project file for Metronamica SL or see the section Creating a new project file for Metronamica ML gt
299. on class by clicking the cell in the table and entering a new name or a new value The first urbanization classes should be entered in descending order of activity The lower bound of the lowest urbanization class must be 0 in terms of activity Networks The dialog window is displayed as depicted in the figure below if you click the Networks tab of the Transport model dialog window Transport model Eel Parameters Networks Production attraction Distribution modal split Costs Assignment Zonal accessibility Indicators qd gt Input Transport zones map nds_LUT Pata Transport_Zones rst Show Edit A Network layer Initial network map Ramps E RIKS Netherlands_LUT Data Ramps_lines shp Roads_network E RIKS Netherlands_LUT Data Roads_network shp Stations E RIKS Netherlands_LUT Data Stations_lines shp Waterways E RIKS Netherlands LUT Data Waterways shp Show Edit selected Parameters Network layer Roads_network Network changes Time Name Incremental File On the top of the dialog window on the Networks tab the default file name and path of the transport zones map display You can adapt a transport zones map by clicking on the browse button on the right side and selecting the file that you want to upload You can view or edit the transport zone map that 1s used in the system by clicking on the Show Edit button on the right side The default file names and file paths for the i
300. onfigure the anticipation to changes in the zoning status e You can specify the type of anticipation on the drop down list next to Type The type of anticipation includes linear by default and S shape e You can specify the size of this effect of anticipation in the text box next to Coefficient A value of the size of effect smaller than 1 but larger than 0 will cause a more delayed transition and a value larger than 1 will cause an earlier transition e This zoning anticipation acknowledges that before zoning measures are released already the first developments can start You can view the numerical zoning map by clicking the Show numerical zoning map button at the bottom of Zoning tab The Numerical zoning map for the selected land use map window opens as depicted in the figure below Spatial indicator models Indicators are instruments that are able to transform the output of the models in the system to measure and represent specifiable spatial characteristics You can use the indicators to get more insight in the results of a simulation or to analyse the adherence to preset guidelines In METRONAMICA indicators are thus calculated on a yearly basis and are available in the model in the form of dynamic maps and numeric outputs To access the modeller user interface for the Spatial indicators model gt Go to Main window Drivers Parameters Spatial indicators The Spatial indicators dialog window op
301. ore button to enter a name and description for the new sub scenario gt Enter the integrated scenario name and update the description 52 gt Click the Save button to save the project Exporting a project When you save a project as explained in the section Saving a project you overwrite the project file This is no problem for the drivers since you can save different values in different sub scenarios But for all the other parameters accessible from the Parameters page in the Main window you can only save one value in a project Therefore to save different values for these drivers e g while calibrating you need to save different project files This is possible when you select Save project as from the File menu to save the project However caution 1s advised when using this option because different project files will share the same data stored in external files e g maps A good guideline to follow in this situation is to always reset the simulation before saving the project METRONAMICA also provides the option to save a project together with all required external data files e g maps This option is convenient when you want to copy your project to a different computer gt Select Export project from the File menu If you have made any changes since the last save the Save project dialog will pop up asking you to save your changes This works the same as explained in the section Saving a
302. ort map dialog window opens Enter a Name Click the browse button inside the Map box The Open map dialog window opens Navigate to the map that you want to import and click the Open button Select an existing legend or create a new one Click the Edit legend button to preview or change the legend see the section Legend editor Click the OK button in the Import map dialog window The newly added map will be displayed immediately on the list of maps As long as you added an ancillary map Ancillary maps group will be displayed on the Maps menu At the same time ancillary maps will be added automatically to the trees of maps under the contingency table tool see the section Contingency table tool for more information Viewing ancillary maps gt gt 161 Go to Maps menu Ancillary maps Double click the map of interest The map window for the selected map opens Metronamica Randstad aaa 5 Land u GE Editing ancillary maps gt Go to Maps menu Manage ancillary maps The Ancillary maps dialog window opens gt Select the ancillary map of interest from the list of maps gt Click on the Edit map properties button The Edit map properties dialog window opens gt You can alter the display name for the selected file in the text box next to Name gt You can change the map file by clicking on the browse button inside of the Map box gt Click the OK but
303. p as input See the MAP COMPARISON KIT user manual for a more detailed description of the measures of spatial patterns Algorithm See the MAP COMPARISON KIT user manual for a description of the measures of spatial patterns Parameters input and output The measure of spatial patterns to use 3 3 MBB Regional interaction 3 3 1 Description MBB Regional interaction Objective This model divides the total population jobs in main economic sectors for the whole study area over the regions based on their relative attractiveness User information Table 3 42 User information in the Regional interaction model Drivers and Links to from other MBB Impacts External Social economic trend number of jobs in main economic sectors per region influences population per region MBB Land Use information on physical suitability available space accessibility and spatial configuration Metronamica LUT MBB Transport generalised costs from the origin region to the destination region Policy options Options of restricting the level of activity Other user options Weighing factors for the calculation of the attractivity and the productivity Policy indicators Number of people and population density per region Number of jobs and their density in main economic sector per region General information Table 3 43 General information in the Regional interaction model Type of information Type of model Spatial interaction model gravity
304. pe of information Type of model Constrained cellular automata simulation Application All cells Spatial resolution Depending on the application case from 50 to 1000 meter Temporal resolution Process description In METRONAMICA applications the whole modelling area is represented as a mosaic of grid cells each occupied with a specific land use All cells together constitute the land use pattern of the study area In principle it is the relative attractiveness of a cell as viewed by a particular spatial agent as well as the local constraints and opportunities that cause cells to change from one type of land use to another Changes in land use at the local level are driven by four important factors see Figure below 166 Physical suitability represented by one map per land use vacant and land use function modelled The term suitability is used here to describe the degree to which a cell is fit to support a particular land use function and the associated economic or residential activity for a particular activity Suitability maps are constructed based on physical characteristics of the location Suitability maps remain constant during the simulation for land use vacants and land use functions unless new suitability maps for specific times are imported The static suitability maps are described in the Suitability the section of this chapter Zoning or institutional suitability represented by one map per land use function modelled
305. porary files folder When you open a project that has support for large raster maps enabled you need to make sure that the selected folder is located on a hard disk with ample free space 2 5 5 Windows menu You can use the Window menu to arrange or activate one of the opened windows in METRONAMICA Arrange multiple opened windows in an overlapped fashion Tile horizontal Arrange multiple opened windows one above another in a non overlapped fashion Tile vertical Arrange multiple opened windows side by side in a non overlapped fashion Arrange the icons for minimized windows at the bottom of the screen List of Windows Active the selected window on the list of opened windows 2 5 6 Help menu You can use the Help menu to open the integrated help functionality of METRONAMICA or to access troubleshooting information Index Open the integrated help functionality Section HelpError Reference source not found Open the Licence window Section Licence Check for updates Check if a newer version of METRONAMICA Section Checking for is available updates Open the About window Section About 164 3 Model description This chapter describes each model building blocks MBB included in the system The variables used in each MBB are listed by the categories parameters input output internal variables Parameters refer to variables that are editable and can be configured by the user nput refers to variables calculated by other MBB in th
306. prise a different concept and should be combined differently For negative effects the local accessibility per link type can be interpreted as the extent to which the land use remains unhindered by the presence of the transport network If a land use is not hindered by the presence of one link type it can still be hindered by the presence of another link type Hence the total negative local accessibility is determined by the product of the local accessibilities per link type with negative distance decay where the link types are given a weight expressing their relative importance The total negative local accessibility can then be treated the same as a positive effect For positive effects the local accessibility per link type can be interpreted as the extent to which the need of a land use for the presence of the transport network can be fulfilled by that link type If this need cannot be totally fulfilled by one link type then the remaining part can be fulfilled by another link type and so on Hence the total local accessibility can be interpreted as the extent to which the need for presence of the transport network of a land use can be fulfilled by any of the link types where the link types are given a weight expressing their relative importance Note that the order in which we examine the link types in this approach is irrelevant This becomes clear if we turn things around The extent to which the need for presence of the transport networ
307. project only when you click the Save button your project will not be saved immediately but first the Export project dialog will pop up If you did not make any changes the Export project dialog will pop up immediately when you export a project It looks similar to the image depicted below Export project Project file Legend files folder C Documents and Settings User My Documents Geonamica Metronamica Randstad SL Leger Other files Model block Description File name Model Infrastructure NetworkLayers_Current_0_network C Documents and Settings User My Doc NetworkLayers_Initial_0 network C Documents and Settings User My Doc Initial_land_use RasterMap_map C Documents and Settings User My Doc Land_use LanduseMap_Current_map C Documents and Settings User My Doc LanduseMap_Initial_map C Documents and Settings User My Doc LanduseDelta_2000 Jan 0100 00 00_map RegionMap_map C Documents and Settings User My Doc NumericalFactors_0 Legend C Documents and Settings User My Doc NumericalFactors_0_2000 Jan 0100 00 00_map C Documents and Settings User My Doc NumericalFactors_1 Legend C Documents and Settings User My Doc OOOOH OOOOH NumericalFactors_1_2000 Jan 0100 00 00_map C Documents and Settings User My Doc v The table on the dialog lists the file names of all external data files that are used by the project Each file name can be changed individually or you can copy pa
308. r Other Land use dass 7 Es Vacant Y Other Other Land use dass 8 E Vacant Other Other Land use dass 9 Other Other WN arma ane geen 17 Methane Mth ne lt Back Next gt Cancel You need to edit names for each land use class by clicking on the text box of interesting in the Class name column and entering a new name 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 w CE nEnKn Sades lt J_ Engan Gods You can edit the legend for each land use class by clicking on the cell of interest in the Legend colour column The Colors dialog window opens Select the colour of interest and press the OK button in the Colors dialog window The new selected colour is displayed for the land use of interest You can also edit the legends for the land use map via the user interface after setting up the METRONAMICA project For more information see the section Legend editor In Metronamica the land use is classified in types or categories some of which are modelled dynamically while others remain static Vacant states are classes that are only changing as a result of other land use dynamics Functions are land use classes that are actively modelled Features are land use classes that are not supposed to change in the simulation For more information about the land use states see the section Land use classes gt gt You need to determine the land use type for each land use in this step Click on the dropdown list in the Type c
309. r Remove time buttons next to the table gt Go to Main window Drivers Parameters Land use Land use tab gt Click the Add time button A window will pop up where you can enter the time you want to add to the time series 48 Times are displayed and entered in METRONAMICA in the format yyyy mmm dd hh mm ss Months are represented by the first three letters of the month s name Note that everything after the first part is optional For example if you enter 2015 in the Enter date and time window and click the OK button the time 2015 Jan 01 00 00 00 will be added to the time series Table The table editor enables you to enter a series of numerical values You can select cells by clicking or dragging in the table Click a row or column heading to select an entire row or column Click the top left header to select the entire table Press Ctrl C to copy the contents of the table or press Ctr V to paste copied values into the table This way you can easily exchange data between METRONAMICA and Excel or a text editor Note that the values are copied as text so if you copy data from Excel to Metronamica you will loose precision if the number of displayed decimals in Excel is not set to a high enough value Input maps Input maps are represented in the user interface by their file name There is also a button that you can click to display the map You can import a different map by simply changing th
310. r land use Managing infrastructure layers The input of the Accessibility component of the land use model is the Infrastructure layers You can access the detailed infrastructure information by clicking the Go to infrastructure layers button in the Input part Depending on the METRONAMICA configuration different dialog window will open where the infrastructure layers and the changes work in a similar way for both cases e For Metronamica LUT clicking this button opens the Networks tab in the Transport model dialog window For more information see the section Networks e For Metronamica SL and Metronamica ML clicking this button opens the Infrastructure layers dialog window In this section we use the Infrastructure layers dialog window as an example to explain how to work with the infrastructure network layers 108 Infrastructure layers SEE Input Network layer Initial network map Ramps E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data Ramps_lines shp Roads_network E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data Roads_network shp Stations E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data Stations_lines shp Waterways E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data Waterways shp Show Edit selected Parameters Network layer Roads_network v Network changes Time Name Incremental File 2010 Jan 01 Expansion_2010 V E RIKS Wetherlands_ML Datayoad_expansion_2010 shp Initial network layers On the top of the dialog window the default file names and file paths for
311. ransport Analysis Zone number of the Transport zone map specified cell c The land use of the specified cell x y at time t ne o o o Set of vacant states used in the land use map Set of functions used in the land use map Set of features used in the land use map Table 3 94 Activity conversion output variables Unit Set of transport activities Activity Urbanization level Level of transport activity a in zone z at time Activity Production and attraction Transport indicators time t ell t TA DA a FA The proportion of a cell with land use function Zonal accessibility f a sa f that is considered in activity a Table 3 95 Activity conversion intermediate variables 226 LUA The associated transport activity belonging to Activity Urbanization level the specificed land use lu 3 4 4 Urbanization level Purpose and use Urban and rural areas have different characteristics and behaviour regarding transport A classification of the urbanization level of the different transport zones is used throughout the model to make this distinction Process description Density of activities is a good indicator of urbanization level Different types of activity contribute to the overall urbanization level Algorithm The classification of urbanization level is based on the weighted sum of activity densities DW gt DA_ WA The urbanization level of a zone depends DW_on the density of peopl
312. rcular only by approximation as depicted in figure 3 6 8 88G Figure 3 6 Areas belonging to search radii of 0 1 1 42 2 2 24 2 83 and 3 respectively Constraints e Some indicators require an additional map ancillary map to be specified as one of the parameters Equation rules or algorithm As indicators are model blocks the outline of each sub section will follow that of other model blocks The equations used in the spatial indicator models are described in the sub sections of this section which give a description of the different indicator algorithms that are currently available in the system The contents will however be more general since we are describing categories of indicators and not actual indicators which are comprised of the category of indicator and a set of parameter values for that category of indicator Parameters Table 3 31 Parameters used in the spatial indicators model Name Description Source Search radius The minimum size of a cluster This can range from 0 to 25 The User defined cells for cluster default value is 0 indicator Road is obstacle Determines whether a road can intersect a cluster checked or not User defined unchecked By default this is unchecked Target for Specifies whether a land use contributes to the cluster size User defined cluster indicator checked or not unchecked By default this is unchecked 192 Name Description Source Search radius cells
313. re e Regional level Regional interaction regional interaction model e Local level Land use land use model e Local level Spatial indicators spatial indicator models For Metronamica LUT MBBs is structured by two spatial levels local level and regional level The MBBs incorporated are e Regional level Transport transport model e Regional level Regional interaction regional interaction model e Local level Land use land use model e Local level Spatial indicators spatial indicators model 2 4 2 Model Building Blocks MBBs Model Building Blocks are represented in the system diagrams by means of a rectangle with the name of the MBB displayed in it Land use An active MBB is represented in black When you move the mouse pointer over such a block its colours becomes inverted Next if you click on it a dialog window opens This dialog window is the graphic user interface of the MBB It has the function to receive the user input and to display the model output 2 4 3 Connectors and connections Variables and parameter values can be passed from one MBB to the other via Connections or Pipes MBBs will dispense variable or parameter values with the rest of the models via Out connectors and will take in information from other MBBs via In connectors The actual data exchange between MBBs is possible via a Connection between an Out connector of the issuing block and the In connector of the receiving block Once there
314. re is a newer version available if you check the option Automatically check if a newer version is availble Preferences File associations When Geonamica project files geoproj are not associated with this program Do nothing Automatically associate Ask me what to do _ Validate Geonamica project files geoproj before opening them Automatically check if a newer version is available Raster map cache folder C DOCUME 1 yshi LOCALS 1 Temp Ga File associations File associations are a mechanism in Windows using which you can open a file in a specific program based on the files extension For example Microsoft Word files have an extension doc or docx If you double click on such a file in Windows Explorer the file will be opened in Word You can use the same mechanism for Geonamica project files However if you have multiple versions of METRONAMICA installed or you have more than one GEONAMICA based system installed on your computer all of them will use the file extension geoproj for their project files When you double click on such a file only one of these programs can be opened When you open Metronamica it checks whether Geonamica project files with file extension geoproj are associated with this application and not another version or another Geonamica based application If this is not the case METRONAMICA will do one of three things controlled by the setting in the Preferences window e
315. reased forest When you want to run a simulation in order to investigate the effects of a scenario you will have to select exactly one scenario for each of the drivers in METRONAMICA This combination would also be named a scenario according to the definition of the term given above but of course that is a recipe for confusion To avoid such confusion we will qualify the term scenario to mean one of two things e A sub scenario is a set of values for one of the drivers in METRONAMICA that defines a possible future development of that driver e An integrated scenario is a combination of one sub scenario for each driver in METRONAMICA that together define a possible overall future development This means that the increased forest scenario mentioned above is a sub scenario and that an integrated scenario defines all the values for all the drivers that are needed in order to perform a simulation run The selected integrated scenario on the toolbar is called the active integrated scenario It should be noted that only sub scenarios store values for each driver integrated scenarios do not store values themselves as they are just a collection of sub scenarios Also sub scenarios can exist outside of integrated scenarios e g several predefined sub scenarios for area demands though initially only one of them is selected in an integrated scenario A project file is used to configure various parts of the simulation and it contains references to
316. resenting Metronamica LUT MBB the transport network Transport 179 Zonal The zonal accessibility at time for land Metronamica SL and ML accessibility use function f in transport zone z z the Metronamica LUT MBB transport zone in which cell c is located Transport Table 3 11 Accessibility parameters fj Paberers conined nines of und in uses 0U omnes contained in the set of urbanised land uses LUU or not Urby Implicit accessibility of The implicit accessibility for a land use on a built up area built up area non built up area impassable for other land uses or not Ws f Relative importance The relative weight of the local accessibility for a certain link type and land use in the total local accessibility for that land use dsf Distance decay The rate at which the local accessibility for a certain link type and land use decreases for positive values or increases for negative values over distance Table 3 12 Accessibility output Accessibility The map that contains the Transition potential map accessibility value for each cell Metronamica ML and LUT MBB Regional interaction 3 1 5 Suitability Purpose and use Suitability quantifies the effect that physical elements of the land have on the possible future occurrence of land uses on a certain location Process description Suitability is a complicated measure on the basis of ecological physical technical or economical factor
317. rical map is the accessibility map Double click inside the legend pane of a map window to open the legend editor Here you can change the properties of the legend to control how the map 1s displayed Each distinct legend in METRONAMICA is stored as a file on disk the file name is displayed at the top of the Legend editor window You can click the Import button to copy the properties of another legend into the legend you are editing Note that this does not change the file name of the legend you are editing You can choose whether a legend represents categorical or numerical data by selecting the appropriate entry from the Legend type list The other controls in the window will update accordingly The following sections explain how to use them Categorical legends When the Legend type in the legend editor 1s set to Categorical the window will look similar to the image depicted below You can set the number of classes manually or click the Derive from map button to set the number of classes to the highest value found in the map plus one Note that this button 1s disabled for the legends of a network layer The table displays the categories in the order they will appear in the legend pane Double click on a label to change it You can also copy paste the labels from a text editor or Excel Click on an entry in the Colour column to change the colour of a category A dialog will pop up where you can select the desired colour You ca
318. ring some parts of the day there is more traffic than other parts For instance a trip from home to work will have a higher prevalence in the morning than in the evening The user needs to decide upon the number of time periods when the model 1s set up The duration for each time period should be specified If the total time sums up to 24 hours meaningful totals can be computed Trip purpose The transport model distinguishes between trip purposes Typical examples that we recommend are Home Work Work Work Work Home Home Home social Per purpose it is determined how many one way trips are generated depending on activity types in a region Different purposes can have a preference for different time periods The number and definition of trip purposes is not so much influencing the total computation time but it 1s an important decision for the calibration since it should correspond with the available data for calibration and it should also reflect the types of trips simulated in the model Transportation mode The transportation modes are the different transportation devices someone has available In the transport model of Metronamica LUT one mode is modelled endogenously typically this is the mode Car and one mode modelled exogenously typically these are one or more public transport modes The endogenous mode computes trips explicitly typically cars over the road network The exogenous modes are considered as alternative m
319. rlo analysis It should be noticed that logging maps while running the Monte Carlo analysis will take longer time to finish running than only running the Monte Carlo analysis When all runs are finished the Reset button in the Results part becomes available You can reset the setting of the Monte Carlo analysis by using the Reset function in the Monte Carlo tool gt Click on the Reset button in the Results part gt A message window opens ask you whether or not to erase the previous results 64 gt Click the Yes button in the message window The number of simulation runs performed becomes zero and you can carry out a new Monte Carlo analysis GEONAMICA j Are you sure you want to erase the previous results es we _ According to the aspects of your interests with the help of GIS tool you can generate a specific map representing the probability for development of certain land use s by post processing the probability maps obtained from the Monte Carlo analysis The figures below show the examples of probability for development of high density residential with and without a land use plan from 2003 to 2030 respectively Roads residential with out a land use plan from 2003 to 2030 highways i N primary roads Legend l Probability for development of high density highways PR 66 Urbanization cluster 2003 mj Probability of urbanization 2003 2030 _ o o2 9 o2 0 4 PR
320. rns and the possible effects of this in social economic and environmental terms but also on floods forest fires landslides and other natural hazards The open architecture of GEONAMICA enables the straightforward incorporation of additional indicator algorithms at a later stage e The algorithms that have been implemented perform mathematical operations on the land use map and the output of the regional interaction model generated in the course of a simulation and on external data that can be entered interactively e The algorithms can be configured interactively via the user interface by the end user of the model on the basis of a number of parameters In fact an indicator consists of a generic algorithm determining the type of indicator and its set of parameter values determining the interpretation of the indicator Within a model a single algorithm can be employed with different parameter values as often as desired e Ina model run the user can switch an indicator on or off All indicators that are switched on are updated after every time step They are presented in a dialogue window and an associated map window that the user can open and close during the run Like for all other maps in the model statistical information relative to the information displayed on the map is available by clicking the mouse in the map see the User Manual Indicator maps can be exported in IDRISI format In addition to the map for every indicator a sy
321. rowth scenarios and assess the effect compared to the baseline scenario This enables planners to gain insights in possible future land use developments and the influence of alternative policy measures METRONAMICA is developed in the GEONAMICA software environment It comes as a stand alone software application with a user friendly interface The system includes the MAP COMPARISON KIT for analysis of model results Both tools use data formats that are compatible with standard GIS packages such as ArcGIS The METRONAMICA documentation contains four chapters Chapter 1 Introduction explains the structure of the METRONAMICA documentation Chapter 2 User Manual describes how to use the software of METRONAMICA Chapter 3 Model description gives the detailed description for each model used in the system Chapter 4 Metronamica data requirement describes input data and their format required by METRONAMICA Chapter Appendix A Metronamica release history describes the METRONAMICA release history 2 User Manual This chapter describes the user manual of METRONAMICA a spatial decision support system built with the GEONAMICA framework The METRONAMICA is developed to model explore and visualize land use change effects of the different scenarios for urban and regional planning applications This manual contains five the sections Section 2 1 Getting started explains how to install METRONAMICA on your computer and how to start the program I
322. rpose p in time trips Production and P period tp at time t attraction 3 4 6 Distribution and modal split Purpose and use Actors select their destinations and their mode of transport as a function of the associated generalised costs They choose destinations close by more often than far away They choose cheap modes more often than expensive ones It takes time however for actors to change their behaviour and preferences Therefore a major factor determining the selection of destinations and modes is the existing transport pattern In Metronamica LUT two modes are taken into account endogenous mode e g car or private transport and exogenous mode e g bus train or public transport Process description In the distribution step production and attraction levels in different zones will be linked together In other words it is decided which pairs of origins and destinations form trips The technique that is applied is a double constraint disaggregation whereby the prior distribution is based on the generalized transport cost between zones The double constraint disaggregation problem is solved by a Furness iteration approach See the section Transport annex 2 Furness Iteration The result of the distribution step is an origin destination matrix OD matrix specifying trips for each transport motive or purpose In this distribution step a modification is being made to the classical equilibrium based transport model in favour of a dyn
323. rs National growth Regional Activity Regional productivity Cell demands per land use Figure 3 7 The relations between the different components of the regional interaction model and its relation to the other models incorporated in Metronamica The equations used in the regional interaction model are described in the sub sections of this section Each of the elements in black Activity National growth Migration Attractivity for activity in all sectors Productivity and Cell demands per is described in a separate the section Parameters Pix Pox Ps Pas Ps 204 Table 3 44 Parameters used in the Regional interaction model Exponent population potential Exponent job potential Exponent activity potential Exponent density Exponent activity Exponent neighbourhood effect Influence of the population potential on the attractivity of a region for activity k Influence of the job potential on the attractivity of a region for activity k Influence of activity in economic sector k on the attractivity of a region for activity k Influence of the land productivity on the attractivity of a region for activity k Influence of the activity on the fraction of national growth for sector k Influence of neighbourhood effect on the attractivity of a region for activity k Inertia in relocating of The inertia for sector k Calibration activity Calibration Calibration
324. run 5 times Depending on the data size of your METRONAMICA application the time that you need to finish running the Monte Carlo analysis 1s different In the Results part the number of simulation runs has been performed displays in the text box next to Number of simulation runs performed After one run is performed the Show probability map for land use button and the Export probability maps button become available When your simulation is finished you can analysis the probability maps generated by the Monte Carlo analysis Main window Settings Calculate Number of simulation runs to perform 5 Results Number of simulation runs performed 5 gt Other agriculture Pastures Cropland Greenhouses Housing low density Housing high density Industry Services Social cultural uses Forest Wetlands Dryland nature Recreation land Airport Fresh water Map Comparison gt Click the Show probability maps for land use button The context menu with all vacant and function land uses appear gt Click the land use of your interest For instance click Industry The Probability of Industry map window opens 63 Probability of Industry Sel lo Region boundaries e Probability of Industry EE vVGpuIts The map that appears has numerical values between 0 and 1 These values represent the fraction of times from all simulation runs that a cell had a specific land use 2030 Hence cel
325. s 66 olx Map Comparison Kit 3 1 File Edit View Options Tools Window Help efleaanc cal o ss N The MCK comes with its own dedicated manual which is delivered as an integral part of the METRONAMICA package It explains the use of the MCK and describes in detail how you can analyse and compare logged maps generated by METRONAMICA in an interactive manner All logged maps generated by METRONAMICA can be read into the MCK in a straightforward manner An example of how to use the Map Comparison Kit to compare scenarios is given in the section 2 3 4 Analysing results 67 2 3 Policy interface The user interface of the METRONAMICA system provides access for two types of users policy users who carry out impact assessment studies related to the impact of certain policies under a range of external conditions and the modeller who is responsible for the underlying scientific information of the system and needs to adapt underlying data and parameters when more information becomes available over time The Main window of METRONAMICA provides access for both types of users The structure of the Main window is available in the section Map window This chapter explains how the policy user can use the system and the next chapter explains how the modeller can access the models The policy user finds access to all policy relevant information in the Main window This information is organised in such a way that the user can carr
326. s generated by OVERLAY TOOL check the check box next to Vacant land uses are included in Overlay Tool project You need to verify if the suitability maps in the File column are corresponding to the land uses in the Land use column by switching on or off the check box mentioned above Check the check boxes for each land use in the Import column to import the suitability maps for the checked land uses It works similarly as importing the zoning maps generated by OVERLAY TOOL see Without the zoning tool importing all zoning maps at once generated by Overlay Tool If you generated suitability maps using other tools for example the ArcGIS package you need to import the suitability map one by one for the selected land use by clicking the browse button in the path edit box 121 Land use model Land use Industry Land use type Function Land use Neighbourhood Accessibility Suitability Zoning Input Maximum suitability for all land uses 10 Import from Overlay Tool Import Overlay Tool maps Folder Vacant land uses are included in Overlay Tool project Select the maps you would like to import Land use Import File Other agriculture Iv Pastures iv Cropland lv Greenhouses Iv Housing low density Iv v Show Edit The system provides you the opportunity to set up the maximum suitability for all land uses by entering a value in the range of 0 255 in the text box next to Maximum suitability on t
327. s correctly From the current land use map accessible via Drivers Parameters Land use Land use tab Show current land use map button you can derive more information by using the Inspect tool In the Potential figures dialog window that will open the numbers displayed in the title represent the location in row and in column of the cell that you selected The table lists the values for total potential neighbourhood potential suitability numerical zoning and accessibility for each land use function for the selected location The row and column index of the location are displayed in the caption of the window This functionality is very useful during calibration Land use map Sel C Other agriculture Pastures C Crop EE x Hide outside modelling area o Region boundaries x Network layer Waterways Total Neighbourhood Suitability Numerical Accessibility f ap Land use potential potential zoning er ee 2 A X Network layer Stations Greenhouses 83 0508 79 8766 0 0 66453 ve ay gi ea Housing low density 173 069 113 514 0 880257 fea ry ph i Housing high density 240 017 182 234 0 872166 J Aen l x Network layer Ramps Industry 154 665 114 579 0 911383 A X Network layer Roads_network Sodal cultural uses 44 5959 33 2486 0 787412 s Forests 40 2435 37 0836 Extensive pastures 59 8222 37 7746 Nature 29 8929 14 113 Recreation 39 2514 26 6503 Ama s 1 1 1 1 Services 13 1718 6 45361 1 0 9690
328. s is set to 1 1 2020 the category will not influence zoning on the first day of 2020 which is used for the land use allocation on the first day of 2021 But the category will still have an influence on zoning on the first day of 2019 which is used for the land use allocation on the first day of 2020 In contrast to the other settings the zoning status of a category is specified for each land use function individually You can view or change the zoning status for a particular land use by selecting it from the Land use type list above the table You can change the zoning status of a category by double clicking in the table and selecting a different zoning status from the dropdown list When the zoning status is set to Unspecified the category will not be considered in calculating the zoning map for the selected land use function 71 With the zoning tool viewing zoning maps You can view how all the settings in the zoning tool are combined into a zoning map for each land use by clicking the Preview zoning map button on the Category precedence tab in the zoning tool This will open a map window that displays the zoning map for the selected land use In the layer manager pane on the top right of the opened map window you can see a list of times These are the simulation times at which the zoning map for the selected land use will change Click on a time to display that zoning map You can change the settings on the Cate
329. s specified in the trip matrix OD matrix are assigned to routes on the road network There are two assignment procedures for endogenous mode and exogenous mode The endogenous model is a full model that assigns vehicles to the road network road segments and takes into account how their presence influences route choices of other vehicles This model is used for private transport calculations such as cars The exogenous mode is a simple model that directly takes transport times and distances from exogenous data sources The latter model is used for public transport calculations The assignment of transport to the road network takes place in a number of iterations In each of the iterations a percentage of the total number of trips is assigned The number of iterations and the percentage of trips assigned in each iteration are determined via the user interface The maximum total number of iterations is 10 Algorithm of assignment for exogenous mode In the simple model for an exogenous mode the results of the assignment step are directly taken as exogenous variables The variables are X p Mtrazonal trip e t m e m e distances T trip times and E intrazonal trip extra costs tym _ bo m A tp oer tmm _ trm Zo gt Zg p Exo Z Zg tp These variables are input to the generalized cost matrix that is also calculated in the full model for endogenous mode see the section Algorithm of assignment for endogenous
330. s that determine the physical appropriateness of a cell to receive the land use As described in the sections Creating a new project file for Metronamica SL and Creating a new project file for Metronamica ML you can choose to use the suitability tool or not to use the suitability in your new project file With the Suitbiality tool you can generate directly the suibaiblity maps in METRONAMICA based on the suibability base maps Suitability generated with the suitability tool is expressed as a non negative The value of 0 means not suitable and the highest value means perfectly suitable Without the Suitbiality tool you need to prepare the suitability maps outside of METRONAMICA e g with the help of the OVERLAY TOOL or GIS software before you introduce them in the system Suitability generated with the OVERLAY TOOL is expressed as an integer value The value should between O not suitable and maximum suitability value perfectly suitable With the suitability tool Algorithm Six combination methods are available in the suitability tool which could be used to combine the different intermediate result maps suitability factor maps into a single 180 suitability map for the selected land use The following options are available minimum maximum arithmetic mean weighted arithmetic mean geometric mean weighted geometric mean Minimum m t e t i Dee min Sh Maximum Sy aC max Sf Arithmetic mean t t S
331. s the number of trips from zone z to z for mode m in time period tp X a is the trip distance per trip from from zone z to z for mode m in time period tp T p is the trip duration per trip from from zone z to z for mode m in time period tp Total number of trips at global level NT per mode m is calculated by aggregating the daily number of trips NT over all zones Zz iN pean gt Nie Z Average trip distance MX per mode m is calculated gt A R yp Oba 0 if OY oam 0 MX if EN E oam gt 0 Average trip duration MT per mode m is calculated ear yp Obay 0 if INT o E 0 The congestion is divided into different congestion categories according to the fraction of road capacity defined with the lower bound by CGL The category lower MT _ if NTP Sera gt 0 bounds should be in increasing order Daily congestion in kilometre CG per congestion category cg is only calculated for the modes with endogenous assignment E L 1000 2 1000 2 l t km CG d RT gt 0A Ri oy gt 0 CGLeg lt CG max lt CGL og 41 RT gt 07 ee gt OACGL g S CGingx 1 lt CGL og 41 Total number of trip origins ove Pures for zone z and time period tp is calculated by aggregating trip origins per purpose O over all trip purposes t O _ purpose _ gt t O p Z tp Z tp P Total number of trip destination for zone z and time period tp is calcula
332. s used in the activity potential model block Interregional The distance between region i and Metronamica ML distance region j at time t and LUT Default value or specified by user Interregional The generalised cost is expressed as Currency Metronamica distance the distance between region i and LUT MBB region j at time t Transport ly The activity in sector k and regioni Number of Activity model ka at time t previous time step people or jobs block Table 3 67 Output variables given by the activity potential model block y Activity The activity potential in sector k and Attractivity for activity i potential region at time in all sectors model block 212 The neighbourhood conversion model block Purpose and use This model block determines the neighbourhood effect that is present in a region and in a sector As input the neighbourhood effect of a cell on a land use function is given Process description The neighbourhood effect given per cell is aggregated summed up for a region and then transformed from land use function to sector by means of the function sector correspondence In order to rescale the effect appropriately the aggregated effect is divided by the number of cells that belongs to the corresponding sector in a particular region Algorithm The function which determines the value of the output variable looks as follows gt Pe Te felUs E c f A F N gt Ta feLUp
333. same properties cell size x lower left value y lower left value number of columns and number of rows as the map of the regions and the land use map 4 5 4 D11 Roads network maps All the network layers representing different layer types could be included in the system to calculate the accessibility in the land use model However in the transport model only the road network map is essentially required since the endogenous mode like car is modelled For Metronamica SL the roads network map is described in the section 4 3 6 D6 Networks For Metronamica LUT the roads network map should meet conditions described in this section 261 The roads network file should be made available as GIS shape file shp The database aligned to this shape file needs several required fields These are Roadtype AccType Length Speedlimit Capacity and Extracost Optionally you can add an additional field Preintens to account for an initial intensity on roads The meaning of the values in these fields is now described one by one Roadtype is an integer value that identifies the different road types for the transport model Values for normal road types are 1 2 3 continuing for all different available road types Two special values are 0 and 1 Each zone has a special node central node which is connected with the actual network by connector special link These special links are of road type value 0 Additionally some road types might only contribut
334. se on transport can also be simulated In METRONAMICA infrastructure is represented as a network layer Land use is influence by the infrastructure driver through accessibility which is a function of the distance to different types of infrastructure elements e g local roads or highways Policy decisions that influence accessibility are mainly the construction of roads railways or possibly irrigation networks In the following the sections you will learn how to adapt the road network 81 m Main window over o eae r er Extemal factors Network Roads v j Time Network change Policy measures Parameters Scenarios indicators EE The figure above shows the policy user interface in Metronamica SL and Metronamica ML for the Infrastructure drive The changes to the network are listed in the table with time and descriptive names It is allowed to have several changes in the same year You can use the button Show Edit network at time to open a window with a single network map displaying the network at the chosen time incorporating all specified network changes up to that time You can add or remove elements from this network or change the accessibility type of an element You can store the changes you made as a new network change and give a descriptive name You can view and edit each network change in isolation in the modeller user interface via Main window Drivers Parameters Land use
335. sh hour period 4 00 264490 554200 Rest of day period 20 00 256950 568950 266330 575350 253460 594570 240130 602640 234540 591750 248570 577090 Activity weight Parameters On the Parameters tab you can set the general parameters for the entire transport model On the top left part you can view or edit the existing time period name and its duration by clicking the cell in the table and entering a new name or value in the Time period data part The duration for all time periods should sum to 24 hours GEONAMICA A Time period durations must sum up to 24 hours Lax But it is not possible to add or delete the number of time periods via the user interface because the consequence of changing the number of time period will change one of the dimensions for several matrixes that are used in the transport model On the top right part you can view and enter the name of transport zone and the x and y coordinates for the special node of each zone by clicking the cell in the table and entering a new name or value in the Zone data part Each transport zone has one special node also called central node and several real nodes The special node for each zone is used to find the shortest paths between two transport zones The trip from transport zone 1 to transport zone 2 is the trip from the special node A of transport zone 1 to the special node B of transport zone 2 The use of special nodes implies that all transport towards that
336. simulation run ses a Stop a simulation run ses run Section Stop Reset Recalculate variables that are affected by changes Section Reset including the initial values and initial maps via the user interface for the start year of the simulation Switch the simulation clock back to the start year of simulation Pause Set at which times a simulation run will be stopped Section Pauses automatically Set the end time of the simulation OO 2 5 3 Maps menu Accessing default input and output maps You can use the Maps menu to open map windows All default maps are structured hierarchically by themes in the menu There are essentially two types of maps input maps and output maps Input maps are editable and output maps calculated for the current simulation time by the system are not editable 160 Metronamica Randstad Sele File Simulation KYSS Options Window Help am san a a Regions b Infrastructure b Lang use moge d b m Main w Biz Land u Managing ancillary maps Besides the default input and out maps you can add a large number of other raster maps to METRONAMICA for calibration or analysis purpose To do so gt gt Go to Maps menu Click on the Manage ancillary maps option The Ancillary maps dialog window opens The list of maps is empty before you importing any ancillary map Importing ancillary maps gt gt gt gt gt gt Click on the Import map button The Imp
337. splay a unit in the label select the check box in front of Add unit to labels and enter the unit in the text box Press the OK button to confirm update the labels displayed in the table Generate labels VV VV WV Yy Format lt lower bound gt lt upperbound gt Decimals 1 Z Add unit to labels ha g The legend will be updated by using the automatic setting For more information see the section Legend editor Total population choropleth map A r E 1158111 05 1268340 00 lo Region dajes E 1047882 09 1158111 05 je Total population choropleth may E 937653 14 1047882 09 O 827424 18 937653 14 El 717195 23 827424 18 E 606966 27 717195 23 E 496737 32 BO6966 27 E 386508 36 496737 32 E 276279 41 386508 36 E 166050 45 276279 41 inspect pect To visualise network congestion map and zonal accessibility maps in Metronamica LUT gt Go to the Transport section of the Indicators tab gt Click the Show map button next to Network congestion to view the congestion map gt Select the land use of interest from the dropdown list next to Accessibility for land use gt Click the Show map button next to Accessibility for land use You can view the accessibility per transport zone for selected land use in the opened map window 92 Congestion i E 1 00 3 00 fo Cen E 0 50 1 00 E 0 20 0 50 p 2 00
338. ssssssseees 265 Il 1 Introduction Metronamica 1s RIKS Spatial Decision Support System SDSS for urban and regional planning applications METRONAMICA consists of a dynamic spatial land use change model and can optionally include a regional migration model and a transport model for modelling congestion and traffic pressure on the transport network Land use changes are simulated based on a number of different drivers First there are external factors such as population growth or the decrease of natural area that determine the demand for different land uses Population and jobs are divided over the regions based on how attractive these regions are to people and businesses This attractiveness depends again on a number of factors such as the existing activity and local characteristics such as the accessibility Finally within each region the land uses for every location are determined based on socio economic factors e g will a business flourish in this location policy options e g are there policy rules in effect that restrict new housing development in this location and biophysical factors e g 1s the soil suited for agriculture here METRONAMICA is calibrated on historic land use changes which is extrapolated to simulate land use developments into the future After that planners can experiment with scenarios policy options and external influences such as spatial zoning plans expansion of the road network or population g
339. stance to map areas to which the distance should be calculated Unless a proper indicator file is specified the indicator cannot be calculated Disturbance The value of the disturbance can range from 0 to 25 and is set to 0 User defined value by default Range for Only count cells with the specific value for mask mapping User defined counting cells indicator The search radius around the centre cell The unit of the search User defined radius depends on the cell size for This comes forth from the empirical relation N c A where User N is the number of species c is a constant and A is the surface defined mask mapping Resistance of The resistance of a road If a road crosses through a cell the User road resistance of that cell is taken as the maximum of the resistance of defined indicator Power z indicator that land use and this value Search radius for habitat Fraction Signals per land use whether it belongs to the habitat 1 or not User Resistance The resistance of the corresponding land use User fragmentation Land use change The value that will be displayed in the result map if the cell has Pre defined classification land use from in the base map and fo in the current land use map A value of 1 will result in a no data value Metric The measure of spatial patterns to use User defined 193 Input Table 3 32 Input used in the spatial indicators model Name Initial land
340. ste the last column to a text editor or Excel to easily change all the files gt Select the last column in the table by clicking on the File name column header Copy the contents of the last column by pressing Ctr C on the keyboard Paste the copied text to a new Excel workbook or your preferred text editor VV Vv Select Replace from the Edit menu and replace the folder of the project file with a different folder e g you can replace C Randstad SL with C Randstad SL copy Click the Replace All button gt Copy the changed text from Excel Ctrl C 53 Click on the File name column header in the Export project window Press Ctrl V to paste the changed file names into the table Check that all the file names in the table now refer to the same folder Change the Project file to the correct folder VV VV V Change the Legend file folder to be a subfolder of the folder where you will save the project file All the files in the legend folder will be copied v Click the Save button to export the project 2 2 5 Running a scenario Once the Main window and the Land use map window have been opened the program has read the default values for all the parameters as well as the initial values for all the state variables of models The program is ready to run a scenario You can run a scenario with the control buttons on the toolbar or with the commands
341. t Table 3 53 Parameters used in the migration model block n Distance decay for activity The distance decay for sector k Calibration migration Table 3 54 Input variables used in the migration model block 208 Interregional The distance between region 1 Metronamica ML distance and region j at time t default value or specified by user The generalised cost is expressed Currency Metronamica LUT as the distance between region i MBB Transport and region at time The activity in sector k and Number of Activity model region i at time previous time people or jobs block step Attractivity The attractivity of region i on Attractivity for sector A at time t activity in all sectors model block Inertia in The inertia for sector k Activity model relocating of block activity Table 3 55 variables given by the migration model block Migration The migration The number of Number of Activity model block people in sector k that move from people or jobs National growth region 7 to region j at time t model block 3 3 5 Attractivity for activity in all sectors Description of the attractivity model block Purpose and use This model block determines the attractivity of a region on a sector The dimension of this variable is irrelevant as only relative attractivity matters Process description The attractivity captures different factors One set of factors are the different potentials namely population job
342. t Parameters and Output parts The Input map is the Current land use map that is not changeable 130 s Spatial indicators Add new indicator Remove selected indicator Rename selected indicator nce from residential to recreation Soil sealing Urban expansion Forested areas Deforested land I Abando 4 gt Indicator type Mask mapping indicator Calculate Input Input map Land use map Only count cells with value larger than or equal to v Parameters Under the Input map you can configure which kind of cells on the land map will be counted by selecting on the dropdown list next to Only count cells with value and giving a specific value in the text box When you created the project with the wizard you had defined which land uses were urban group for the environmental indicator For more information see the section Entering the basic land use model parameter In the Parameters part you can still set whether a land use contributes to the soil sealing area or not and set the weight of each land use The value 0 represents the non soil sealing area The non zero values represents the soil sealing area The value in each cell on the land use map 1s set to the weight of the land use that currently occupies the cell In the Output part you can observe the value of soil sealing per region in the table You can also open the Soil sealing map by clicking the Show map button Urban expansion The
343. t to m 7o7aP Then the bootstrapping procedure is applied and the original trips per purpose are overwritten by the new disaggregation over the purposes This routine is followed to enable us to re bootstrap when parameters in the model change in particular those related to the generalized cost which are almost all parameters 3 4 10 Transport annex 2 Furness Iteration In various parts of the transport model a matrix of a priori distribution is transformed in order meet criteria of the row and column totals This 1s a double constraint disaggregation problem and it can be solved by a Furness iteration approach The Furness algorithm takes three inputs X Y and R The result of the algorithm isa matrix P P Furness X Y R l P j7 R j Where Ea is the calculated prior distribution Y is the given total over row i Xx is the given total over column j R is the given factor for the prior distribution n is the number of iterations performed by the algorithm that satisfies the following conditions for some small value gt Q FA lt E Y lt E XT D J The conditions above takes place to ascertain that the total number of trips origins corresponds to that of Y and the total number of trips destinations corresponds to that of X The solution is found by iteratively applying the following conversions until the conditions are met it X l Ta k j k it ae i j S it 2 Oy k 250 2
344. t also describes the main features of the graphical user interface Section 2 2 Running the simulation contains a step by step description of how to run the simulation in METRONAMICA Section 2 3 Policy interface describes the steps that a policy user should follow to carry out an integrated impact assessment with the METRONAMICA system Section 2 4 Modeller interface describes the interface for a modeller to access the underlying models and to update data and parameter settings through the system diagram in METRONAMICA Section 2 5 The Metronamica menu system offers a systematic description of each option in the menu system Through this documentation for the convenience of the user a special arrow symbol gt is used in a step by step description of how to complete the action that you can follow along at your computer For example gt Click Open project on the File menu 2 1 Getting started This chapter explains how to install METRONAMICA and its accompanying tools on your computer and how to start the program It also describes the main features of the graphical user interface 2 1 1 Computer requirements METRONAMICA runs on personal computers running Microsoft Windows XP and equipped with modern Intel or Intel compatible processors It may also run on Windows Vista and Windows 7 but has only been fully tested on Windows XP To use METRONAMICA your computer should have the following hardware components
345. t of the national activity growth which will end up in a region The determination of the size of a part is solely based on the ongoing migrations Process description The absolute national growth in a sector can be calculated by taking the difference of the current level of activity and the lagged level of activity In order to determine the part of the national growth that will end up in one region the migrations are taken into account Here the relative size of the immigration over emigration ratio matters This is intuitive A region with many immigrants and few emigrants experiences a growth of activity accompanied by a great share of the national growth Algorithm An intermediate variable is the immigration emigration ratio which is specific to each sector k and region 1 at time t It is determined by the following formula t gt Mp ji MR S X Mpi oly J j The function which determines the value of the output variable looks as follows Pra MR ae OF ie MR J D NA NA 207 Parameters input and output Table 3 50 Parameters used in the national growth model block B Exponent activity Influence of the activity on the Calibration l fraction of national growth for sector k b Exponent Influence of the immigration Calibration l immigration emigration ratio on the fraction of emigration ratio national growth for sector k Table 3 51 Input variables used in the
346. t to that type in the table on the left top part of the dialog window In the table on the right side you can set the fraction for each land use e The value 1 represents that the land use belongs to the habitat e The value 0 represents that the land use does not belong to the habitat In the table on the right side you can set the resistance for each land use depending on whether it is easy neutral or difficult for the habitat to traverse e Easy traversable land uses are all natural areas The default resistance is 1 e Neutral traversable land uses are extensive agricultural areas The default resistance is 10 e Difficult traversable land uses are sparsely build areas and areas of intensive agriculture The default resistance is 100 e Very difficult traversable land uses are industrial and dense urban areas The default resistance is 1000 When you created the project with the wizard you had defined which land uses were urban group and natural group forest and non forest natural for the environmental indicator For more information see the section Entering the basic land use model parameter 135 Habitat fragmentation map lo Region boundaries jo Habitat fragmentation map In the Output part the average values of probability of occurrence per region are displayed in the table You can open the Habitat fragmentation map by clicking the Show maps button A high probability corresponds to high potential
347. ted and therefore results will improve when this information is also available for the transport network This 1s obvious in the case of traffic jams which often appear only in one direction at a time 4 5 5 D12 Roads network changes maps These maps are optional The roads network changes maps are represented as shape files which represent the network changes for specific years They should have the same format and fields as in the initial roads network maps as described in the section 4 5 4 D11 Roads network maps 4 5 6 D13 initial trip distribution for car transport and for public transport Each transportation mode needs an initial number of trips per hour from zone origin to zone destination per time period per trip purpose In practice this trip distribution matrix 1s not directly available It could be estimated based on the data available The initial trip distributions for both car trip and public transport are combined in a h5 file e g TripDistribution h5 This file saves the matrix for the initial origin destination distribution per time period per trip purpose for transportation mode The orders of dimensions in this matrix are time period trip purpose transportation mode zone origin and zone destination Ideally these numbers of trips should be based on data Alternatively you can use dummy values to set up the transport model and replace the dummy values with real data via the user interface of the software 4
348. ted by aggregating trip destinations per purpose D over all trip purposes Z tp DB eile el _ gt DP Z tp Z tp P 246 Parameters input and output Table 3 119 Parameters used CGL Congestion category The lower bound of congestion for the congestion ie class lower bound category cg which represents the fraction of road capacity Table 3 120 Input variables used top Number of trips between origin zone z and trips hour Distribution and 7o7d P destination zone z4 for mode m in time period tp modal split per hour at time oN The node where link of the road network Transport assignment originates from at time t EN The node where link of the road network goes Transport assignment to at time t t R l The region where node n is located in at time t Transport assignmen Specifies region 0 when node n is located outside the modelling area Taz The zone where node n is located in at time t Specifies zone 0 when node n is located outside the modelling area CG Maximum congestion of link of the road Transport assignment ais network during the day at time t Road type of link at time t Transport assignment L Transport assignment Length of link at time t Transport assignment Generalised distance per trip to go from the Transport assignment origin zone Z to the destination zone zg by mode m during time period tp at time t Generalised duration per trip to go from the Tr
349. ted scenario changes over time gt Go to the Analysis tab in the navigation pane on the left hand side of the Main window of Metronamica gt Click the Start MCK button The Open window of the MCK opens The MCK log file that has been generated by the Log maps functionality in Metronamica will be preselected in the Open window gt Click the Open button The MCK log file will be loaded gt Select which type of maps you want to compare from the left most list on the toolbar The lists for the first and second map will be updated according to your selection gt Select the first and second map to compare Click the 1 or 2 icons on the toolbar to display these maps The maps in the list are ordered by simulation name as entered in the Log settings window in Metronamica and by year gt Select a comparison algorithm by clicking the balance icon on the toolbar fit For categorical maps such as land use or zoning the Per category or Kappa algorithms will be most useful For numerical maps the b a or b divided by a algorithms will be most useful 95 96 gt gt Click the 1 2 icon on the toolbar 2 to display the comparison map and click the table icon E21 to display overall comparison statistics Some comparison algorithms can be further refined with special settings For example the Per category comparison algorithm can be refined by selecting which category to co
350. ted scenario step by step for each of the drivers in the system External factors The external factors are accessible on the External factors page in the Main window under the Drivers tab The External factors included in the system are different depending on the configuration of Metronamica For Metronamica SL e Total land use demand per land use function For Metronamica ML e Trend of area per region per area sector e Trend of population per region per population sector e Trend of jobs per region per economic sector For Metronamica LUT e Trend of area per region per area sector e Trend of population per region per population sector e Trend of jobs per region per economic sector e Trend of Mobility growth 70 Main window C oes O O land use denad sub scenaro Basne landcare Seve baer XY Land use Total demand Greenhouses Extemal factors Housing low density Housing high density Industry Services Ta Socio cultural uses Forest Extensive grasslands Policy measures A Demand for Industry cells 2000 1895 2030 2464 Oooo e U U S 5 o o E 500 The figure above is an example of the Metronamica SL When you have the External factors in front of you you can carry out the following actions e View historic data and projections e Adapt historic data and projections e Load an existing sub scenario e Make changes to an existing sub scenario and save it as
351. ted with With the zoning tool 2 Not choose the option of using zoning tool when you create a new project file or when you use the project file created with the version before 4 2 of METRONAMICA You need to create the zoning maps in an external tool than METRONAMICA such as a GIS package For more information about how to work on the zoning regulation without the zoning tool see the following sub sections whose title is started with Without the zoning tool The OVERLAY TOOL is a special tool coming with METRONAMICA which is specifically designed to create zoning maps based on a number of spatial zoning regulations The zoning maps could be pre processed by a combination and interpretation of different zoning plans For more information about the OVERLAY TOOL please contact RIKS Gnfo riks nl In the following steps you will learn how to display and change the zoning maps Zoning tool In the version later than 4 2 including of METRONAMICA the Zoning tool developed by RIKS is incorporated in the system that allows you to incorporate your spatial planning in the land use model With the Zoning tool you can enter spatial zoning plans In the zoning tool and interpret their meaning for different land use classes in a comprehensible way Plans can be ordered hierarchically such that one overrules the other in case of conflict When more information or new zoning plans become available this can be incorporated in the zoning tool
352. tep 4 Follow the steps on the screen to install the software and data gt Step 5 Optional Download the MAP COMPARISON KIT from http www riks nl mck Install it by double clicking the downloaded file and follow the steps on the screen To uninstall Metronamica gt Step 1 Open the Control Panel this is normally available in the Windows Start menu Open Add or Remove Programs in the Control Panel Next click the Change or remove programs button in the Add or Remove Programs Properties dialog window gt Step 2 Select Metronamica from the list of applications and press the Change Remove button gt Step 3 The Confirm File Deletion dialog window will open Press the Ok button to confirm that you want to remove Metronamica and all its files from your hard disk gt Step 4 Repeat the steps 1 to 3 to uninstall the MAP COMPARISON KIT 2 1 3 METRONAMICA directory structure By default METRONAMICA is installed in the directory C Program Files Geonamica Two sub directories are created Metronamica and Map Comparison Kit By default example data for METRONAMICA is installed in C Documents and Settings My Documents User Metronamica The example data in the current version Metronamica 1s Randstad SL e Randstad SL an example case for Metronamica SL which includes only the land use model The directories for each METRONAMICA project contain typically the following sub directories an
353. the selected class Press the OK button to confirm the change you made on the width for the selected class Network layer Roads_network 2010 Jan 01 Nodes Node width _ Linkcolor Link width PR x Hide outside modelling area Interci j one ta a ya Region boundaries H Intercity stations E KRK a KA wy lo H Stations mead torn were a FY Ordinary roads F Legend editor x EY Ramps File Link Width tat H Waterways ET ry FF Baade network 2010Jan 01 Legend type Numeric v H Airport Number of classes B 1 Generate labels Generate class bounds gt Graph Press the OK button in the Legend editor dialog window to confirm and save changes you made for the legend The graph editor is used extensively in METRONAMICA to define two dimensional relations time series and distance decay functions The left part of the window displays a graph in which you can edit the values by moving adding or deleting points The right side of the window displays a list of the values in the graph You cannot edit this list but it is updated as you edit the graph Values between points in the graph are always linearly interpolated Values before the first point or after the last point are kept constant 47 A Demand for Housing high density cells 2030 1243 O Graph display area Ly Value list 200 Spins JS veo gt You can add points to the
354. the legend in the legend pane for both the link color and the link width The table below gives an example of the values and categories of the road type used to display the roads network layers in the system SOA iy PeCalee ory Road type value Roads outside modelling area 7 C Roads outside modelling area Special links ooo a Road type CB ose C Road type 2 ie a E Road type 5 C PE Road upe 6 C PB Road pe 7 The table below gives an example of the values and categories of the acctype used to display the non roads network layers e g station railway ramps waterways in the system E Vitual roads C E reci stations C I Stone E Ramps C Waterways Ramps Waterways Ordinary roads C E Ordinary roads Ramps o 3 42 Legend editor A legend assigns a label and a colour and possibly other characteristics such as line thickness to each value in a map Depending on what the values in a map represent we can either use a categorical or a numerical legend In a categorical legend the values in the map are assumed to represent category indices starting with the value 0 for the first category An example of a categorical map is the land use map where the land use classes form the categories The values in a numerical map can in principle take any value To limit the amount of entries in a numerical legend we associate each entry with a certain range of values An example of a nume
355. the previous time for the selected parameter Then you can edit the values for the new time by clicking on the cell and entering a new value You need to provide at least the values for start year of simulation per parameter and per purpose and they are not removable You can delete a time line for the selected parameter by selecting your time non start year of interest and clicking on the Delete time button on the right side Timeline parameters Parameter Mobility growth factor v Time Purpose Home work Work home Work work Home home 1989 Jan 01 00 00 00 1 00000 1 00000 1 00000 1 00000 Another important parameter for the Production and attraction step is the number of trips produced by one unit of activity for each trip purpose and urbanisation class in the start year of the simulation These parameters are grouped by Origins and Destinations tables in the middle part of the dialog window and they are only for the start year of the simulation You can select your urbanisation class of interest from the dropdown list next to Urbanisation class The available urbanisation classes are determined on the Parameters tab of the Transport model dialog window You can view or edit the trips per activity parameters by clicking on your cell of interest and entering a new value Trips trips activity Urbanisation dass High v Origins Destinations Activity Purpose Home work Work home Work work Home home Activ
356. the top of the driver reflects this by showing the name modified You can create a new sub scenario with the values you just entered by clicking the Save sub scenario button gt gt gt Click the Save sub scenario button The Save infrastructure sub scenario window will pop up Enter the name Test exogenous extra cost without quotes after the Save in new sub scenario option Enter a description and click the OK button You have now created a new sub scenario Test exogenous extra cost for the infrustructure sub scenario Displaying an infrastructure network gt gt gt 84 Go to Main window Drivers Policy measures Infrastructure Select an infrastructure layer from the Network list Click the Show Edit network at time button at the bottom of the window A window will open where you can select the simulation time for which you want to display the network Select a time from the list and click the OK button A map window will open displaying the selected infrastructure network at the selected time You can draw links in this network remove links or change the type of a link Therefore the nodes of each link are displayed as small circles You can hide these by clicking on the Network tools button in the tools pane in the bottom right of the map window and deselecting Show nodes For more information see the section Network tools Creating network
357. time t p pp aggregation indicators Table 3 122 Intermediate variables Description NT zone Number of daily trips from to zone z by means of mode m at time t trips Z Travelled distance from to zone z daily by means of mode m at time t Z Trip duration from to zone z daily by means of mode m at time t Z Network congestion map The road network can be coloured according to different characteristics of the road segments It is thus possible to visualize either the static characteristics of the network capacity or the dynamic characteristics maximum congestion congestion per time period minimum speed speed per time period maximum intensity and intensity per time period 3 4 9 Transport annex 1 Bootstrapping distribution The transport model uses trip matrices that express how many trips take place between pairs of zones A number of such matrices are included in the model one for each combination of mode time period and trip purpose 1 e a model based on 2 modes 3 time period and 4 purposes contains 2 3 4 24 trip matrices These matrices are accumulating variables meaning that their calculation involves their own lagged value In the first time step the user therefore has to supply the initial trip matrices t ODP A P This is problematic because usually matrices per mode and time period are available but not separated over multiple purposes Therefore the bootstrapping procedure presented i
358. tion for category r R where O 0 Vr s 1if O lt 0 category r dominates category s The result of the algorithm will be a time series of zoning maps for each land use function that indicate for each cell the resulting zoning status as defined above Formally let Z S the zoning status of land use function f eF in cell c at time t These zoning maps have to be converted to maps with numerical values to be used in the calculation of the total potential Therefore a value needs to be assigned to each zoning status These values can differ per land use function but the value for allowed should always be 1 and strictly restricted should always be 0 The value for weakly restricted should be between 0 and 1 both exclusive and actively stimulated should have a value strictly larger than 1 Furthermore we need to account for the De Facto land use For this purpose we define a matrix that shows on which existing land use a potential land use function is always allowed to develop Formally let DFZ 0 1 the De Facto status of land use function fon land use indicating if land use function f is always allowed to develop in areas where land use occurs V the value that needs to be assigned to zoning status seS for fs land use function f F and ZV 0 00 the value used for zoning in the calculation of the total potential for land use function f eF in cell c at time t Algorithm t
359. tivity productivity in each region for sector k people or jobs cell 216 t 7 Constant growth Coefficient that determines the growth Calibration ah of productivit of the average cell productivity in a p y 8 p y region for sector k Exponent Coefficient for the growth in activity Calibration activity growth the ratio of current activity and lagged activity in a region i for sector k Exponent Coefficient of the crowding effect in a Calibration crowding region for sector k Table 3 77 Input variables used in the productivity model block eae The productivity of sector k in Productivity model a region at time previous or jobs cell block time step Xa i region at time t or jobs w The activity in sector k and Activity model block Xa i region at time previous or jobs time step 0 Crowding The crowding effect in region i The crowding effect at time f model block Table 3 78 Output variables given by the productivity model block Ww Density The productivity of sector Number of people or Cell demands per ci k in region i at time t jobs cell Activity model block Attractivity for activity in all sectors model block The crowding effect model block Purpose and use This model block calculates the crowding effect The purpose is to account for the situation where demand for cells is actually higher than the number of available cells Process description The crowding
360. ton to confirm the changes you made The updated information for the selected map will be displayed on the list of maps Removing ancillary maps gt Select the ancillary map of that you want to remove from the list of maps gt Click on the Remove selected maps button A message window appears to ask you whether or not to remove the selected map gt Click the Yes button to remove 2 5 4 Options menu You can use the Options menu to personalise your workspace or to access the additional functionalities of METRONAMICA Write to Excel Establish or interrupt a link between Section Write to Excel METRONAMICA and the Microsoft Excel Workbook maps Store maps ee Seer ann a by the system in the form Section Section Log maps maps C a rst files Animation maps Store dynamic maps produced by the system in Section Somn maps the form of gif animations 162 Preferences Manage various application settings of Section Preferences METRONAMICA Preferences Click Preferences on the Options menu to control various application settings In the Preferences window that will open you can select how to deal with file associations made by the application whether to check for newer versions automatically and where to store temporary files created by the application The option Validate Geonamica project files geoproj before opening them is not supported in this version of Metronamica The system will let you know if the
361. tool Higher ordered categories overrule lower ordered categories This hierarchy among categories is assumed to be the same for all land use functions Since some plans only start after the initial year of the simulation each year the zoning status 1s corrected for the De Facto land use Hence if a location has a certain land use it will not be removed because of newly introduced zoning plans To disable this option uncheck all the check box in the De Facto zoning table through the modeller user interface For more information see the section Zoning With the zoning tool importing or editing zoning plans Zoning plans are represented as raster maps with categorical data You can import a new zoning plan if the map that represents that plan fulfils the following criteria e The projection extents and cell size of the raster map match those of the land use map e The values in the map are subsequent integers starting from 0 first category up to but excluding the number of categories A maximum of 250 categories per zoning plan is allowed e The no data value in the map should be set to 255 Maps can be preprocessed in a GIS to fulfil these criteria To import a new zoning plan gt Go to Main window Drivers Zoning Plans and categories Click the Import plan button Enter a Name Click the browse button inside the Map box to open the zoning plan to import VV V WV Select an existing legend or create a new o
362. tor and denominator are divided to obtain a single value per cell If the denominator in a cell equals 0 the value in that cell will be set to no data Algorithm for each cell c on the map initialise numerator and denominator to 0 for each cell c in the neighbourhood of cell c add the weights to the numerator and denominator end for numerator Si set the value of cell c to _ if both are positive or else to no data denominator end for Parameters input and output Table 3 35 Neighbourhood indicator parameters Search radius cells The radius in cells within which the algorithm looks for a land use that will be added to the numerator denominator or both By default the minimum value for this parameter is 1 and the maximum is 25 A value of 1 will only count the current cell The default value for this parameter is 10 Numerator The weight with which the corresponding land use will be added to the numerator These values can range from 0 to 1000 and are set to 0 by default Denominator The weight with which the corresponding land use will be added to the denominator These values can range from 0 to 1000 and are set to 0 by default 3 2 4 Distance indicator Purpose and use This type of indicator approximates the smallest distance from each cell occupied by one of a set of land uses to a cluster of cells that are occupied by a different set of land uses The minimum size of a cluster ca
363. trips per hour per purpose T Ls where the parameter a determines to what extent the first assessment of trip origins and destinations is dominant in the geration of trips may O a TDL Z The following two equations are applied to obtain the actual origins per hour O 7 and destinations per hour D that will be used in the remainder of the transport module OP Z lp t p be t p yor TT if gt 02 gt 0 QP _ Z tp Z ztp Z t TT it gt 07 0 NZ i 229 tn p Z tp t p tr P yp tte if D Dp gt 0 20 tmp _ tP O t TI ip tN P _ if D 0 NZ 2 a Parameters input and output Table 3 100 Parameters Number of trip Trips produced by one unit of activity a for purpose trips activity DNC origins p and urbanisation class uc in the start year of the simulation Number of trip Trips produced by one unit of activity a for purpose trips activity DNE destinations p and urbanisation class uc in the start year of the simulation Mobility growth Mobility growth factor for purpose p at time t that factor introduces to the model the temporal development of mobility as an exogenous trend the value for the start year should be 1 go p oe O nZ t L L Total number of transport analysis zones P of trips purpose p Cargo fraction Fraction of trips of purpose p that are primarily oun meant for transporting cargo with bigger vehicles like lorries at time t Cargo mode Number
364. ts that plan fulfils the following criteria e The projection extents and cell size of the raster map match those of the land use map e The values in the map are subsequent integers starting from 0 first category up to but excluding the number the number of categories A maximum of 250 categories per zoning plan is allowed e The no data value in the map should be set to 255 Maps can be preprocessed in a GIS to fulfil these criteria 4 3 5 D5 Zoning maps generated with external tools It is required one zoning map for each land use function covering both the calibration period between Base year and Base year2 and the simulation period beyond Base year2 Zoning maps could be generated with the zoning tool inside of Metronamica You can also generate these maps outside of METRONAMICA with external tools e g with the OVERLAY TOOL or GIS software before you introduce them in the system Zoning values in the file generated with external tools must be integers in the range of 0 to n as follows e 0 activity permitted in the cell from the beginning of the calibration period onwards e activity permitted in the cell from the first zoning period on e 2 activity permitted in the cell from the second zoning period on e 3 activity never permitted in the cell Similar to the suitability maps the OVERLAY TOOL is developed by RIKS to generate the zoning maps outside of METRONAMICA on the basis of the zoning base maps avail
365. ty or accessibility This is now made possible by the introduction of the user defined total potential where the equation used to compute the total potential can be entered through the graphical user interface GUI To change the total potential formula gt Go to Drivers Parameters Land use model Land use tab Parameter part 102 Land use Industry v Land use type Function Land use Neighbourhood I Accessibility I Suitability Zoning Input Initial land use map mica Randstad SL Data u2000 asc J Show Edit Land use changes ee Map Add time Total potential formula Predefined TP 1 Hog 1 random alpha FNS if N gt 0 A e252 AS oS 2 User defined TP Total potential formula Vacants TP I S Functions TP 1 4og 1 random alpha N if W gt 0 A S Z 2 Output Show total potential map Show current land use map gt Click on the Edit button next to Functions The Total potential formula dialog window opens gt Click on the radio box in front of Predefined to use the predefined total potential Or click on the radio box in front of User defined to use a user defined formula to compute the total potential The predefined formula will compute faster the user defined formula gives you the ability to change the way in which the total potential is composed of the different factors neig
366. um target cluster radius in terms of number of cells You can determine whether an infrastructure type is obstacle to the distance from residential to recreation or not by selecting or unselecting the check box next to that type in the table on the left top part of the dialog window When you created the project with the wizard you had defined which land uses were residential group and recreation group for the socio economic indicator For more information see the section Entering the basic land use model parameter In the table on the right top part of the dialog window you can still set a land use as a residential land use by selecting Source on the dropdown list next to that land use You can set that a land use is related to recreation by selecting Target on the dropdown list next to that land use A land use is neither a residential land use nor a land use related to recreation should be marked with on the dropdown list next to that land use In the Output part the average distances from residential to recreation per region are displayed in the table which are calculated on the basis of the land use map for the current simulation year You can open the Distance from residential to recreation map by clicking the Show maps button Soil sealing This indicator is a predefined mask mapping indicator The soil sealing indicator indicates the soil sealing areas on the current land use map The Soil sealing tab is structured by the Inpu
367. use map The land use map for the start year of the simulation Land use map The current land use map Basis map Depending on the algorithm e g storm intensity map flood intensity map low land map steep slope map etc Output Table 3 33 Output given in the spatial indicators model Depending on the algorithm Depending on the algorithm References Hagen A 2003 Fuzzy set approach to assessing similarity of categorical maps International Journal for Geographical Information Science volume 17 issue 3 pp 235 249 Hagen Zanker A Straatman B and Uljee I 2005 Further developments of a fuzzy set map comparison approach International Journal of Geographical Information Science volume 19 issue 7 pp 769 785 Klepper O 1997 Stapeling van milieuthema s in termen van kans op voorkomen Bilthoven RIVM ECO notitie 97 01 Lavalle C L Demicelli M Kasanko N McCormich J Barredo M Turchini M da Gra a Saraiva F Nunes da Silva I Loupa Ramos and F Pinto Monteiro 2002 Towards an urban atlas Environmental issue report no 30 European Environmental Agency Copenhagen Denmark Weber J L and Hall M 2001 Towards spatial and territorial indicators using land cover data European Environmental Agency Technical report 59 Copenhagen Denmark 3 2 2 Cluster indicator Purpose and use This type of indicator can be used to pinpoint clusters consisting of a certain land use or a certain group
368. ut and output Table 3 90 Activity conversion input variables The region number of the specified cell c Region map The Transport Analysis Zone number of the gt Reston zone map specified cell c The land use of the specified cell c at time t poo Set of vacant states used in the land use map Land use map Taa and use map Set of features used in the land use map Landusemap sid Land use map Set of sectors used in the regional model MBB Regional interaction When f represents a land use function the proportion MBB Regional of a cell with land use function f that is considered in interaction sector k otherwise 0 Density of activity a in region r at time t Activi MBB Regional ie ty cell interaction Table 3 91 Activity conversion output variables Set of transport activities Urbanization level Level of transport activity a in zone z at time Activity Production and attraction Transport indicators DA Density of transport activity a in zone z at Activity cell Urbanization level a time t FA The proportion of a cell with land use function Zonal accessibility f a A e f that is considered in activity a Table 3 92 Activity conversion intermediate variables DL Density of transport activity a in region r for Activity Urbanization level nali each cell with land use Ju at time t 3 4 3 Local activities to transport zonal activities Purpose and use This model block will only be us
369. ut and output Table 3 62 Parameters used in the job potential model block 211 Distance decay for job potential The distance decay for sector k Table 3 63 Input variables used in the job dela model block Interregional The distance between region 1 Metronamica ML distance and region j at time t Default value or specified by user The generalised cost is Currency Metronamica LUT expressed as the distance MBB Transport between region 7 and region j at time t The activity in sector k and Number of jobs Activity model block region i at time previous time step Table 3 64 Output variables given by the job potential model block y T Job The job potential in sector k and Attractivity for activity in i potential region at time all sectors model block The activity potential model block Purpose and use This model block determines the activity potential per region per sector Process description The activity potential per region and sector is a function of the level of activities in the same sector but in different regions in relation to the distances between the regions Algorithm The function which determines the value of the output variable looks as follows Ta 7 Dll d dj l TX Parameters input and output Table 3 65 Parameters used in the activity potential model block Distance decay for activity potential The distance decay for sector k Calibration Table 3 66 Input variable
370. ut the zoning tool zoning tab If the zoning tool is excluded in the project file that you are working on you can access the contents depicted as the figure below by clicking the Zoning tab The Output part is related to the selected land use in the control pane and use model Land use industry v Land use type Function Land use Neighbourhood Accessibility Suitability Zoning Input Zoning map E RIKS Netherlands_ML Data Zoning_Industry rst Show Edit Parameters Enactment date phase 1 1995 Jan 01 Enactment date phase 2 2015 Jan 01 Zoning anticpations for all land uses Type Default v Coefficient 15 Output Show numerical zoning map The input to the Zoning part of the land use model are the Zoning maps which are prepared with the help of the OVERLAY TOOL A zoning map is a categorical map with the zoning state values Four zoning states are possible se O Allowed C C Allowed from t1 C E Allowed from t2 4 E Prohibited e Allowed value 0 the activity is already present in the cell and or is allowed from the beginning of the simulation onwards green cell e Allowed from tl value 1 the activity is allowed in the cell from the first planning period onwards yellow cell e Allowed from t2 value 2 the activity is allowed in the cell from the second planning period onwards orange cell e Prohibited value 2 the activity is never allowed i
371. ver or discard the changes and save the set of active sub scenarios in an integrated scenario Any changes made to other parameters accessible from the Parameters page in the Main window are also saved You cannot discard these changes and you cannot create scenarios for them SI gt Re open the existing project e g Randstad geoproj Do not save changes you have made on the open project gt Select the Baseline on the dropdown list next to Integrated scenario on the toolbar gt Go to Main window Drivers External factors gt Click the graph icon next to the land use of interest The corresponding Demand for Window opens where is the land use of interest gt Increase the value for the last year of the simulation by right clicking on the point for the last year and enter the new value in the text box next to Y Press OK The active sub scenario will change to modified gt Click the Save button on the toolbar The Save project dialog will pop up It looks similar to the image depicted below Save project Land use demand Save in active sub scenario Baseline j Discard changes r Zoning Save in active sub scenario Baseline Save as new sub scenario Infrastructure Baseline Save as active integrated scenario Baseline O Save as new integrated scenario Integrated scenario description Initial setup The top part of this dialog provides settings for each driver If a dr
372. ver space Constraints e Every cell of every region must be covered by exactly one transport zone and every cell of every transport zone must be covered by exactly one region 223 e The maximum total number of iteration is 10 3 4 2 Regional activities to transport zonal activities Purpose and use This model block will only be used when the simulation contains a regional model For the case exluding a regional model see section Local activities to transport zonal activities The transport model operates at the scale of transport zones The regional model however operates at the scale of regions The activities of the regional model are input to the transport model therefore the activities are disaggregated Process description The assumption underlying the disaggregation is that within a region land use densities can be considered uniform in space The activity in a transport zone follows from integration over space For the transport model the regions of the study area are sometimes too large to produce realistic results Therefore the transport zones are normally smaller than the regions Especially in densely populated areas the transport zones are kept small to provide more accurate results A transport analysis zone can consist of multiple parts of multiple regions Every cell of every region must be covered by exactly one transport analysis zone And every cell of every transport analysis zone must be covered by exactly
373. ving changes 2 1 9 If you experience problems If you experience problems installing or running METRONAMICA please contact RIKS with the version number of the application see the section About Research Institute for Knowledge Systems bv To the attention of Hedwig van Delden P O Box 463 6200 AL Maastricht The Netherlands Tel 31 43 3501750 33 Fax 31 43 3501751 E mail info riks nl Website www riks nl 34 2 2 Running the simulation This section describes the primary steps of running a simulation with METRONAMICA Opening a project file editing input and displaying output saving changes running a scenario saving results and analysing results 2 2 1 Project file integrated scenario and sub scenario It is important to understand how the input data files and parameters that are required to run models in the system are organized in METRONAMICA We use the terms project file integrated scenario and sub scenario to describe the different levels of data and file management and parameter value settings In the context of this document a scenario is considered to be a set of values for each driver in METRONAMICA for more information on drivers in Metronamica see the section Setting up the drivers In particular you can make scenarios for each of the drivers that are accessible through the main window For example in the external factors you can define increased trend for area of forest and call this scenario inc
374. visualise an indicator take the following steps gt gt Go to the Indicators tab of the Main window Select the sections in the navigation pane on the left hand side of the Main window the type of indicator you are interested in To visualise the regional average numerical values in the table gt gt gt 90 Go to the Environmental or Socio economic section of the Indicators tab Go to the Regional values part Select your indicator of interest on the dropdown list next to Indicator The regional average values of the selected indicator are displayed for each region on the screen m Main window ven ase Distance from residential to work Distance from residential to recreation Regional values Indicator Distance from residential to work v Region Average distance km Oost Groningen 2 24275 Delfzijl 0 2 34731 Overig Groningen 2 21514 Noord Friesland 2 86709 Zuidwest Friesland 2 86318 Zuidoost Friesland 2 00978 Noord Drenthe 1 85714 Zuidoost Drenthe 2 58993 Zuidwest Drenthe 2 6299 Noord Overijssel 1 34625 Zuidwest Overijssel 1 94238 Twente 1 16498 Veluwe 1 22245 Achterhoek 1 49984 Aggl Arnhem en Nijmegen 1 06945 Zuidwest Gelderland 1 45138 Utrecht 1 18964 To visualise indicator maps gt Go to the Environmental or Socio economic section of the Indicators tab gt Click on the Show map button next to the indicator of interest A map window opens wh
375. w In the MCK you can 58 compare the different maps that have been logged See the MCK user manual for more information Animate maps Click Animate maps on the Options menu to create animated images of maps that are calculated by METRONAMICA for use in a presentation or on a website Animations are stored as animated GIF files Each simulation step will be one frame in the file gt Click Animate maps on the Options menu The Animation settings window will appear gt In the Maps to animate select the land use map Entire model Land use model Land use Land use map gt Change the animation folder if you want to save the animated GIF files in a different folder For example you can use the name of the active integrated scenario as the last subfolder gt Under Animation size select the option Screen 800 x 600 if you want to generate an animation for a presentation or website Select the option Actual size if you want to assure that each pixel in the land use map corresponds to one pixel in the animated image Note that the exact size of the generated images can differ from the selected size because the aspect ratio of a map is preserved The selected option will limit the maximum size of the image so if you selected Screen 800 x 600 the generated image will be no wider than 800 pixels and no higher than 600 pixels gt Click the OK button in the Animation settin
376. w down factor slow down used factor Accessibility Figure 3 11 Transport Figure 3 12 cars hour subtype intensity lower bound lower bound of subtype SubAcc of accessibilit y type Acc There are three subtypes per accessibilit y type the first lower bound Should be Zero Trip duration Trip duration for trips between zones Z and z4 by exogenous mode m during time period fp at time only available for exogenously modelled modes Trip distance Static trip distance for trips between zones z and z4 by exogenous mode m during time period tp only available for exogenously modelled modes Extra cost Static extra cost for trips between zones Z and zq by exogenous mode m during time period tp only available for exogenously modelled modes Z network at time CSN The node where link of the road network originates from at time t a i network goes to at time t Taz Transport The zone where node n is located analysis zone in at time f Specifies zone 0 when node n is located outside the modelling area Table 3 109 Transport assignment inputs Taz The Transport Analysis Zone number of the Transport Analysis specified cell c zone map Urbanisation class of zone z at time t gt Urbanization level Zz 240 Number of trips between origin zone z and trips hour Distribution and destination zone zg for mode m in time period modal split tp per hour at time t Table 3 110 Tra
377. w that displays the influence function of each land use on each vacant or function land use Process description Each land use that occurs in a cell has an effect on the possible future occurrence of each land use function in all cells within the neighbourhood that is dependent on the distance between the two cells The influence functions describe the effect of one land use on another at each distance in the neighbourhood These influences are accumulated to produce the neighbourhood effect in each cell for each land use function Algorithm The neighbourhood effect in cell c for land use A R f 1s calculated based on the land use occupied by cell c f c the influence function w d expressing the strength of the influence of a cell with land use f on land use f for each distance d in the CA neighbourhood the neighbourhood of cell c D c and the Euclidian distance between cell a and cell b d a b Parameters input and output Table 3 7 Neighbourhood input Koc Land use map The map that contains the land use that occupies each Land use model cell at time t Table 3 8 Neighbourhood parameters Land use map The land use that occupies each cell c at time t Land use mode I LL Inertia conversion The inertia and conversion effect for land use vacant v at cell c Neighbourhooc tle effect for vacant block land uses ee Ww d Rules Influence The spline that determines the influence of a land use o
378. while XP gt Xp keKp Here K 1s the set of all population sectors Parameters input and output Table 3 59 Parameters used in the population potential model block n Distance decay for population The distance decay for sector k Calibration potential Table 3 60 Input variables used in the population potential model block Interregional The distance between region i and region Metronamica distance j at time t ML Default value or specified by user The generalised cost is expressed as the Currency Metronamica distance between region i and region j at LUT MBB time Transport ly The activity in sector k and region i at Number Activity model ka time previous time step of people block Table 3 61 Sat aaa variables given by the population aban model block Population The population potential in sector k Attractivity for activity in i potential and region i at time t all sectors model block The job potential model block Purpose and use This model block determines the job potential per region per sector Process description The job potential per region and sector is a function of the sums of job activities 1 e the number of jobs in all regions and the distances between the regions Algorithm The function which determines the value of the output variable looks as follows va Delad while XS E gt keK Here K is the set of all economic sectors Parameters inp
379. work Distance from residential to recreation Soil sealing Urba 4 gt Indicator type Cluster indicator Calculate Parameters Minimum duster radius In the Parameters part you can define the minimum size of a cluster in the text box next to Minimum cluster radius in terms of number of cells This means that the indicator will work within a neighbourhood of the cell being analysed that has a radius equal to the value of this parameter You can determine whether an infrastructure type is obstacle to an urban cluster or not by selecting or unselecting the check box next to that type in the table on the left top part of the dialog window When you created the project with the wizard you had defined which land use was urban group for the environmental indicator For more information see the section Entering the basic land use model parameter You can still set whether a land use contributes to the urban cluster size or not by selecting or unselecting the check box next to that land use in the table on the right top part of the dialog window In the Output part the urban cluster sizes and the number of clusters are displayed in the table which are calculated on the basis of the land use map for the current simulation year You can open the Urban clusters map by clicking the Show maps button Distance from residential to work The indicator is a predefined distance indicator The distance from residential to work indicator
380. work of interest from the dropdown list next to Network layer gt Select the network change for the time of interest to open the network change map window gt Double click on the link of interest on the network changes map window The Properties dialog window opens All the available link properties of the selected network are displayed in the Properties dialog window You can edit the link properties for the selected link from here e If you want to add the selected link enter value 0 in the cell for DeltaType 115 e If you want to delete the selected link enter value 1 in the cell for DeltaType gt Click Cancel to close the Properties dialog window gt Click Cancel to close the Properties dialog window gt Or click OK to confirm the change that you made A message window appears to ask you whether you want to save the changes you have made or not F gt If you want to save the changes you made specify the name and path of the file that you want to save changes to and press the Save button in the Save network change layer dialog window Press OK in the Save network change dialog window Network changes for layer Roads_network Nodes Node width i Link color Link width x Hide outside modelling area I intercity stations har s o Region boundaries LJ Stations jo Road expansion 2010 6 E Ordinary roads O E Ramps G Waterways C E Airport Named viewports
381. y Housing high den I Industrv lt Zoning state values Zoning state function Greenhouses Housing low Housing high Industry Services Actively stimulated 1 5 1 5 1 5 LS Allowed 1 1 1 1 Weakly restricted 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 Strictly restricted 0 0 0 0 Show numerical zoning map The input to the Zoning part of the land use model is the Zoning maps which are generated with the help of the zoning tool in METRONAMICA A zoning map is a categorical map with the zoning state values No data values are depicted on the map as white You can access the zoning tool via the user interface of the land use model by clicking the Go to zoning tool button on the Zoning tab For more information about the zoning tool see the section Policy measures zoning The categorical zoning maps need to be converted into numerical zoning maps which have numerical values to be used in the computation of the total potential You can set the parameters to interpret the categories in the Parameters part of the Zoning tab The conversion takes into account the De Facto zoning and the zoning state value for each land use function e Ifa check box in the De Facto zoning table is selected for certain land use and for certain function each year the zoning status will be corrected for the De 123 Facto land use For instance the check box for Agriculture land use and for the Agriculture function is checked if a location has agriculture o
382. y The initial count is taken from data Process description The level of activity in a region is composed of the inert activity the immigrated activity and a part of the overall national growth of activity Algorithm The function which determines the level of activity looks as follows X p X d M A B k i Parameters input and output Table 3 47 Parameters used in the activity model block Inertia in relocating of activity The inertia for sector k e Calibration Table 3 48 Input variables used in the activity model block 206 fae activity in sector A and region at Number of Activity model fame t 1 previous time step people or jobs block eel The migration The activity in sector k Migration model said that move from region i to region j at people or jobs block time The fraction of national growth of Number of National growth Er activity in sector k that ends up in people or jobs model block region i at time t Table 3 49 Output variables given by the activity model block t R Activity The activity in Number of Migration model block sector kand region people orjobs The crowding effect model block i at time t The population potential model block The job potential model block The activity potential model block National growth model block Cell demands per Productivity model block Indicators 3 3 3 National growth Purpose and use This model block determines the par
383. y is first determined for each node or link type separately and thereafter combined into one value for each land use and each cell For each land use the local accessibility for a certain link type can be either decreasing or increasing over distance indicated by a positive or negative value for the distance decay parameter respectively A positive value indicates that the land use needs to be located close to that link type whereas a negative value indicates that the land use needs to be located away from the link type The functional form of this effect 1s hyperbolic with respect to the distance where the distance decay parameter determines the rate of the increase or decrease see figure 3 4 Note that the local accessibility per link type lies in the range 0 1 1 Goo d Figure 3 4 Effect of proximity to the network as a function of the distance for a value of 1 and l respectively for the distance decay parameter An increase in the absolute value of the parameter will multiply the graph with respect to the vertical axis 176 When there is a positive value for the distance decay parameter for a particular land use and link type the land use prefers to be located close to that link type When there is a negative value the land use prefers to be located away from that link type To combine all the local accessibilities per link type we need to make a distinction between these positive and negative effects since they com
384. y out a structured analysis It follows the steps Drivers Scenarios Indicators and Analysis each of which 1s explained in more detail below Extemal factors 2 3 1 Overview of the policy interface This section gives a brief overview of the steps you can take to carry out a policy impact assessment with METRONAMICA In the following sections each step will be explained in detail When clicking on the Drivers tab in the Main window you get access to the different types of drivers External factors Policy measures and Parameters The first two are part of the policy interface of the system the last provides access to the details of the underlying models for scientists or modellers Clicking on each of the icons opens the settings for this driver or set of drivers in the content pane on the right Depending on the project configuration of your project file Metronamica SL Metronamica ML or Metronamica LUT with options of using zoning tool or not using zoning tool the contents under each driver mentioned above could be different For more information about the project configuration see the section Selecting the project configuration In this chapter the Metronamica SL 1s used as an example 68 Step 1 Setting up the drivers Drivers incorporated in the system are organised in two groups External factors and Policy measures When you click on one of these you get access to the underlying information This is also the entry point for
385. you import it in METRONAMICA For the sake of the exercise however we let you edit the zoning maps in METRONAMICA In the next the sections you are going to learn the policy measures related to the infrastructure networks Without the zoning tool deleting an imported zoning map gt Go to the Drivers tab in the Main window and click the Policy measures icon in the navigation pane gt Select Zoning from the dropdown list next to Driver gt Select the land use of interest from the dropdown list next to Land use gt Select the path and file name of the zoning map for the selected land use in the text box next to Zoning map gt Press the Delete on your key board The is displayed in the text box next to Zoning map Now you have deleted the zoning map for the selected land use Policy measures Infrastructure The relationship between land use and infrastructure systems e g road network 1s generally recognized by planning professionals as well as scientists Also and importantly it 1s recognized that the relationship is reciprocal which means that developments in land use are in part a consequence of the transport system and at the same time developments in the transport system are by large the effect of land use changes The Metronamica SL and Metronamica ML only incorporate a one way influence of transport on land use In the Metronamica LUT a transport model is incorporated with which the impact of land u

METRONAMICA

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents